Sie sind auf Seite 1von 244

Operation

Industrial Generator Sets

Models:

20-3250 kW
Controller:
Decision-Makerr 6000

Firmware (Code) Version 2.9.0 or higher

TP-6750 7/18d
WARNING: This product can expose you WARNING: Breathing diesel engine
to chemicals, including carbon monoxide exhaust exposes you to chemicals known to
and benzene, which are known to the State the State of California to cause cancer and
of California to cause cancer and birth birth defects or other reproductive harm.
defects or other reproductive harm. S Always start and operate the engine in
For more information go to a well-ventilated area.
www.P65warnings.ca.gov S If in an enclosed area, vent the exhaust
to the outside.
S Do not modify or tamper with the
exhaust system.
S Do not idle the engine except as
necessary.
For more information go to
www.P65warnings.ca.gov/diesel
Product Identification Information

Product identification numbers determine service parts. Controller Identification


Record the product identification numbers in the spaces
Record the controller description from the generator set
below immediately after unpacking the products so that
operation manual, spec sheet, or sales invoice. Record
the numbers are readily available for future reference.
the Controller Serial Number from the controller
Record field-installed kit numbers after installing the nameplate.
kits.
Controller Description Decision-Makerr 6000
Generator Set Identification Numbers
Controller Serial Number
Record the product identification numbers from the
generator set nameplate(s). Firmware/Software Version Numbers
Model Designation Record the version and reference numbers as shipped
Specification Number from the manufacturer. Determine the Application
Serial Number Program Version Number as shown in Menu 20.
Determine the Personality Profile Reference Number
Accessory Number Accessory Description
from the disk supplied with the literature packet.
Application Program Version Number
Personality Profile Reference Number
User Parameter File Reference Number

Version Number Upgrades/Updates


Record the version number upgrade/updates when
installed.
Engine Identification
Record the product identification information from the Version No./Date Installed
engine nameplate.
Firmware Options
Manufacturer
Record the firmware options.
Model Designation
Serial Number Number and Description
Table of Contents

Safety Precautions and Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
List of Related Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Section 1 Specifications and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Controller Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.1 Annunciator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.2.2 Digital Display and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2.3 Switches, Alarm Horn, and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.4 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2.5 Controller Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.6 Terminal Strips and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.7 Circuit Board Interconnections for Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2.8 Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 Controller Logic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.1 Status Event and Fault Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.2 Voltage Regulator and Calibration Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.3.3 Voltage Regulator Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Section 2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.1 Prestart Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.2 Exercising Generator Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3 Controller Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3.1 Paralleling Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3.2 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.3.3 Stopping (User Stopping and Fault Shutdown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.4 Emergency Stop Switch Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3.5 System Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3.6 System Shutdown Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.7 Controller Resetting (Following System Shutdown or Warning) . . . . . . . 45
2.4 Factory Reserved Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.5 Reviewing Digital Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.5.1 Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.5.2 Auto-Scroll Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.5.3 Request and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.6 Monitoring and Programming Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.6.1 PC Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.6.2 Modbusr Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.7 Reviewing Menu Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.7.1 Menu 1—Generator Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.7.2 Menu 2—Engine Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.7.3 Menu 3—Analog Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.7.4 Menu 4—Operational Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.7.5 Menu 5—Event History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.7.6 Menu 6—Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.7.7 Menu 7—Generator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.7.8 Menu 8—Time Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.7.9 Menu 9—Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.7.10 Menu 10—Output Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.7.11 Menu 11—Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.7.12 Menu 12—Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.7.13 Menu 13—Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.7.14 Menu 14—Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

TP-6750 7/18d Table of Contents 3


Table of Contents, continued

2.7.15 Menu 15—Protective Relays (PR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72


2.7.16 Menu 16—Paralleling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.7.17 Menu 17—Load Share Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.7.18 Menu 18—Battery Chargers (Version 2.9.0 or Higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.7.19 Menu 20—Factory Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.8 Local Programming Mode On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.8.1 Menu 1—Generator Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.8.2 Menu 2—Engine Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.8.3 Menu 3—Analog Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.8.4 Menu 4—Operational Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2.8.5 Menu 5—Event History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.8.6 Menu 6—Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.8.7 Menu 7—Generator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.8.8 Menu 8—Time Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2.8.9 Menu 9—Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2.8.10 Menu 10—Output Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.8.11 Menu 11—Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.8.12 Menu 12—Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
2.8.13 Menu 13—Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.8.14 Menu 14—Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2.8.15 Menu 15—Protective Relays (PR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.8.16 Menu 16—Paralleling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
2.8.17 Menu 17—Load Share Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.8.18 Menu 18—Battery Chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2.8.19 Menu 20—Factory Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3.1 Alternator Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3.2 Engine Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3.3 Service Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
3.4 Alternator Bearing Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.4.1 20--300 kW Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.4.2 300--2250 kW Models with 4M/5M/7M Single-Bearing Alternator . . . . . 166
3.4.3 1250 kW and Larger Models with 10M Two-Bearing Alternator . . . . . . . 166
3.5 Diesel Fuel Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.5.1 Bleeding Air from Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.6 Gas Fuel Systems (REZG_ and REZX_/RZX_ models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.6.1 Gas Fuel System Concept
(Single Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.6.2 LPG Liquid Withdrawal Fuel System Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.6.3 Natural Gas and LPG Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.6.4 Fuel System Changeover Kits (Dual Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.6.5 Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) Heater Kit GM78171-KP1
(125/150REZG_/RZG_ models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.7 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.7.1 Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.7.2 Cooling System Component Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.7.3 Procedure to Drain Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.7.4 Procedure to Flush and Clean Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.7.5 Procedure to Refill Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.8 Radiator Fan Bolt Retorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.9 Radiator Expansion Joint Loosening—Initial Setup Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3.10 Radiator Fan Bearing Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3.11 Air Cleaner Restrictor Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3.12 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
3.12.1 Clean Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.12.2 Electrolyte Level Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4 Table of Contents TP-6750 7/18d
Table of Contents, continued

3.12.3 Specific Gravity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176


3.12.4 Charge Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.13 Storage Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.13.1 Lubricating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.13.2 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.13.3 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.13.4 Internal Engine Components (Gas-Fueled Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.13.5 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.13.6 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Section 4 General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.1 General Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4.2 Controller Display, Paralleling, and Voltage Regulation Troubleshooting Chart . 183
4.3 Controller Error Message Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Section 5 Generator Set Reconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.2 Voltage Reconnection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Section 6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6.1 Accessories and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6.1.1 Audiovisual Alarm Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6.1.2 Common Failure Relay Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
6.1.3 Battery Charger Kit with Alarm Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
6.1.4 Ground Fault Annunciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
6.1.5 Idle (Speed) Mode Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.1.6 Low Fuel (Level/Pressure) Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.1.7 Prime Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.1.8 Remote Emergency Stop Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.1.9 Remote Reset Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6.1.10 Remote Serial Annunciator (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6.1.11 Run Relay Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6.1.12 Shunt-Trip Line Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6.1.13 Single-Relay Dry Contact Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
6.1.14 Ten-Relay Dry Contact Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
6.1.15 Twenty-Relay Dry Contact Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
6.2 Accessory Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Appendix A Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Appendix B User-Defined Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Appendix C Application Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Appendix D Alternator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Appendix E Status Events and Faults by Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Appendix F Paralleling Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Prestart Commissioning when Paralleling Generator Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Generator Set Master Switch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Paralleling Breaker Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Circuit Breaker and Synch Control Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

TP-6750 7/18d Table of Contents 5


Notes

6 TP-6750 7/18d
Safety Precautions and Instructions

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.


Electromechanical equipment,
Accidental Starting WARNING
including generator sets, transfer
switches, switchgear, and accessories, WARNING
can cause bodily harm and pose
life-threatening danger when
improperly installed, operated, or
maintained. To prevent accidents be Explosion.
aware of potential dangers and act Can cause severe injury or death.
safely. Read and follow all safety Relays in the battery charger
precautions and instructions. SAVE Accidental starting. cause arcs or sparks.
THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Can cause severe injury or death.
Locate the battery in a well-ventilated
Disconnect the battery cables before area. Isolate the battery charger from
This manual has several types of safety working on the generator set.
precautions and instructions: Danger, explosive fumes.
Remove the negative (--) lead first
Warning, Caution, and Notice. when disconnecting the battery.
Reconnect the negative (--) lead last Battery electrolyte is a diluted
when reconnecting the battery. sulfuric acid. Battery acid can cause
DANGER severe injury or death. Battery acid
can cause blindness and burn skin.
Disabling the generator set. Always wear splashproof safety
Danger indicates the presence of a
Accidental starting can cause goggles, rubber gloves, and boots
hazard that will cause severe
severe injury or death. Before when servicing the battery. Do not
personal injury, death, or substantial
working on the generator set or open a sealed battery or mutilate the
property damage.
equipment connected to the set, battery case. If battery acid splashes in
disable the generator set as follows: the eyes or on the skin, immediately
(1) Press the generator set on/off flush the affected area for 15 minutes
WARNING button to shut down the generator set. with large quantities of clean water.
All indicator lamps dim. (2) Disconnect Seek immediate medical aid in the case
Warning indicates the presence of a the power to the battery charger, if of eye contact. Never add acid to a
hazard that can cause severe equipped. (3) Remove the battery battery after placing the battery in
personal injury, death, or substantial cables, negative (--) lead first. service, as this may result in hazardous
property damage. Reconnect the negative (--) lead last spattering of battery acid.
when reconnecting the battery. Follow
these precautions to prevent the Battery acid cleanup. Battery acid
CAUTION starting of the generator set by the can cause severe injury or death.
remote start/stop switch. Battery acid is electrically conductive
Caution indicates the presence of a and corrosive. Add 500 g (1 lb.) of
hazard that will or can cause minor bicarbonate of soda (baking soda) to a
personal injury or property damage. Battery container with 4 L (1 gal.) of water and
mix the neutralizing solution. Pour the
NOTICE neutralizing solution on the spilled
battery acid and continue to add the
Notice communicates installation, WARNING neutralizing solution to the spilled
operation, or maintenance information
battery acid until all evidence of a
that is safety related but not hazard
chemical reaction (foaming) has
related.
ceased. Flush the resulting liquid with
Safety decals affixed to the equipment water and dry the area.
in prominent places alert the operator
or service technician to potential Sulfuric acid in batteries.
hazards and explain how to act safely. Can cause severe injury or death.
The decals are shown throughout this
publication to improve operator Wear protective goggles and
recognition. Replace missing or clothing. Battery acid may cause
damaged decals. blindness and burn skin.

TP-6750 7/18d Safety Precautions and Instructions 7


Battery gases. Explosion can cause
severe injury or death. Battery gases
Engine Backfire/Flash Generator set operation. Carbon
monoxide can cause severe nausea,
can cause an explosion. Do not smoke Fire fainting, or death. Carbon monoxide
or permit flames or sparks to occur near is an odorless, colorless, tasteless,
a battery at any time, particularly when WARNING nonirritating gas that can cause death if
it is charging. Do not dispose of a inhaled for even a short time. Avoid
battery in a fire. To prevent burns and breathing exhaust fumes when working
sparks that could cause an explosion, on or near the generator set. Never
avoid touching the battery terminals operate the generator set inside a
with tools or other metal objects. building unless the exhaust gas is
Remove all jewelry before servicing the Risk of fire. piped safely outside. Never operate
equipment. Discharge static electricity Can cause severe injury or death. the generator set where exhaust gas
from your body before touching could accumulate and seep back inside
batteries by first touching a grounded Do not smoke or permit flames or a potentially occupied building.
metal surface away from the battery. To sparks near fuels or the fuel system.
avoid sparks, do not disturb the battery Carbon monoxide symptoms.
charger connections while the battery Servicing the fuel system. A flash Carbon monoxide can cause severe
is charging. Always turn the battery fire can cause severe injury or death. nausea, fainting, or death. Carbon
charger off before disconnecting the Do not smoke or permit flames or monoxide is a poisonous gas present in
battery connections. Ventilate the sparks near the carburetor, fuel line, exhaust gases. Carbon monoxide is an
compartments containing batteries to fuel filter, fuel pump, or other potential odorless, colorless, tasteless,
prevent accumulation of explosive sources of spilled fuels or fuel vapors. nonirritating gas that can cause death if
gases. Catch fuels in an approved container inhaled for even a short time. Carbon
when removing the fuel line or monoxide poisoning symptoms include
Battery short circuits. Explosion carburetor. but are not limited to the following:
can cause severe injury or death. D Light-headedness, dizziness
Short circuits can cause bodily injury Servicing the air cleaner. A sudden D Physical fatigue, weakness in
and/or equipment damage. backfire can cause severe injury or joints and muscles
Disconnect the battery before death. Do not operate the generator D Sleepiness, mental fatigue,
generator set installation or set with the air cleaner removed. inability to concentrate
maintenance. Remove all jewelry or speak clearly, blurred vision
before servicing the equipment. Use Combustible materials. A fire can D Stomachache, vomiting, nausea
tools with insulated handles. Remove cause severe injury or death. If experiencing any of these symptoms
the negative (--) lead first when Generator set engine fuels and fuel and carbon monoxide poisoning is
disconnecting the battery. Reconnect vapors are flammable and explosive. possible, seek fresh air immediately
the negative (--) lead last when Handle these materials carefully to and remain active. Do not sit, lie down,
reconnecting the battery. Never minimize the risk of fire or explosion. or fall asleep. Alert others to the
connect the negative (--) battery cable Equip the compartment or nearby area possibility of carbon monoxide
to the positive (+) connection terminal with a fully charged fire extinguisher. poisoning. Seek medical attention if
of the starter solenoid. Do not test the Select a fire extinguisher rated ABC or the condition of affected persons does
battery condition by shorting the BC for electrical fires or as not improve within minutes of breathing
terminals together. recommended by the local fire code or fresh air.
an authorized agency. Train all
Battery gases. Explosion can cause personnel on fire extinguisher Do not use copper tubing in diesel
severe injury or death. Incorrect use operation and fire prevention exhaust systems. Sulfur in diesel
of the equalize charge state may lead to procedures. exhaust causes rapid deterioration
hazardous situations. Equalization is of copper tubing exhaust systems,
ONLY applicable for flooded lead acid
resulting in exhaust leakage.
(FLA) type batteries and will damage Exhaust System
gel, absorbed glass mat (AGM), or
nickel-cadmium (NiCad) type batteries.
In the controller menu or SiteTecht
WARNING
settings, verify that the battery topology
is set correctly for the battery type used.
Do not smoke or permit flames, sparks,
or other sources of ignition to occur
near a battery at any time.
Carbon monoxide.
Can cause severe nausea,
fainting, or death.
The exhaust system must be
leakproof and routinely inspected.

8 Safety Precautions and Instructions TP-6750 7/18d


Fuel System Draining the fuel system. Explosive
fuel vapors can cause severe injury
Hazardous Voltage/
or death. Spilled fuel can cause an Moving Parts
WARNING explosion. Use a container to catch fuel
when draining the fuel system. Wipe up DANGER
spilled fuel after draining the system.
Gas fuel leaks. Explosive fuel
vapors can cause severe injury or
death. Fuel leakage can cause an
Explosive fuel vapors. explosion. Check the LPG vapor or
natural gas fuel system for leakage by Hazardous voltage.
Can cause severe injury or death. Will cause severe injury or death.
using a soap and water solution with
Use extreme care when handling, the fuel system test pressurized to
Disconnect all power sources before
storing, and using fuels. 6--8 ounces per square inch
opening the enclosure.
(10--14 inches water column). Do not
use a soap solution containing either
The fuel system. Explosive fuel ammonia or chlorine because both
vapors can cause severe injury or prevent bubble formation. A successful DANGER
death. Vaporized fuels are highly test depends on the ability of the
explosive. Use extreme care when solution to bubble.
handling and storing fuels. Store fuels
in a well-ventilated area away from LPG liquid withdrawal fuel leaks.
spark-producing equipment and out of Explosive fuel vapors can cause
the reach of children. Never add fuel to severe injury or death. Fuel leakage Hazardous voltage. Moving parts.
the tank while the engine is running can cause an explosion. Check the Will cause severe injury or death.
because spilled fuel may ignite on LPG liquid withdrawal fuel system for
contact with hot parts or from sparks. leakage by using a soap and water Operate the generator set only when
Do not smoke or permit flames or solution with the fuel system test all guards and electrical enclosures
sparks to occur near sources of spilled pressurized to at least 90 psi are in place.
fuel or fuel vapors. Keep the fuel lines (621 kPa). Do not use a soap solution
and connections tight and in good containing either ammonia or chlorine
condition. Do not replace flexible fuel because both prevent bubble WARNING
lines with rigid lines. Use flexible formation. A successful test depends
sections to avoid fuel line breakage on the ability of the solution to bubble.
caused by vibration. Do not operate the
generator set in the presence of fuel
leaks, fuel accumulation, or sparks. Hazardous Noise
Repair fuel systems before resuming Hazardous voltage.
generator set operation. Backfeed to the utility system can
CAUTION cause property damage, severe
Explosive fuel vapors can cause
injury, or death.
severe injury or death. Take
additional precautions when using the If the generator set is used for
following fuels: standby power, install an automatic
transfer switch to prevent inadvertent
Propane (LPG)—Adequate ventilation
interconnection of standby and
is mandatory. Because propane is Hazardous noise. normal sources of supply.
heavier than air, install propane gas Can cause hearing loss.
detectors low in a room. Inspect the
detectors per the manufacturer’s Never operate the generator set Grounding electrical equipment.
instructions. without a muffler or with a faulty Hazardous voltage will cause severe
exhaust system. injury or death. Electrocution is
Natural Gas—Adequate ventilation is possible whenever electricity is
mandatory. Because natural gas rises, present. Ensure you comply with all
Engine noise. Hazardous noise can
install natural gas detectors high in a applicable codes and standards.
cause hearing loss. Generator sets
room. Inspect the detectors per the Electrically ground the generator set,
not equipped with sound enclosures
manufacturer’s instructions. transfer switch, and related equipment
can produce noise levels greater than
Fuel tanks. Explosive fuel vapors 105 dBA. Prolonged exposure to noise and electrical circuits. Turn off the main
can cause severe injury or death. levels greater than 85 dBA can cause circuit breakers of all power sources
Gasoline and other volatile fuels stored permanent hearing loss. Wear hearing before servicing the equipment. Never
in day tanks or subbase fuel tanks can protection when near an operating contact electrical leads or appliances
cause an explosion. Store only diesel generator set. when standing in water or on wet
fuel in tanks. ground because these conditions
increase the risk of electrocution.

TP-6750 7/18d Safety Precautions and Instructions 9


High voltage test. Hazardous
voltage will cause severe injury or
Electrical backfeed to the utility.
Hazardous backfeed voltage can
Hot Parts
death. Follow the instructions of the cause severe injury or death. Install
test equipment manufacturer when a transfer switch in standby power WARNING
performing high-voltage tests on the installations to prevent the connection
rotor or stator. An improper test of standby and other sources of power.
procedure can damage equipment or Electrical backfeed into a utility
lead to generator set failure. electrical system can cause severe
injury or death to utility personnel
Installing the battery charger. working on power lines. Hot coolant and steam.
Hazardous voltage will cause severe Can cause severe injury or death.
injury or death. An ungrounded Testing live electrical circuits.
battery charger may cause electrical Hazardous voltage or current will Before removing the pressure cap,
shock. Connect the battery charger cause severe injury or death. Have stop the generator set and allow it to
enclosure to the ground of a permanent trained and qualified personnel take cool. Then loosen the pressure cap
wiring system. As an alternative, install diagnostic measurements of live to relieve pressure.
an equipment grounding conductor circuits. Use adequately rated test
with circuit conductors and connect it to equipment with electrically insulated
the equipment grounding terminal or probes and follow the instructions of the WARNING
the lead on the battery charger. Install test equipment manufacturer when
the battery charger as prescribed in the performing voltage tests. Observe the
equipment manual. Install the battery following precautions when performing
charger in compliance with local codes voltage tests: (1) Remove all jewelry.
and ordinances. (2) Stand on a dry, approved electrically
insulated mat. (3) Do not touch the Hot engine and exhaust system.
Connecting the battery and the enclosure or components inside the Can cause severe injury or death.
battery charger. Hazardous voltage enclosure. (4) Be prepared for the
will cause severe injury or death. system to operate automatically. Do not work on the generator set until
Reconnect the battery correctly, (600 volts and under) it cools.
positive to positive and negative to
negative, to avoid electrical shock and Servicing the alternator. Hot parts
damage to the battery charger and can cause severe injury or death.
battery(ies). Have a qualified Servicing the generator set when it
is operating. Exposed moving parts Avoid touching the alternator field or
electrician install the battery(ies). exciter armature. When shorted, the
will cause severe injury or death.
Short circuits. Hazardous Keep hands, feet, hair, clothing, and alternator field and exciter armature
voltage/current will cause severe test leads away from the belts and become hot enough to cause severe
injury or death. Short circuits can pulleys when the generator set is burns.
cause bodily injury and/or equipment running. Replace guards, screens, and Servicing the exhaust system. Hot
damage. Do not contact electrical covers before operating the generator parts can cause severe injury or
connections with tools or jewelry while set. death. Do not touch hot engine parts.
making adjustments or repairs. The engine and exhaust system
Remove all jewelry before servicing the components become extremely hot
equipment. Heavy Equipment during operation.
Engine block heater. Hazardous
voltage will cause severe injury or WARNING
death. The engine block heater can
cause electrical shock. Remove the
engine block heater plug from the
electrical outlet before working on the
block heater electrical connections.
Handling the capacitor. Hazardous
voltage can cause severe injury or Unbalanced weight.
death. Electrical shock results from Improper lifting can cause severe
touching the charged capacitor injury or death and equipment
terminals. Discharge the capacitor by damage.
shorting the terminals together. Do not use lifting eyes.
(Capacitor-excited models only) Lift the generator set using lifting bars
inserted through the lifting holes on
the skid.

10 Safety Precautions and Instructions TP-6750 7/18d


Notice
NOTICE
This generator set has been
rewired from its nameplate voltage
to

246242

NOTICE
Voltage reconnection. Affix a notice
to the generator set after reconnecting
the set to a voltage different from the
voltage on the nameplate. Order
voltage reconnection decal 246242
from an authorized service
distributor/dealer.

NOTICE
Canadian installations only. For
standby service connect the output of
the generator set to a suitably rated
transfer switch in accordance with
Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.

TP-6750 7/18d Safety Precautions and Instructions 11


Notes

12 Safety Precautions and Instructions TP-6750 7/18d


Introduction

This manual provides operation instructions for 20 kW Abbreviations


and larger generator sets equipped with the following
controller: This publication makes use of numerous abbreviations.
Typically, the word(s) are spelled out along with the
D Decision-Makerr 6000, Firmware (Code) Version abbreviation in parentheses when shown for the first
1.00 or higher time in a section. Appendix A, Abbreviations, also
includes many abbreviation definitions.
Version 1.00 refers to the controller application
firmware. To determine the generator set controller
firmware version, go to Menu 20—Factory Setup and List of Related Materials
scroll down to Code Version. The code version is the
controller firmware version. Separate literature contains communication and
firmware information not provided in this manual.
Wiring diagram manuals are available separately. Refer Figure 1 lists the available literature part numbers.
to the engine operation manual for generator set engine
scheduled maintenance information. Communication and Software
Manual Description Literature Part No.
Information in this publication represents data available Controller Spec Sheet G6-107
at the time of print. Kohler Co. reserves the right to Multiple Part Numbers
Generator Set/Controller
change this publication and the products represented Wiring Diagram Manual Contact your
Distributor/Dealer
without notice and without any obligation or liability
whatsoever. Monitor III Converters, Connections,
and Controller Setup TT-1405

Monitor III Software Spec Sheet G6-76


Read this manual and carefully follow all procedures
and safety precautions to ensure proper equipment Monitor III Converter,
Modbusr/Ethernet Spec Sheet G6-79
operation and to avoid bodily injury. Read and follow the
Monitor III Software Operation Manual TP-6347
Safety Precautions and Instructions section at the
Modbusr Communications Protocol
beginning of this manual. Keep this manual with the Operation Manual TP-6113
equipment for future reference. Program Loader Software Installation TT-1285
SiteTecht Software Operation Manual TP-6701
The equipment service requirements are very important
Remote Serial Annunciator (RSA) TT-1485
to safe and efficient operation. Inspect the parts often
and perform required service at the prescribed intervals. Decision-Makerr Paralleling System G6-110
(DPS) Spec Sheet
Maintenance work must be performed by appropriately
skilled and suitably trained maintenance personnel Decision-Makerr Paralleling System TP-6747
(DPS) Operation Manual
familiar with generator set operation and service.
Figure 1 Related Literature
The disk supplied with this generator set is a backup
copy of the generator set personality program
containing data specific to the engine and alternator.
The engine and alternator data was preprogrammed in
the controller at the factory and no further use of the disk
should be necessary. Typically, your authorized
distributor stores this disk for possible future use such as
controller replacement or other circumstances requiring
a backup.

Modbusr is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

TP-6750 7/18d Introduction 13


Service Assistance

For professional advice on generator set power China


requirements and conscientious service, please contact North China Regional Office, Beijing
your nearest Kohler distributor or dealer. Phone: (86) 10 6518 7950
(86) 10 6518 7951
D Visit the Kohler Co. website at KOHLERPower.com. (86) 10 6518 7952
Fax: (86) 10 6518 7955
D Look at the labels and decals on your Kohler product
or review the appropriate literature or documents East China Regional Office, Shanghai
included with the product. Phone: (86) 21 6288 0500
Fax: (86) 21 6288 0550
D Call toll free in the US and Canada 1-800-544-2444. India, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka
India Regional Office
D Outside the US and Canada, call the nearest regional
Bangalore, India
office.
Phone: (91) 80 3366208
Headquarters Europe, Middle East, Africa (91) 80 3366231
(EMEA) Fax: (91) 80 3315972
Kohler.EMEA.Headquarters Japan, Korea
Netherlands B.V. North Asia Regional Office
Kristallaan 1 Tokyo, Japan
4761 ZC Zevenbergen Phone: (813) 3440-4515
The Netherlands Fax: (813) 3440-2727
Phone: (31) 168 331630
Fax: (31) 168 331631
Asia Pacific
Power Systems Asia Pacific Regional Office
Singapore, Republic of Singapore
Phone: (65) 6264-6422
Fax: (65) 6264-6455

14 Service Assistance TP-6750 7/18d


Section 1 Specifications and Features

1.1 Introduction The controller features, accessories, and menu displays


depend upon the engine electronic control module
The spec sheets for each generator set provide model- (ECM) setup and features. Controller features apply to
specific generator and engine information. The generator set models with ECM and non-ECM engines
controller spec sheet provides specifications for this unless otherwise noted.
controller. Refer to the respective spec sheet for data
not supplied in this manual. Consult the generator set Note: Press any key on the keypad to turn on the
service manual, installation manual, engine operation controller lamps and display. The lamps and
manual, and engine service manual for additional display turn off 5 minutes after the last keypad
specifications. entry.

Note: Measurements display in metric or English. Use


1.2 Controller Features Menu 7—Generator System to change the
measurement display.
The controller features include the annunciator lamps,
digital display and keypad, switches and controls, and See Figure 1-1 for an illustration of the controller front
fuses and terminal strip. The following paragraphs panel.
detail the features by general topics. In addition, the
controller has the ability to parallel up to seven
generator sets with the local utility.

1 2 3 4 5 6

G6-107

11 10 9 8 7
1. Emergency stop switch 7. Menu keypad
2. Alarm horn (see keypad for alarm silence) 8. Operating guide
3. Status lamps 9. Generator set master switch buttons, off/auto/run with lamps
4. Controller illumination lamps 10. Controller terminal strips (on circuit board)
5. Paralleling circuit breaker control buttons 11. Lockout key switch
6. Digital display

Figure 1-1 Decision-Makerr 6000 Paralleling Controller

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 15


1.2.1 Annunciator Lamps See Section 2.3.5, System Warning Lamp, for
definitions of the items listed.
Twelve annunciator lamps provide several visual status
indicators. See Figure 1-2. The following conditions cause a system warning:
D Engine functions:
D Five annunciator lamps provide visual generator
d ECM yellow alarm
set status.
(DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC)
D Two lamps are used for paralleling applications. d High battery voltage
d High coolant temperature
D Five lamps are used in conjunction with the master
d Low battery voltage
control buttons and paralleling breaker buttons.
The functions are explained in 1.2.3, Switches, d Low coolant temperature
Alarm Horn, and Controls. d Low fuel (level or pressure)*
d Low oil pressure
d Speed sensor fault
1
d Starting aid (system status)
d Weak battery
D General functions:
d Auxiliary—Analog up to 7 user-selectable inputs
each with a high and low programmable warning
level
d Auxiliary—Digital up to 21 user-selectable
warnings
d Battery charger communication error
TP-6750-1
d Battery charger fault*
1. Annunciator lamps
Note: Optional input sensors not required with
Figure 1-2 Annunciator Lamps charger GM87448.

System Ready. Green lamp illuminates when the d Battery charger value mismatch error
generator set master switch AUTO (automatic start) d Emergency power system (EPS) supplying load
button is pressed and the system senses no fault d Engine cooldown delay
conditions. The unit is ready to start. d Engine start delay
d Load shed kW overload
Not in Auto (NIA). Yellow lamp illuminates when the d Load shed underfrequency
generator set master switch button is not in the AUTO d Master switch not in AUTO (automatic start)
(automatic start) mode. position
d NFPA 110 fault (National Fire Protection
Programming Mode. Yellow programming lamp Association)
indicates the user selected programming mode. See
Figure 1-3. D Alternator functions:
d AC sensing loss
Programming Light Programming Mode Selection d Ground fault*
Lamp Flashing Local Programming d Overcurrent
Lamp Steady On Remote Programming * Requires optional input sensors
Lamp Off Programming Disabled
Note: See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for factory-
Figure 1-3 Programming Lamp Mode reserved analog and digital inputs that are not
user-selectable.
Note: Find additional information for the programming
mode lamp function and access to the local or Shutdown Active. Red lamp indicates that the
remote programming modes in Section 2.8.14, generator set has shut down because of a fault
Menu 14—Programming Mode. condition. The unit will not start without resetting the
controller, see Section 2.3.7, Controller Reset
Warning Active. Yellow lamp identifies an existing fault
Procedure.
condition that does not shut down the generator set. A
continuing system warning fault condition may cause a See Section 2.3.6, System Shutdown Lamp, for
system shutdown. Correct all system warnings as soon definitions of the items listed.
as practical.

16 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


The following conditions cause a system shutdown: 1.2.2 Digital Display and Keypad
D Engine functions: Figure 1-4 illustrates the digital display and keypad.
d Coolant temperature signal loss
d ECM red alarm Note: Press any key on the keypad to turn on the
(DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC) controller lamps and display. The lamps and
d High coolant temperature display turn off 5 minutes after the last keypad
d High oil temperature entry.
d Low coolant level
The 2-line vacuum fluorescent display provides
d Low oil pressure
generator set and engine condition information.
d Oil pressure signal loss
d Overcrank The 16-button keypad gives the user information access
d Overspeed and local programming capability.
D General functions:
d Auxiliary—Analog up to 7 user-selectable inputs
each with a high and low programmable
shutdown level
d Auxiliary—Digital up to 21 user-selectable
shutdowns
d ECM communications loss (ECM models only)
d Emergency stop
d Internal fault
d Master switch error
d Master switch open
-- +
d NFPA 110 fault
D Alternator functions:
d AC output overvoltage
d AC output undervoltage
d Alternator protection against overload and short
circuits
d Field overvoltage (M4, M5, M7, or M10 alternator TP-6750-1
only)
Figure 1-4 Digital Display and Keypad
d Locked rotor (failed to crank)
d Overfrequency Keypad Functions
d Underfrequency
Alarm (Horn) Off. The keypad switch silences the
Note: See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for factory-
alarm horn at the operator’s discretion. Press the
reserved analog and digital inputs which are
master switch AUTO button before pressing the alarm
not user-selectable.
silence button. The alarm horn cannot be silenced
unless the master switch AUTO button is pressed.
Paralleling Applications Restore alarm horn switches at all locations including
those on remote annunciator and audiovisual alarm kits
Sync. Green lamp indicates that the generator set and
to the normal position after correcting the fault shutdown
bus voltage are synchronized (voltage, frequency,
to avoid reactivating the alarm horn. See Section 2.3.7,
phase rotation, and phase angle match). Fast flashing
Controller Reset Procedure.
indicates actively synchronizing.
AM/PM key provides time of day data entries when
(Lightning Bolt). Red lamp indicates that the
programming.
generator set is running and voltage is present at the
alternator output leads. Enter  key provides confirmation entry when selecting
menu or programming.

Lamp Test key tests the controller indicator lamps,


horn, and digital display. See Section 1.2.3, Switches
and Controls.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 17


Menu down  key provides navigation within menus controller display shows N/A (not available) for items
when necessary. that are unavailable. See the controller spec sheet for
applicable generator set models.
Menu right  key provides navigation within menus
when necessary. This key also provides the decimal Ambient Temperature displays the generator set area
point when making numeric entries. ambient temperature.

Numeric 0--9 keys provide numeric data entries when Charge Air Pressure displays the engine turbocharger
selecting menus or programming. The 4 (--) and 6 (+) boost air pressure.
keys also provide decrease/increase functions with their
respective menus. Charge Air Temperature displays the engine
turbocharger boost air temperature.
Reset Menu key exits a menu, clears incorrect entries,
and cancels the auto-scroll feature. Coolant Level displays the engine coolant level based
on the percentage of full.
Stop Prog (Program) Run key allows the user to stop
any previously programmed generator set run Coolant Pressure displays the engine coolant
sequence. See Section 1.2.3, Switches and Controls. pressure.

Yes/No (7 and 8) keys provide data answer entries Coolant Temperature displays the engine coolant
when programming. temperature.

+/-- (6 and 4) keys provide data entries when Crankcase Pressure displays the engine crankcase
programming and raise/lower functions for voltage and pressure.
speed when manually synchronizing.
DC Volts displays the voltage of starting battery(ies).

Generator Monitoring Displays (Menu 1) Fuel Pressure displays the fuel supply pressure.
AC Amps displays the alternator output current. The Fuel Rate displays the calculated fuel consumption rate
display shows each line of 3-phase models. based on fuel injector outputs.
AC Volts displays the alternator output voltages. The Fuel Temperature displays the fuel supply
display shows all line-to-neutral and line-to-line voltage temperature.
combinations.
Oil Level displays the engine oil level as a percent of full
Alternator Duty Level displays the actual load kW capacity.
divided by the nameplate kW rating as a percentage.
Oil Pressure displays the engine oil pressure.
Frequency displays the frequency (Hz) of alternator
output voltage. Oil Temperature displays the engine oil temperature.

Hourmeter displays the generator set operating hours RPM (Tachometer) displays the engine speed.
loaded and unloaded for reference in scheduling
maintenance. Used Last Run displays the accumulated amount of
fuel used since last reset.
KVA displays the total and individual L1, L2, and L3 kVA.

KVAR displays the total and individual L1, L2, and L3 Operational Record Displays (Menus 4 and 5)
kVAR. The operational record displays events since last reset.
See Section 2.8.4, Menu 4—Operational Records, for
Power Factor displays the kW/kVA and the individual
resetting procedure.
line power factor values.
Engine Start Countdown displays the time remaining
Watts displays the total and individual L1, L2, and L3
in the generator set start delay timer.
kilowatts.
Event History displays up to 100 stored system events
Engine Monitoring Displays (Menu 2) including status, warnings, and shutdowns.

Some engine displays are available with selected Last Start Date displays the date when the generator
generator set engines using engine ECMs only. The set last operated.

18 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


Number of Starts displays the total number of 1.2.3 Switches, Alarm Horn, and
generator set startup events. Controls
Number of Starts (Since) Last Maintenance displays See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6 for switches, alarm horn,
the total number of generator set startup events since and controls. Some switch functions are part of the
the last maintenance date. keypad, refer to 1.2.2, Digital Display and Keypad.
Operating Days (Since) Last Maintenance displays Note: Find additional switches and controls in
the total number of days of operation since the last Section 2.5.1, Keypad Operation.
maintenance date. A counted day of operation can be
1--24 hours.

Run Time displays the total loaded hours, total


unloaded hours, and total kW hours.

Run Time Since Maintenance displays the total loaded


hours, total unloaded hours, and total kW hours.

Time and Date (Menu 6)


Day of the week, day/month/year, and time with am/pm
1 2 3
are displayed in this menu.
1. Alarm horn TP-6750-1
2. Generator set master switch buttons,
Time Delay Displays (Menu 8) off/auto/run with lamps
3. Paralleling breaker buttons (open/close) and status lamps
The time delays are user adjustable. See Section 2.8.8,
Menu 8—TIme Delays, for time delay adjustments. See Figure 1-5 Switches and Alarm Horn
Section 1.3.1, Status Event and Fault Specifications, for
range and default settings.

Crank On/Crank Pause displays the time allocated for


generator set crank on and crank pause in
minutes:seconds.

Engine Cooldown displays the time delay for engine


cooldown while the master switch is in the AUTO or RUN
positions and not in the idle mode.

Engine Start displays the time delay before the


generator set starts while the master switch is in AUTO -- +
or RUN positions.

Overcrank Shutdown (Number of) Crank Cycles


displays the number of unsuccessful crank cycles 1
(crank on/crank pause) before the generator set shuts
down on an overcrank fault. 2
3 TP-6750-1
Overvoltage displays the time delay before the
generator set shuts down because of an overvoltage 1. Lamp test
2. Alarm horn silence
condition. 3. Stop program run

Starting Aid displays the engine starting aid activation Figure 1-6 Keypad Switches
time.
Alarm Horn. The alarm horn alerts the operator or other
Undervoltage displays the time delay before the attendants that a shutdown or warning condition exists.
generator set shuts down because of an undervoltage See Section 1.3, Controller Logic Specifications, for
condition. conditions. Press the generator set master switch
AUTO button before silencing the alarm horn. The
alarm horn cannot be silenced unless the generator set
master switch is in the AUTO mode. See Section 2.3.7,
Controller Reset Procedure.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 19


Emergency Stop. The operator-activated pushbutton Paralleling Applications (see Figure 1-5)
immediately shuts down the generator set in emergency
situations. Reset the emergency stop switch after Close Paralleling Breaker Button. This button
shutdown by pulling the switch knob outward. Use the functions to close the circuit breaker during paralleling
emergency stop switch for emergency shutdowns only. operation. The close button provides local control and
Press the generator set master switch OFF button for functions only when in the RUN (not AUTO) mode.
normal shutdowns. See Figure 1-1. Paralleling operation is explained in the DPS literature.

Generator Set Master Switch Buttons Open Paralleling Breaker Button. This button
(Off/Auto/Run). These buttons provide operational functions to open the circuit breaker during paralleling
control (start/stop) of the generator set. The OFF button operation. The open button provides local control and
triggers a reset of the controller fault and lamps. Refer to functions in the RUN or AUTO modes. Paralleling
Section 2.3.2, Starting, Section 2.3.3, Stopping, and operation is explained in the DPS literature.
Section 2.3.4, Emergency Stop Switch Reset
Procedure. 1.2.4 Fuses

Master Switch Off--Auto--Run Buttons with AC Circuit Fuses (TB5). Fuses are located inside the
controller. See Figure 1-8.
Lamps
The (OFF/RESET--AUTO--RUN) master switch buttons D 1.5-Amp (V7) fuse protects GL1 sensing input to
indicate the status condition with an integrated lamp at main logic circuit board.
the button.
D 1.5-Amp (V8) fuse protects GL2 sensing input to
The green lamp illuminates on the master control AUTO main logic circuit board.
(automatic start) button indicating the system senses no
D 1.5-Amp (V9) fuse protects GL3 sensing input to
faults and the unit is ready to start by remote command.
main logic circuit board.
The red lamp illuminates on the master switch
AC Circuit Fuses (TB12). Fuses are located inside the
OFF/RESET button indicating the generator set is
controller. See Figure 1-8.
stopped. The OFF/RESET lamp will flash when a fault
occurs, indicating that this button should be pushed for D 1.5-Amp (F1) fuse protects LL0 (bus L0) sensing
RESET. input to main logic circuit board.
The yellow lamp illuminates on the master switch RUN D 1.5-Amp (F2) fuse protects LL1 (bus L1) sensing
button indicating the generator set is cranking or running input to main logic circuit board.
from a local command.
D 1.5-Amp (F3) fuse protects LL3 (bus L3) sensing
Only one of the three master switch button lamps will input to main logic circuit board.
illuminate at any given time.
DC Circuit Fuses fuses are located on the controller
Lockout Key Switch. The lockout key switch interconnection circuit board.
(Figure 1-7) is available to meet appropriate local code
requirements. When locked, the master switch buttons D 5-Amp Remote Annunciator (F1) fuse protects the
and breaker control buttons are disabled. dry contact kit if equipped and the controller panel
lamps.

D 5-Amp Controller (F2) fuse protects the controller


circuitry.

D 15-Amp Engine and Accessories (F3) fuse


protects the engine/starting circuitry and
accessories.

TP-6750-1

Figure 1-7 Lockout Key Switch

20 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


1.2.5 Controller Circuit Boards Digital Display Circuit Board provides the vacuum
fluorescent display (VFD) for monitoring the generator
The controller has five circuit boards—indicator, set functions and output values, drives the front panel
interconnection, keypad, digital display, and main logic/ LEDs, and transfers button push information to the main
communication. See Figure 1-8 for circuit board logic circuit board.
locations.
Main Logic (Microprocessor)/Communication
1 2
Circuit Board provides the controller operation logic
3 4
and provides PC communication locally (direct) or
remotely (via modem) using RS-232 or RS-485
connectors.

1.2.6 Terminal Strips and Connectors


Customer Connection Terminal Strip provides easy
connection of controller accessories. The supplied
wiring harness connects P23 and terminal strips TB1-3
and TB1-4 to the controller connector P25 and terminal
strips TB6, TB7, TB8, and TB9. Connect all accessories
(except the emergency stop kit) to the customer
connection terminal strips. See Figure 1-8 and
8 7 6 5 Figure 1-9.
GM65729-A

1. AC fuse block (TB5) TB1 Input Connection Terminal Strip provides input
2. AC fuse block (TB12) connections for remote start and emergency stop
3. Interconnection circuit board
4. Interface circuit board
(E-Stop).
5. Main logic (microprocessor)/communication circuit board
6. Keypad and digital display circuit boards TB2 Analog Input Connection Terminal Strip
7. Customer connection terminal strip provides analog input connections, including non-ECM
8. Indicator circuit board (lamps and alarm horn) sensor connections.
Figure 1-8 Controller Circuit Boards and Fuses
TB3 Accessory Power Output Connection Terminal
(Controller Top View)
Strips provides a generator set power supply for factory
Indicator (Status) Circuit Board includes the status use.
lamps, alarm horn, and generator set master switch.
TB4 Digital Input Connection Terminal Strips
Interconnection Circuit Board provides the terminal connect external devices (engine ECM and user
strips TB1, TB2, TB3, and TB4) to connect the customer supplied) to the generator set digital inputs.
connection board and/or dry contact kits and three DC
P23 Connector connects the interconnection circuit
fuses (F1, F2, and F3).
board to the customer connection terminal strip
Interface (Pulse Converter) Circuit Board converts (connector P25) inside the controller.
the engine speed sender signal to a 2-pulse output per
Interconnection Circuit Board Terminal Strips.
engine revolution using an 8-position DIP switch. This
Terminal strips and connectors for inputs and outputs
circuit board is required on selected models.
are located on the interconnection circuit board. See
Keypad (Switch Membrane) Circuit Board provides Section 6, Accessories.
the keypad to navigate the generator set displays and
enter data.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 21


GM16088A-A

Figure 1-9 Customer Connection Terminal Strip

Figure 1-10 shows locations of the terminal strips on the


controller interconnection circuit board. See Section 6.2, 1 2 3 4 5 6
Accessory and Connections, for specific terminal
identification information. Refer to the wiring diagrams
for additional information on connecting accessories to
the terminal strips.

ADV-6533-A

1. TB1 terminal strip 4. P23 Connector


2. TB2 terminal strip 5. TB3 terminal strip
3. P1 Connector 6. TB4 terminal strip

Figure 1-10 Interconnection Circuit Board Terminal


Strips and Connectors

22 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


1.2.7 Circuit Board Interconnections for 1.2.8 Communication Ports
Calibration Procedure
The main logic circuit board contains several
The interconnection circuit board shown in Figure 1-11 communication ports for Modbusr and paralleling
contains a ribbon connector that requires disconnection connections. See Figure 1-12. Refer to the List of
during the calibration procedure in Menu 12— Related Materials in the Introduction for corresponding
Calibration. Disconnect ribbon connector P2 prior to communication installation information.
zeroing out (resetting) the auxiliary analog inputs.

1 2 3 4 5

ADV-6533-A 6

1. Interconnection circuit board ADV-6533-A


2. P2 ribbon connector
3. P12 ribbon connector 1. P19—RS-485 port (Modbusr to Master Control Panel of
4. Main logic circuit board DPS, SiteTecht software, Ethernet converter)
2. P21—PGEN paralleling connection, RS-485 port
Figure 1-11 Interconnection Circuit Board Ribbon 3. P18—Modbusr, RS-232 port (Monitor III connection)
Connector P2 (Top View of Circuit Board) 4. P20—Modbus, RS-485 port (Modbusr to remote serial
annunciator [RSA] or Ethernet converter)
5. P22—ECM (CAN) connector
6. Main logic circuit board

Figure 1-12 Main Logic Circuit Board Communication


Ports (Top View of Circuit Board)

Modbusr is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 23


1.3 Controller Logic Specifications TIme Delay (Shutdown or Warning). The time delay
follows the inhibit time delay. The time delay is the time
The controller logic specifications section is an overview period between when the controller first detects a fault or
of the various features and functions of the controller. status event and the controller warning or shutdown
Certain features function only when optional lamp illuminates. The delay prevents any nuisance
accessories are connected. See Section 2, Operation, alarms. Select the desired time delay from 0 to
for details. 60 seconds.

The default selection time delays and relay driver


outputs (RDOs) are factory set and adjustable with the 1.3.1 Status Event and Fault
programming mode on (Menu 14). Some data entries Specifications
require using a PC in the Remote Programming mode.
See the monitor software operation manual for details. The following contains all status events and faults with
ranges and time delays including items that do not have
Inhibit Time Delay. The inhibit time delay is the time adjustments.
period following crank disconnect during which the
generator set stabilizes and the controller does not Note: The engine ECM may limit the crank cycle even if
detect a fault or status event. Select the desired inhibit the controller is set to a longer time period.
time delay from 0 to 60 seconds.

Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
Access Code 14 User-Selectable 0 (zero)
(password)
AC Sensing Loss 10 AC SENSING On Warning
LOSS
Alternator Protection 10 ALTRNTR RDO-19 On Shutdown
PROTECT
SDWN
Alternator Protection 10 ALTRNTR On Shutdown Fixed 102% Std. 60
kW Overload PROTECT 112% Prime
SDWN KW
Analog Aux. Input 0 9 LOCAL BATT Fixed
VDC
Analog Aux. Inputs 9 USER-DEFINED On Shutdown Default Values with 30 sec. 0--60 0--60
A01--A07 A01--A07 or Warning Enabled: inhibit,
Warning HI warning 90% 5 sec. delay
LO warning 10%
HI shutdown 100%
LO shutdown 1%
Battery Charger CHRG COMM On Warning
Communication Error ERROR
Battery Charger Fault 9, 10 BATTERY RDO-12 On Warning Fixed 0 sec.
D01 [ CHARGER (lead 61) inhibit,
Note: On charger FAULT D01 0 sec. delay
GM87448, Battery
Charger Fault is
communicated
through CAN
communication and
D01 is not used.
Battery Charger CHGR VAL On Warning
Value Error ERROR
Battle Switch 9 BATTLE Off Warning Fixed 0 0
(Fault Shutdown SWITCH
Override Switch)
Breaker Close 10 CLOSE RDO-30
Control BREAKER
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

24 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
Breaker Closed D05 9, 10, Fixed 0 sec.
17 inhibit,
0 sec. delay
Breaker Trip Control 10 BREAKER RDO-31 On Warning
TRIP
Charger Absorption
ABSORPTION
Current Termination 18 1–5 2
TERMINATION
Target (A)
Charger Automatic
Equalize Enable
AUTOMATIC
Note: Equalize is Active
18 EQUALIZE Inactive
only available with Inactive
ENABLED
FLA/VRLA topology
selected.
Charger Charge
Cycles Between Auto
Equalize Cycles
Note: Equalize is 18 0 – 99
only available with
FLA/VRLA topology
selected.
Charger Custom CUSTOM
Profile Enable CHARGING Active
18 Inactive
PROFILE Inactive
ENABLE
Charger Depleted
18 1–5 2
Battery Current Limit
Charger Depleted 4 – 12 10
Battery Voltage (12 V) (12 V)
Target 18
18 – 24 20
(24 V) (24 V)
Charger Equalize
Stage Duration (Min)
Note: Equalize is 18 60 – 480
only available with
FLA/VRLA topology
selected.
Charger Manual
Equalize Cycle
Activation MANUAL
Active
Note: Equalize is 18 EQUALIZE Inactive
Inactive
only available with ACTIVE
FLA/VRLA topology
selected.
Charger Maximum MAX 60 – 360
Absorption Time 18 ABSORPTION 240
Threshold (Min.) TIME 60 – 600 (NiCad only)
Charger Maximum
MAX BULK
Bulk Time Threshold 18 60 – 600 480
TIME
(Min)
Charger Refresh
0,
Charge Cycle Time 18 335
23 – 672
(Hr)
Charger Return To 10 – 13 12.8
Bulk State Voltage BULK STATE (12 V)** (12 V)
Threshold (V) 18 RETURN
VOLTAGE 20 – 26 25.6
(24 V)** (24 V)
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 25


Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
Charger Starter
Battery Topology
Note: Verify that the
battery topology is
set correctly for the Default
battery type that is FLA/VRLA
BATTERY
used. Incorrect 18 AGM Default
TOPOLOGY
charger output Gel
system voltage may NiCad
cause irreversible
damage to the
battery and abnormal
out gassing.
Charger System
Battery Voltage
Note: Verify that the
system voltage is set
correctly for the
battery type that is CHARGER System 12 VDC
used. Incorrect 18 SYSTEM 12 VDC
VOLTAGE System 24 VDC
charger output
system voltage may
cause irreversible
damage to the
battery and abnormal
out gassing.
Charger Temperature TEMP
Compensation COMPENSA-- Active
18 Inactive
Enable TION Inactive
ENABLED
Charger Temperature --40 – 0 -30
Compensation Slope TEMPERA-- (12 V) (12 V)
(mV/_C) 18 TURE COMP
SLOPE -80 – 0 --60
(24 V) (24 V)
Charger Voltage 13 – 15 14.25
Absorption (V) ABSORPTION (12 V)** (12 V)
18
VOLTAGE 26 – 30 28.5
(24 V)** (24 V)
Charger Voltage Bulk 13 – 15 14.25
(V) BULK (12 V)** (12 V)
18
VOLTAGE 26 – 30 28.5
(24 V)** (24 V)
Charger Voltage
Equalize (V) 14 – 16
Note: Equalize is EQUALIZE (12 V)
18
only available with VOLTAGE 28 – 32
FLA/VRLA topology (24 V)
selected.
Charger Voltage 13 – 14 13.25
Float (V) FLOAT (12 V)** (12 V)
18
VOLTAGE 26 – 28 26.5
(24 V)** (24 V)
Circuit Breaker Close 10, 17 CB CLOSE On Warning 1--100 Attempts
Attempts Fault ATTS FAULT
Circuit Breaker 10 CB COMMON RDO-28 On Shutdown Fixed 0 0
Common Fault FAULT
Circuit Breaker 10, 17 CB CURRENT On Warning 1%--50% of 0--60
Current Fault FAULT rated current
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

26 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
Circuit Breaker Open 10, 17 CB OPEN On Warning 0.3--
Fault FAULT 30 ]
Circuit Breaker Trip 10, 15 CB TRIP TO On Warning See Menu 15, Time 0 sec. 0 0--60
to Shutdown Time SD TD then delay circuit breaker inhibit, min.
Delay Shutdown trip to shutdown 5 min. delay or
infinite
Common Protective 10 COMMON PR RDO-29 On Warning
Relay Warning OUTPUT
Critical Overvoltage 10 CRITICAL On Shutdown Fixed 275 volts 0 0
Shutdown OVERVOLTAGE (L1--L2)
Cyclic Cranking 8 Off 1--6 crank cycles 3
10--30 sec. crank on 15 sec.
1--60 sec. pause 15 sec.
Dead Bus Sensing 10, 16 DEAD BUS On Warning
Fault SENSE FAULT
Defined Common 10 DEFINED RDO-3 On Shutdown Default shutdowns 30 sec. 0--60 0--60
Fault COMMON (lead 32A) include: inhibit,
(each input value is FAULT Emergency stop 5 sec. delay
set separately) High coolant temp
Low oil pressure
Overcrank
Overspeed
Defined Common 10 DEFINED RDO-24 On Warning 30 sec. 0--60 0--60
Warning COMMON inhibit,
(each input value is WARN 5 sec. delay
set separately)
Derate Active 10 ENGINE RDO-20
DERATE
ACTIVE
Digital Aux. Input 9, 10 USER-DEFINED On Shutdown 30 sec. 0--60 0--60
D01--D21 D01--D21 or inhibit,
Warning 5 sec. delay
Digital Aux. Input 01
(see Battery Charger
Fault) [
Digital Aux. Input
D02 (see Low Fuel
Warning) [
Digital Aux. Input
D03 (see Low
Coolant
Temperature) [
Digital Aux. Input
D04 (see Field
Overvoltage)
Digital Aux. Input
D05 (see Breaker
Closed)
Digital Aux. Input
D06 (see Enable
Synch)
Digital Aux. Input
D09 (see Low Fuel
Shutdown)
Digital Aux. Input D14
(see Low Coolant
Level [
Digital Aux. Input
D15 (see Remote
Shutdown)
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 27


Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
Digital Aux. Input
D21 (see Idle [speed]
Mode Function)
Duplicate PGEN ID 10, 16 DUPLICATE On Warning
PGEN
WARNING
ECM Yellow Alarm * 10 ECM YELLOW On Warning
ALARM
ECM Red Alarm * 10 ECM RED On Shutdown
ALARM
EEPROM Write 10 EEPROM WRITE On Shutdown
Failure FAILURE
Emergency Stop 10 EMERGENCY RDO-2 On Shutdown Fixed 0 0
Shutdown STOP (lead 48)
Enable Synch D06 9, 10, Fixed 0 sec.
16 inhibit,
0 sec. delay
Engine Cooldown
(see Time Delay--)
Engine Stalled 10 ENGINE On Shutdown
STALLED
Engine Start
(see Time Delay--)
EPS (Emergency 10 EPS RDO-18 Off Warning Fixed 1% of rated
Power System) SUPPLYING line current
Supplying Load LOAD
Equalize Current
Limit (A)
Note: Equalize is 18 1–5
only available with
FLA/VRLA topology
selected.
External Breaker Trip 10 EXTRNL RDO-31 On Warning
BREAKER
TRIP
Extra PGEN Node 10, 16 EXTRA PGEN On Warning Fixed 5
NODE
Field Overvoltage 9, 10 FIELD On Shutdown Fixed 1 sec.
D04 (M4, M5, M7, or OVERVOLTAGE inhibit,
M10 alternator only) D04 15 sec.
delay
First On Fault 9, 16 FIRST ON On Warning 0.5 sec. 0.5--
FAULT delay 10
Forced Charge Cycle Active
18 Inactive
Reset Inactive
Generator Set 7 GENSET On Warning
Parameter Warning PARAM
WARNING
Generator Set 10 RDO-22 Off
Running (lead 70R)
Generator Set Serial 20 GENSET S/N On Warning
Number Warning WARNING
Ground Fault 9, 10 GROUND RDO-17 On Warning
Detected (Digital FAULT
Input)
High Battery Voltage 10 HIGH Off Warning 14.5--16.5 V (12 V) 16 V (12 V) 10
BATTERY 29--33 V (24 V) 32 V (24 V)
VOLTAGE
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

28 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
High Coolant 10 HI COOL TEMP (lead 36) On Shutdown Fixed 30 5
Temperature SHUTDOWN
Shutdown
High Coolant 10 HI COOL TEMP RDO-6 On Warning Fixed 30 0
Temperature Warning WARNING (lead 40)
High Oil Temperature 9, 10 HI OIL TEMP On Shutdown Fixed 30 5
Shutdown SHUTDOWN
High Oil Temperature 9, 10 HI OIL TEMP On Warning Fixed 30 0
Warning * WARNING
Idle (speed) Mode 9, 10 Off Warning Fixed inhibit time 0 sec. 0 0--600
Function D21 0--600 sec. delay or inhibit, or
9.99 (infinite) 60 sec. infinite
delay
In Synch (Dwell 10 IN SYNCH RDO-27 0.3 sec. 0.1--
Time) 30
Intake Air 10 INTAKE AIR On Shutdown Fixed 30 0
Temperature TEMP SDWN
Shutdown *
Intake Air 10 INTAKE AIR On Warning Fixed 30 5
Temperature TEMP WARN
Warning *
Internal Fault 10 INTERNAL On Shutdown
Shutdown FAULT
J1939 CAN 10 J1939 CAN On Shutdown
Shutdown SHUTDOWN
Key Switch Locked 10 KEY SWITCH
LOCKED
kW Overload
(see Load Shed)
Load Shed Common 10 COMMON RDO-25
LOAD SHED
Load Shed 8, 10 LOAD SHED Off Warning 80%--120% 100% of kW 0.3 2--10
kW Overload KW OVER rating with
5 sec. delay
Load Shed 10 LOAD SHED On Warning Fixed 59 Hz 0.3 5
Underfrequency UNDER (60 Hz)
FREQUENCY 49 Hz
(50 Hz)
Locked Rotor 10 LOCKED On Shutdown Fixed 5
Shutdown ROTOR
Loss of ECM 10 LOSS OF ECM On Shutdown Fixed 0 4
Communication COMM
(ECM only)
Loss of Field (see SD
Loss of Field)
Low Battery Voltage 10 LOW BATTERY RDO-11 Off Warning 10--12.5 V (12 V) 12 V (12 V) 0 10
VOLTAGE (lead 62) 20--25 V (24 V) 24 V (24 V)
Low Coolant Level 9, 10 LOW RDO-8 On Shutdown Fixed 30 sec.
D14 COOLANT LVL inhibit,
(with LCL switch) [ D14 5 sec. delay
Low Coolant 10 LOW RDO-7 On Warning Fixed 0 sec.
Temperature (Analog COOLANT (lead 35) inhibit,
Input or ECM) TEMP 0 sec. delay
Low Coolant 9, 10 LOW On Warning Fixed 0 sec.
Temperature D03 [ COOLANT inhibit,
TEMP D03 0 sec. delay
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 29


Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
Low Coolant 10 LOW COOL On Shutdown
Temperature TEMP SDWN
Shutdown *
Low Fuel (Level or 9,10 LOW FUEL On Shutdown 0 sec. 0--60 0--60
Pressure) Shutdown SHUTDWN inhibit, 0
D09 D09 sec. delay
Low Fuel 9, 10 LOW FUEL RDO-5 On Warning Fixed 0 sec.
(Level or Pressure) WARNING inhibit,
Warning (Digital Input 0 sec. delay
D02 or ECM) [
(Low) Oil Pressure 10 OIL (lead 38) On Shutdown Fixed 30 5
Shutdown (Analog PRESSURE
Input or ECM) SHUTDOWN
(Low) Oil Pressure 10 OIL RDO-9 On Warning Fixed 30 0
Warning (Analog PRESSURE (lead 41)
Input or ECM) WARNING
Maintenance 10 MAINTENANCE RDO-13 On Warning 0--4095 Hours 0 = No
Reminder DUE Reminder
Master (Switch) Not 10 MASTER NOT RDO-23 On Not In
In Auto (Generator IN AUTO (lead 80) Auto and
Set Switch) Warning
Master Switch Error 10 MASTER On Shutdown
SWITCH
ERROR
Master Switch to Off 10 MASTER On Not in
SWITCH TO Auto and
OFF Shutdown
Master Switch Open 10 MASTER On Shutdown
SWITCH OPEN
Missing PGEN Node 10 MISSING RDO-26 On Warning Fixed 5
PGEN NODE
NFPA 110 Fault 10 NFPA 110 RDO-10 On Shutdown
FAULT (lead 32) or
Warning
No Coolant 10 NO COOL On Shutdown Fixed 30 4
Temperature Signal TEMP SIGNAL
No Oil Pressure 10 NO OIL On Shutdown Fixed 30 4
Signal PRESSURE
SIGNAL
Output Enable 18 Fixed Active
Overcrank Shutdown 8, 10 OVER CRANK (lead 12) On Shutdown 0--6 Cycles 3 Cycles
Over Current 10 OVER RDO-14 On Warning Fixed 110% 10
CURRENT
Over Current Voltage
Restraint Shutdown
(see SD Over
Current Voltage
Restraint)
Overfrequency 7, 10 OVER On Shutdown 100%--140% 140% Std. 10
Shutdown FREQUENCY 103% FAA
Overpower
(see PR Over Power
or SD Over Power)
Over Speed 7, 10 OVER SPEED (lead 39) On Shutdown 65--70 Hz (60 Hz) 70 (60 Hz) 0.25
Shutdown 55--70 Hz (50 Hz) 70 (50 Hz)
Overvoltage 7, 8, OVER (lead 26) On Shutdown 105%--135% 135% 2--10
Shutdown 10 VOLTAGE of nominal 10-sec time
delay *
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

30 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
Password
(see Access Code)
PGEN 10, 16 PGEN COMM On Warning
Communication Not NOT ONLINE
Online
PR Loss of Field 10, 15 PR LOSS OF On Warning 10%--100% 20% 0--120
(signal) FIELD 5 sec. delay
PR Over Current 10, 15 PR OVER On Warning 100%--200% 175% 0--120
Voltage Restraint CURRENT VR 5 sec. delay
PR Over Frequency 10, 15 PR OVER On Warning 100%--140% 102% 0--120
FREQUENCY 5 sec. delay
PR Over Power 10, 15 PR OVER On Warning 90%--150% 110% 0--120
POWER 5 sec. delay
PR Overvoltage 10, 15 PR OVER On Warning 100%--130% 110% 0--120
VOLTAGE 5 sec. delay
PR Reverse Power 10, 15 PR REVERSE On Warning 0%--50% 10% 0--120
POWER 5 sec. delay
PR Under Frequency 10, 15 PR UNDER On Warning 80%--100% 96% 0--120
FREQUENCY 5 sec. delay
PR Under Voltage 10, 15 PR UNDER On Warning 70%--100% 90% 0--120
VOLTAGE 5 sec. delay
Remote Shutdown 9, 10 REMOTE On Shutdown Fixed 0 sec.
D15 SHUTDWN inhibit,
0 sec. delay
Reverse Power
(see PR Reverse
Power or SD
Reverse Power)
SD Loss of Field 10, 15 SD LOSS OF On Shutdown 10%--100% 100% 120 0--120
(signal) FIELD sec. delay
SD Over Current 10, 15 SD OVER On Shutdown 100%--200% 200% 120 0--120
Voltage Restraint CURRENT VR sec. delay
SD Over Power 10, 15 SD OVER On Shutdown 90%--150% 150% 120 0--120
POWER sec. delay
SD Reverse Power 10, 15 SD REVERSE On Shutdown 0%--50% 50%, 120 0--120
POWER sec. delay
Speed Sensor Fault 10 SPEED On Warning
SENSOR
FAULT
Starter ’A’ 10 STARTER ’A’ On Warning
FAILURE
Starter ’B’ 10 STARTER ’B’ On Warning
FAILURE
Starting Aid
(see Time Delay
Starting Aid)
Sync TImeout 10, 16 SYNC On Warning 60 sec. 0--600
TIMEOUT delay
System Ready 10 RDO-1 Off System
(lead 60) Ready
Time Delay Engine 8, 10 DELAY ENG RDO-4 Off 00:00--10:00 5:00
Cooldown (TDEC) COOLDOWN (lead 70C) min:sec
Time Delay Engine 8, 10 DELAY ENG RDO-15 Off 00:00--5:00 00:00
Start (TDES) START min:sec
Time Delay Starting 8, 10 RDO-16 Off 0--10 sec. 0:00
Aid
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 31


Factory-Defined Settings
Relay Inhibit
Refer Driver Time Time
Status Event to Output Alarm Default Delay Delay
or Fault Menu Digital Display (RDO) Horn Light Range Setting Selection (sec.) (sec.)
Underfrequency 7, 10 UNDER On Shutdown 80%--100% 97% FAA 10
FREQUENCY 80%
Undervoltage 7, 8, UNDER On Shutdown 70%--100% 70% 5--30
Shutdown 10 VOLTAGE 30-sec time
delay
Weak Battery 10 WEAK Off Warning Fixed 60% of 2
BATTERY nominal
* DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC ] 3x (times) energize time shown in Menu 17
[ NFPA applications ** Denotes the default parameter range. Typically, ranges for the
NiCad battery topology are slightly wider. For more details, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.

Factory-Defined Settings
Refer
to
Calibration Menu Digital Display Range Setting Default Selection
Voltage Adjustment 11 VOLT ADJ 20% of system voltage System voltage
Underfrequency Unload 11 FREQUENCY SETPOINT 40 to 70 Hz 1 Hz below system freq. (ECM)
Frequency Setpoint 2 Hz below system freq. (non-ECM)
Underfrequency Unload Slope 11 SLOPE 0--10% of rated voltage 3.1% of system voltage
volts per cycle
Reactive Droop 11 VOLTAGE DROOP 0--10% of system voltage 4% of system voltage
Controller Gain 11 REGULATOR GAIN ADJ 1--10000 100
PGEN ID 16 GENERATOR ID 0--8 (0 by reset) 0
No. of PGEN nodes 16 NBR OF NODES ON BUS 0--8 (0 by reset) 0
Volts match window 16 VOLTS MATCH WINDOW +/-- 1--10% V +/-- 1.0% V
Volts match gain 16 VOLTS MATCH GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
Volts match reset 16 VOLTS MATCH RESET 0--50 1.0 sec.
Synch frequency window 16 SYNCH FREQ WINDOW +/-- 0.1--5 Hz +/-- 2.0 Hz
Frequency match gain 16 FREQ MATCH GAIN 0.01--99.99 1.00
Phase match window 16 PHASE MATCH WINDOW +/-- 1--20.0 degrees +/-- 5.0 degrees
Phase match gain 16 PHASE MATCH GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
Phase match reset 16 PHASE MATCH RESET 0--50 1.0 sec.
Dwell time 16 DWELL TIME 0.1--30 sec. 0.3 sec.
First on close time delay 16 FIRST ON CLOSE TD 0.5--10 sec. 0.5 sec.
Fail to sync time delay 16 FAIL TO SYNC TD 10--600 sec. 300 sec.
Volt/frequency ok timer 16 VOLT_FREQ OK TIMER 0--10 sec. 0.5 sec.
kW sharing gain 17 KW SHARING GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
kW sharing reset 17 KW SHARING RESET 0--50 50.0 sec.
kW sharing deadband 17 KW SHARING DB 0--10% 1.0%
Frequency trim gain 17 FREQ TRIM GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
Frequency trim deadband 17 FREQ TRIM DB 0--10% 0.1%
kW base load adjustment 17 KW BASELOAD ADJ 0--100% 50.0%
kW base load gain 17 KW BASELOAD GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
kW baseload reset 17 KW BASELOAD RESET 0--50 1.0 sec.
kW base load deadband 17 KW BASELOAD DB 0--10% 1.0%
% droop at rated kW 17 % DROOP AT RATED KW 0--10% 5.0%
% kW ramp rate 17 % KW RAMP RATE 0--25%/S 10.0%/S
% kW up/down rate 17 % KW UP/DOWN RATE 0--25%/s 1.0%/S
Disconnect 17 DISCONNECT 0--25% 5.0%
kVAR sharing gain 17 KVAR SHARING GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
kVAR sharing reset 17 KVAR SHARING RESET 0--50 1.0 sec.
kVAR share deadband 17 KVAR SHARE DEADBAND 0--10% 1.0%

32 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


Refer
to
Calibration Menu Digital Display Range Setting Default Selection
Voltage trim gain 17 VOLTAGE TRIM GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
Voltage trim deadband 17 VOLT TRIM DEADBAND 0--10% 1.0%
kVAR base load 17 KVAR BASELOAD 0--100% 50.0%
Generate kVAR? 17 GENERATE KVAR? Generate/absorb Generate
kVAR base load gain 17 KVAR BASELOAD GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
kVAR base load reset 17 KVAR BASELOAD RESET 0--50 1.0 sec.
kVAR base load deadband 17 KVAR BASE DEADBAND 0--10% 1.0%
kVAR up/down rate 17 KVAR UP/DOWN RATE 0--100% 1.0% /sec.
Power factor setting 17 PF SETTING 0.50--1.00 PF 0.80 PF
Lagging power factor? 17 LAGGING PF? Lagging/leading Lagging
Power factor control gain 17 PF CONTROL GAIN 0--99.99 1.00
Power factor control reset 17 PF CONTROL RESET 0--50 1.0 sec.
Power factor control deadband 17 PF CONTROL DEADBAND 0--0.1 PF 0.01 PF
Power factor up/down rate 17 PF UP/DOWN RATE 0--0.1 PF/S 0.001 PF/S
% voltage droop at rated load 17 % VOLTAGE DROOP AT 0--20% 4.0%
RATED LOAD
Breaker energize time delay 17 BREAKER ENERGIZE TD 0.1--10 sec. 0.5 sec.
Breaker reclose time delay 17 BREAKER RECLOSE TD 0.5--30 sec. 2.0 sec.
Breaker close attempts 17 BREAKER CLOSE 1--100 3
ATTEMPTS
Circuit breaker current fault limit 17 CB CRNT FAULT LIMIT 1--50% 5.0%
Circuit breaker current fault time 17 CB CRNT FAULT TD 0--60 sec. 5.0 sec.
delay
Transformer phase shift 17 XFMR PHASE SHIFT Fixed 0.00 deg.
NOTE: Entering 99.99, where applicable, designates infinite delay and no shutdown. This value effectively disables a fault shutdown.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 1 Specifications and Features 33


1.3.2 Voltage Regulator and Calibration Reactive Droop. Reactive droop compensation
Specifications provides reactive current flow adjustment in the
generator set during generator set-to-generator set
The controller has a voltage regulation function that is paralleling applications. Reactive droop reduces
internal to the processor. This means that no external excitation levels with increasing reactive current. A
voltage regulator is necessary. The voltage regulation reduced excitation level reduces generator set reactive
of the controller uses root mean square (rms) sensing current or generated VARs, improving reactive load
for fast response to changes in indicated and regulated sharing.
voltages resulting in excellent regulation accuracy.
Enter the gain setting as a percentage of system voltage
RMS voltage regulation is available for both paralleling when full-rated load with 0.8 power factor is applied.
and utility application to control changes in the reactive Any loads less than full load force the voltage to drop by
loads due to load changes, prime mover speed the ratio of reactive volt-amps (VARs) to rated VARs.
variation, thermal drift, and other variations. See the
Factory-Defined Settings on the previous pages for data Regulator Gain. Regulator gain refers to the gain of the
on the controller voltage regulation. Refer to control system. Generally, the higher the gain the faster
Appendix C to customize adjustments for specific the system responds to changes and the lower the gain,
applications. the more stable the system.

If the voltage is slow to recover when loads are applied


1.3.3 Voltage Regulator Adjustments or removed, increase the regulator gain. If the voltage is
unstable, decrease the regulator gain. Regulator gain is
The descriptions of the voltage regulator adjustments active only while not in the VAR/PF mode.
and features follow. See Appendix C, Voltage Regulator
Definitions and Adjustments, for additional information. Analog Voltage Adjust. Use Menu 11 to enable or
disable analog voltage adjust. Analog voltage adjust is
Voltage Adjustment. The voltage adjustment allows commonly used for active control of voltage by some
the user to enter the desired generator set output level. external equipment in certain applications, like
This regulated level setting is the average of the three synchronizing.
line-to-line voltages in three-phase configurations or
L1-to-L2 in single phase configurations. Enabling analog voltage adjust allows slight adjustment
to the operating voltage by use of auxiliary analog input
Submenus display the individual line-to-line voltages. #7. This input signal provides a bias to the voltage
These voltages are for reference only and are relevant adjust value. The range of input voltage is 0--5 VDC
in unbalanced load conditions. The voltage adjust nominal (0.1--4.9 actual). The corresponding range of
setpoint can be changed to accommodate an important bias is ±10% of nominal or system voltage. If the input
phase in an unbalanced system. voltage is at the midpoint (2.5 volts), the bias is zero and
the voltage adjust value or regulation value will be equal
Underfrequency Unload Frequency Setpoint. This
to the system voltage. Likewise, if the input voltage is
adjustment affects the voltage droop (volts per Hz) when
out of range (below 0.1 volt or above 4.9 volts), the bias
load is applied and underfrequency occurs. The
will be zero. For every 1 volt of input voltage, the
underfrequency unload setting defines the setpoint
operating voltage will vary 4%; this satisfies the nominal
where underfrequency starts. Any frequency below the
ratio of ±10% output voltage for 0--5 volts input.
setpoint causes the voltage to drop thus reducing the
load allowing the engine speed to recover according to When analog voltage adjust is enabled, the description
the underfrequency unload slope setting. shown for Auxiliary Analog Input 7 is Analog Volt Adjust.
Enable analog voltage adjust via MODBUS by setting
Engine speed recovery depends upon characteristics
the description for Analog Input 7 as Analog Volt Adjust.
such as engine make, fuel type, load types, and
operating conditions. The underfrequency unload Analog voltage adjust may be enabled only when the
setting should match the engine speed recovery master switch is in the OFF/RESET or AUTO positions
characteristics for the application. and while the generator is not running.
Underfrequency Unload Slope. This setting
determines how much the voltage drops during an
underfrequency condition. Typically, applying a large
electrical load causes a dip in engine speed and
frequency. The voltage regulator reduces voltage,
allowing engine speed recovery. The volts-per-Hz
setting determines the amount of voltage drop.

34 Section 1 Specifications and Features TP-6750 7/18d


Section 2 Operation

2.1 Prestart Checklist Fuel Level. Check the fuel level and keep the tank(s)
full to ensure adequate fuel supply.
To ensure continued satisfactory operation, perform the
following checks or inspections before or at each Oil Level. Maintain the oil level at or near, not over, the
startup, as designated, and at the intervals specified in full mark on the dipstick.
the service schedule. In addition, some checks require
Operating Area. Check for obstructions that could
verification after the unit starts.
block the flow of cooling air. Keep the air intake area
Air Cleaner. Check for a clean and installed air cleaner clean. Do not leave rags, tools, or debris on or near the
element to prevent unfiltered air from entering engine. generator set.

Air Inlets. Check for clean and unobstructed air inlets. 2.2 Exercising Generator Set
Battery. Check for tight battery connections. Consult Operate the generator set under load once each week
the battery manufacturer’s instructions regarding for one hour. Perform the exercise in the presence of an
battery care and maintenance. operator when the generator set does not have a
programmed exercise mode or an automatic transfer
Controller. After reconnecting the battery, set the switch with an exercise option.
controller time and date. See Section 2, Menu 14—
Programming Mode On and Menu 6—Time and Date. During the exercise period apply a minimum of 35% load
based on the nameplate standby rating, unless
Coolant Level. Check the coolant level according to the otherwise instructed in the engine operation manual.
cooling system maintenance information.
The operator should perform all of the prestart checks
Note: Block Heater Damage. The block heater will fail before starting the manual exercise procedure. Start
if the energized heater element is not immersed the generator set according to the starting procedure in
in coolant. Fill the cooling system before turning Section 2.3, Controller Operation. While the generator
on the block heater. Run the engine until it is set is operating, listen for a smooth-running engine and
warm, and refill the radiator to purge the air from visually inspect generator set for fluid or exhaust leaks.
the system before energizing the block heater.
The generator set exercise time can be programmed for
Drive Belts. Check the belt condition and tension of the a one-time exercise period. See Menu 4—Operational
radiator fan, water pump, and battery charging Records. The generator set controller does not provide
alternator belt(s). weekly scheduled exercise periods. For scheduled
exercise periods, refer to the automatic transfer switch
Exhaust System. Check for exhaust leaks and
(if equipped) literature.
blockages. Check the silencer and piping condition and
check for tight exhaust system connections.
2.3 Controller Operation
Inspect the exhaust system components (exhaust
manifold, exhaust line, flexible exhaust, clamps, The controller operation includes several types of
silencer, and outlet pipe) for cracks, leaks, and starting and stopping functions as detailed in the
corrosion. following paragraphs. The controller master switch
buttons, lamps, and alarm horn functions are
D Check for corroded or broken metal parts and replace summarized in Figure 2-1.
them as needed.

D Check for loose, corroded, or missing clamps and


2.3.1 Paralleling Operation
hangers. Tighten or replace the exhaust clamps Refer to Appendix F—Paralleling Operation and the
and/or hangers as needed. Digital Paralleling System (DPS) literature for operation
information.
D Check that the exhaust outlet is unobstructed.

D Visually inspect for exhaust leaks (blowby). Check


for carbon or soot residue on exhaust components.
Carbon and soot residue indicates an exhaust leak.
Seal leaks as needed.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 35


Master Switch Generator Set Warning Lamp Fault Lamp Alarm Master Switch
Button Status (yellow) (red) Horn Controller Display Off Lamp (red)
OFF Off On Off On Overview On
Off
Off Overview
On or Cranking Off Off Off
AUTO (green)
Warning Active On Warning Message
Fault Off Off On On* Fault Message Flashing
On or Cranking Overview
Off Off
RUN (yellow) Warning Active On On Warning Message
Fault Off On Fault Message Flashing
* Alarm horn can be silenced while in the AUTO mode.

Figure 2-1 Controller Master Switch Buttons Function Summary

2.3.2 Starting optional prime power switch kit. The prime power switch
kit prevents engine starting battery drain when the
Local Starting generator set is shut down and no external battery
charging is available.
Press the master switch RUN button to start the
generator set at the controller. Move the prime power switch located on the back of the
controller to the CONTROLLER ON position and set the
Note: The alarm horn sounds and the Not-In-Auto controller time and date before attempting to start the
Warning display appears whenever the generator set. When the prime power mode is off, all
generator set master switch button is not in the controller functions including the digital display, LEDs,
AUTO mode. and alarm horn are operative.

Note: The transient start/stop function of the controller Note: After energizing the controller using the prime
prevents accidental cranking of the rotating engine. power switch, set the controller time and date.
The generator set stops and recranks when the See Section 2.8.6, Menu 6—TIme and Date.
OFF/RESET button is momentarily pressed and
then the RUN button is pressed. Stop the generator set using the stopping procedures in
Section 2.3.3 before placing the generator set in the
prime power mode. Move the prime power switch
Auto Starting located on the back of the controller to the
Press the master switch AUTO button to allow startup by CONTROLLER OFF position. When the generator set
the automatic transfer switch or remote start/stop switch is is the prime power mode, all controller functions
(connected to controller terminals 3 and 4). including the digital display, LEDs, alarm horn, and
communications are inoperative.
Terminals 3 and 4 connect to a circuit that automatically
starts the generator set crank cycle when an external Idle (Speed) Mode Warmup and Cooldown
source closes the circuit. Function
Note: The controller provides up to 30 seconds of The idle (speed) mode function provides the ability to
programmable cyclic cranking and up to start and run the engine at reduced speed for a
60 seconds rest with up to 6 cycles. The default selectable time period (0--10 minutes) during warmup.
setting is 15 seconds cranking and 15 seconds See Section 6.1.4, Idle (Speed) Mode Feature, for
rest for 3 cycles. Make cyclic cranking installation information.
adjustments using the keypad. See Section 2.8.14,
Menu—14 Programming Mode and Section 2.8.8, The controller will override the idle speed mode when
Menu 8—Time Delays. the engine reaches the preprogrammed engine
warm-up temperature before the idle mode times out.
Prime Power Switch The idle function also provides engine cooldown at idle
The controller has an optional prime power mode of speed. The controller overrides the idle speed mode
operation. The prime power mode requires installation when the engine reaches the preprogrammed engine
of an optional prime power switch kit. See Section 6, cooldown temperature before the idle mode times out.
Accessories, for instructions on how to install the

36 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


During the idle (speed) mode the controller continues to The controller has a programmable cooldown timer that
monitor critical engine parameters such as oil pressure, functions only when the master switch button is in the
coolant temperature, and engine speed. The voltage AUTO mode. To stop the generator set, press the
regulator, thermal protection feature, and AC metering generator set master switch OFF/RESET button and
are disabled in the idle speed mode. wait until the generator set comes to a complete stop.

The controller overrides the idle speed function when Note: The cooldown cycle times out before the
the generator set is signaled to start while in the AUTO generator set stops when a remote switch or
position. This override provides emergency generator automatic transfer switch initiates the generator
set power in the event of a utility power failure. When the set start/stop sequence.
utility power returns and the generator set is signalled to
stop, the generator set continues to run for the duration Emergency Stopping
of the idle mode period when the idle mode is active.
When the idle mode is not active, the generator set will Use the controller emergency stop switch or optional
shut down in the normal stopping mode including time remote emergency stop for immediate shutdown.
delays.
The emergency stop switch bypasses the time delay
See Menu 9—Input Setup to activate the idle speed engine cooldown and immediately shuts down the
function as a user-defined digital input. The idle speed generator set.
feature requires an ECM-equipped engine with the idle
speed function. Note: Use the emergency stop switch(es) for
emergency shutdowns only. Use the generator
set master switch OFF/RESET button for normal
Run Time Feature
shutdowns.
The run time feature allows the user to set up the
generator set to run unassisted and automatically return The controller fault lamp illuminates and the unit shuts
to the standby mode. The user does not need to wait for down when the local or remote emergency stop switch
the exercise period (run time) to conclude in order to activates.
place the unit back in the standby mode. See
Menu 4—Operational Records for setup of this feature. Battle Switch/Fault Shutdown Override
Switch
With the run time enabled, the generator set will begin to
crank and run based on the run time period and all The battle switch function forces the system to ignore
previously established time delays from Menu 8—Time normal fault shutdowns such as low oil pressure and
Delays. high engine temperature. The battle switch does not
override the emergency stop and overspeed shutdown.
Generator Set Connected to an Automatic Transfer When the battle switch function is enabled the generator
Switch. Should a utility power failure occur while the set continues to run regardless of shutdown signals
unit is in the run time mode, the controller will bypass the where potential engine/alternator damage can occur.
run time mode and function in the standby (backup)
mode. When the utility power returns, the generator set When this input is enabled the yellow warning lamp
continues to run for the duration of the run time period illuminates and stored warning/shutdown events that
when not timed out. are ignored continue to log in Menu 5— Event History.

Note: Press the STOP PROG RUN key, when See Section 2.8.9, Menu 9—Input Setup, for information
necessary, to stop the generator set when it is in on how to enable the battle switch feature.
the run time mode.
Cooldown Temperature Override Function. This
feature provides the ability to bypass (override) the
2.3.3 Stopping (User Stopping and generator set’s smart cooldown temperature shutdown
Fault Shutdown) and force the generator set to run for the full engine
cooldown time delay.
Normal Stopping
See Section 2.8.8, Menu 8—Time Delays, for
Run the generator set without load for 5 minutes to information on how to enable the cooldown temperature
ensure adequate engine cooldown. override feature.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 37


2.3.4 Emergency Stop Switch Resetting Using the remote communications package, the user
can label the auxiliary functions. The controller displays
Use the following procedure to reset the generator set the selected name instead of digital input D01-D21 or
after shutdown by a local or remote emergency stop analog input A01-A07.
switch. Refer to Section 2.3.7, Controller Reset
Procedure, to restart the generator set following a fault Battery Charger Communication Error. The warning
shutdown. lamp on the controller illuminates yellow and the alarm
horn sounds when CAN communication with the battery
1. Investigate and correct the cause of the charger has been lost or there is a CAN address
emergency stop. communication error. To correct a CAN address error,
verify the address identification in the harness and
2. Reset the optional remote emergency stop switch by power cycle the controller. Local display shows chrg
replacing the glass piece, when equipped. Additional comm error.
glass rods are available as a service part. Reset the
controller emergency stop switch by pulling the Battery Charger Fault. The lamp illuminates and the
switch dial outward. alarm horn sounds when the battery charger
malfunctions or when there is an issue with the battery
3. Press the generator set master switch such as a connection problem or a dead battery. When
OFF/RESET button. the temperature compensation sensor is connected,
whether active or inactive, and the temperature rises
4. After resetting all faults using the controller reset
above 60_C (140_F) or below --20_C (--4_F), the battery
procedure in Section 2.3.7, press the generator set
charger fault will also be displayed indicating that the
master switch RUN or AUTO button to restart the
battery is unable to take charge due to temperature.
generator set. The generator set will not crank until
Absorption timeout will also cause a failure since the
the reset procedure completes.
battery was unable to accept the expected charge in the
time frame given which indicates a potential battery
2.3.5 System Warning Lamp issue. Local display shows bat chgr fault.
The yellow warning lamp illuminates indicating a fault or
Battery Charger Value Error. The lamp illuminates
status event but does not shut down the generator set
and the alarm horn sounds when the battery charger
under the following conditions. In some cases the alarm
metering is not in range of the specified parameters.
horn also sounds. See Section 2.3.7, Controller Reset
Local display shows chgr val error.
Procedure, for instructions on resetting a system
warning. Battle Switch. The lamp illuminates and the alarm horn
sounds when the fault shutdown override switch is
When the system warning lamp is on and no message
activated. The local display shows battle switch.
displays, press the Reset Menu and the menu down 
key to view messages. When the system warning Circuit Breaker Close Attempts Fault. The lamp
continues, it may lead to a fault and cause a system illuminates and the horn sounds when the generator
shutdown. circuit breaker has failed to close within the number of
attempts designated in Menu 17. The controller will
Use the Alarm Off keypad switch to silence the alarm
cease attempting to close the circuit breaker until this
horn at the operator’s discretion. Press the AUTO
warning is reset. The local display shows CB Close Atts
button before silencing the alarm horn. The alarm horn
Fault.
cannot be silenced unless the master switch button is in
the AUTO mode. Circuit Breaker Current Fault. The lamp illuminates
and the alarm horn sounds when the controller
Note: Text shown in italics in this manual represents
measures current above the fault limit designated in
digital display messages.
Menu 17 when the circuit breaker is seen as open. The
AC Sensing Loss. The lamp illuminates when the local display shows CB Current Fault.
controller does not detect nominal generator set AC
Circuit Breaker Open Fault. The lamp illuminates and
output voltage after crank disconnect. The local display
the alarm horn sounds when the controller does not
shows AC sensing loss.
detect the circuit breaker to be open. The generator set
Auxiliary (Warning). The lamp illuminates and the will continue to run. The local display shows CB Open
alarm horn sounds when an auxiliary digital or analog Fault.
inputs signals the controller. The user can define inputs
as shutdowns or warnings. The local display shows
digital input D01-D21 or analog input A01-A07.

38 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


Common Protective Relay Warning. The lamp (dead bus, first-on enabled and first generator set to
illuminates and the alarm horn sounds when a common have satisfactory voltage and frequency) but fails to
protective relay fault occurs. The generator set circuit close to the bus. The local display shows first on fault.
breaker will trip and the controller will start the shutdown
time delay, see Circuit Breaker Trip to Shutdown Time Generator Set Parameter Warning. The lamp
Delay. The local display shows common pr output. illuminates and the alarm horn sounds when one of the
alternator configuration parameters (voltage,
Dead Bus Sensing Fault. The lamp illuminates and the connection, frequency) is not properly set within the
alarm horn sounds when the controller detects some factory defined acceptable limits of the personality
indication that the bus may not be dead, even though profile parameters. The local display shows genset
there is no voltage coming in on the bus sensing lines. param warning.
The local display shows dead bus sense fault.
Generator Set Serial Number Warning. The serial
Defined Common Warning. The lamp illuminates and number has not been entered. The serial number must
the alarm horn sounds when a defined common warning match the number in the personality profile (params.s37
occurs. The local display shows defined common warn. file) and it must match the serial number of the particular
Refer to 2.7.10 for a list of the common warning items. generator set designated on the nameplate. The local
display shows genset s/n warning.
Duplicate PGEN ID. The lamp illuminates and the
alarm horn sounds when the controller detects another Ground Fault Detected. The lamp illuminates and the
generator set is communicating on the parallelling bus alarm horn sounds when a user-supplied ground fault
(PGEN) with the same Generator ID (PGEN settings). detector signals the controller. The local display shows
Each generator set must have a unique ID number; see ground fault.
2.8.16, Menu 16, Paralleling Menu for Generator ID in
PGEN settings. The local display shows duplicate High Battery Voltage. The lamp illuminates when the
PGEN warning. battery voltage rises above the preset level for more
than 10 seconds. The local display shows high battery
ECM Yellow Alarm. The lamp illuminates and the alarm voltage. Figure 2-2 shows high battery voltage
horn sounds when ECM yellow alarm signals the specifications. The high battery voltage feature
controller. The local display shows ECM yellow alarm. monitors the battery and battery charging system in the
This fault only relates to the DD/MTU engine with generator set operating and off modes.
MDEC/ADEC. The user can navigate the menus to
access the fault code. The engine operation manual Engine Electrical High Battery High Battery Voltage
System Voltage Voltage Range Default Setting
provides the fault code descriptions.
12 14.5--16.5 16
Emergency Power System (EPS) Supplying Load. 24 29--33 32
The lamp illuminates when the generator set supplies
more than 1% of the rated standby output current. The Figure 2-2 High Battery Voltage Specs
local display shows EPS supplying load.
High Coolant Temperature Warning. The lamp
External Breaker Trip. The lamp illuminates and the illuminates and the alarm horn sounds when the engine
alarm horn sounds when the controller receives some coolant temperature approaches the shutdown range.
external signal (from a DigIn, Modbus, front panel) to trip The local display shows hi cool temp warning.
the circuit breaker and this occurs unexpectedly
High Oil Temperature Warning. The lamp illuminates
(outside the normal expected operation as configured).
and the alarm horn sounds when the engine high oil
The circuit breaker trips and the shutdown time delay will
temperature approaches the shutdown range. The local
begin (see Breaker Trip to Shutdown) Time Delay. The
display shows hi oil temp warning (DD/MTU models with
local display shows extrnl breaker trip.
MDEC/ADEC only).
Extra PGEN Node. The lamp illuminates and the alarm
Idle Speed Mode. The lamp illuminates and the alarm
horn sounds when the number of generator sets
horn sounds when the idle speed mode is activated. The
communicating on the paralleling bus (PGEN) is more
local displays shows idle mode active.
than the number declared in Menu 16 or may indicate a
problem with the communication bus. The local display
shows extra pgen node.

First On Fault. The lamp illuminates and the alarm horn


sounds when the controller satisfies first on criteria

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 39


Intake Air Temperature Warning. The lamp illuminates Low Fuel (Level or Pressure) Warning. The lamp
and the alarm horn sounds when the engine intake air illuminates and the alarm horn sounds when the fuel
temperature approaches the shutdown range. The local tank level on diesel models approaches empty or low
display shows intake air temp warn (DD/MTU models with fuel pressure on gaseous fueled models occurs. This
MDEC/ADEC powered models only). warning requires an optional low fuel switch for the lamp
to function. The local display shows low fuel warning.
Load Shed kW Overload. The lamp illuminates when
the generator set’s total kW load exceeds the (Low) Oil Pressure Warning. The lamp illuminates
programmed level for more than the load shed time. and the alarm horn sounds when the engine oil pressure
When the load shed alarm sounds and resets more than approaches the shutdown range. The local display
twice in 1 minute, the load shed warning lamp circuit shows oil press warning.
latches and remains on until the generator set shuts
down. The local display shows load shed kW over. Maintenance Reminder. The lamp illuminates and the
alarm horn sounds when the generator set run time
Load Shed Under Frequency. The lamp illuminates exceeds the maintenance reminder time set in Menu 4,
and the alarm horn sounds when the frequency Operational Records. The local display shows
approaches the warning levels shown in Figure 2-3. The maintenance reminder.
local display shows load shed under frequency.
Master (Switch) Not in Auto. The warning active and
Generator Set the not in auto lamps illuminate and alarm horn sounds
Nominal Frequency Under Frequency Warning
when the generator set master switch button is not in the
60 59 AUTO (automatic start) mode. The local display shows
50 49 master not in auto.
Figure 2-3 Under Frequency Specs Missing PGEN Node. The lamp illuminates and the
alarm horn sounds when the number of generator sets
When the generator set frequency drops to less than
communicating on the paralleling bus (PGEN) is less
59 Hz on a 60 Hz system or 49 Hz on a 50 Hz system for
than the number declared in Menu 16. The local display
more than 5 seconds, the local display shows load shed
shows missing pgen node.
under freq. When the load shed alarm sounds and
resets more than twice in 1 minute, the load shed NFPA 110 Fault. The lamp illuminates and the alarm
warning lamp latches and remains on until the generator horn sounds when NFPA 110 faults signal the controller.
set shuts down. The local display shows the respective fault message.
The NFPA 110 faults (Warning/Shutdown) typically
Low Battery Voltage. The lamp illuminates when the
include:
battery voltage drops below a preset level for more than
10 seconds. The local display shows low battery D Battery charger fault (Factory-reserved D01) (W)
voltage. See Figure 2-4 for low battery voltage D EPS supplying load (W)
specifications. D High battery voltage (W)
D High coolant temperature (W)
Engine Electrical Low Battery Low Battery Voltage
System Voltage Voltage Range Default Setting D High coolant temperature (S)
12 10--12.5 12 D Low battery voltage (W)
24 20--25 24 D Low coolant level (Factory-reserved D14) (S)
D Low coolant temperature
Figure 2-4 Low Battery Voltage Specs (Factory-reserved D03) (W)
D Low fuel (level or pressure)
The low battery voltage feature monitors the battery and
(Factory-reserved D02) (W)
battery charging system in the generator set operating
D Low oil pressure (W)
and off modes. The controller logic inhibits the low
battery voltage warning during the crank cycle. D Low oil pressure (S)
D Master switch not in auto (W)
Low Coolant Temperature. The lamp illuminates and D Overcrank (S)
the alarm horn sounds when the engine coolant D Overspeed (S)
temperature is low. The local display shows low coolant
temp.

40 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


Overcurrent. The lamp illuminates and the alarm horn PR Under Frequency. The lamp illuminates and the
sounds when the generator set supplies more than alarm horn sounds when the frequency is less than the
110% of the rated standby output current for more than protective relay under frequency limit as seen in
10 seconds. The local display shows overcurrent. Menu 15 after the time delay expires. The controller will
trip the circuit breaker and start the Circuit Breaker Trip
PGEN Communication Not Online. The lamp to Shutdown Time Delay. The local display shows pr
illuminates and the alarm horn sounds when the under frequency.
controller is not yet communicating on the paralleling
bus (PGEN). The local display shows pgen comm not PR Under Voltage. The lamp illuminates and the alarm
online. horn sounds when the voltage is less than the protective
relay under voltage limit as seen in Menu 15 after the
PR Loss of Field. The lamp illuminates and the alarm time delay expires. The controller will trip the circuit
horn sounds when the VARs into the generator set breaker and start the Circuit Breaker Trip to Shutdown
exceeds the protective relay loss of field kVAR limit as Time Delay. The local display shows pr under voltage.
seen in Menu 15 after the time delay expires. The
controller will trip the circuit breaker and start the Circuit Speed Sensor Fault. The lamp illuminates and the
Breaker Trip to Shutdown Time Delay. The local display alarm horn sounds when the speed signal is absent for
shows pr loss of field. one second while the generator set runs. The local
display shows speed sensor fault. This warning lamp
PR Over Current VR. The lamp illuminates and the remains on until the operator presses the master switch
alarm horn sounds when the current exceeds the OFF button.
protective relay over current voltage restraint (VR) as
seen in Menu 15 after the time delay expires. If the Starter ’A’ Failure. The lamp illuminates and the alarm
output voltage is less than rated, the over current limit horn sounds when the controller receives a starter
will drop proportionately with the voltage as compared to failure signal from the first of two starters. The local
the rated voltage. The controller will trip the circuit display shows starter ’A’ failure.
breaker and start the Circuit Breaker Trip to Shutdown
Time Delay. The local display shows pr over current vr. Starter ’B’ Failure. The lamp illuminates and the alarm
horn sounds when the controller receives a starter
PR Over Frequency. The lamp illuminates and the failure signal from the second of two starters. The local
alarm horn sounds when the frequency exceeds the display shows starter ’B’ failure.
protective relay over frequency limit as seen in Menu 15
after the time delay expires. The controller will trip the Sync Timeout. The lamp illuminates and the alarm
circuit breaker and start the Circuit Breaker Trip to horn sounds when generator set does not successfully
Shutdown Time Delay. The local display shows pr over synchronize to the live bus within the time delay as
frequency. defined (Fail to Synch TD) in Menu 16. The controller
will continue attempting to synchronize to the bus after
PR Over Power. The lamp illuminates and the alarm the time delay expires and the warning occurs. The local
horn sounds when the output power exceeds the display shows sync timeout.
protective relay over power limit as seen in Menu 15
after the time delay expires. The controller will trip the Weak Battery. The lamp illuminates when the battery
circuit breaker and start the Circuit Breaker Trip to voltage falls below 60% of the nominal voltage (12 VDC
Shutdown Time Delay. The local display shows pr over or 24 VDC) for more than 2 seconds during the crank
power. cycle. The local display shows weak battery.

PR Over Voltage. The lamp illuminates and the alarm


horn sounds when the voltage exceeds the protective
2.3.6 System Shutdown Lamp
relay over voltage limit as set in Menu 15 after the time The red lamp illuminates, the alarm horn sounds, and
delay expires. The controller will trip the circuit breaker the unit shuts down to indicate a fault shutdown under
and start the Circuit Breaker Trip to Shutdown Time the following conditions. See Section 2.3.7, Controller
Delay. The local display shows PR Over Voltage. Reset Procedure, for information on resetting a system
shutdown.
PR Reverse Power. The lamp illuminates and the
alarm horn sounds when the power into the generator Use the Alarm Off keypad switch to silence the alarm
set exceeds the protective relay reverse power limit as horn at the operator’s discretion. Press the AUTO
seen in Menu 15 after the time delay expires. The button before silencing the alarm horn. The alarm horn
controller will trip the circuit breaker and start the Circuit cannot be silenced unless the master switch button is in
Breaker Trip to Shutdown Time Delay. The local display the AUTO mode.
shows pr reverse power.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 41


Note: The text shown in italics represents digital display Defined Common Fault. The lamp illuminates, the
messages. alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when a
defined common fault occurs. The local display shows
Alternator Protection. The lamp illuminates, the alarm defined common fault. The defined common faults
horn sounds, and the unit shuts down because of an include:
alternator overload or short circuit. The local display
shows alternator protection. See Appendix D, D Emergency stop
Alternator Protection for more information. D High coolant temperature shutdown
D Low oil pressure shutdown
Alternator Protection KW Overload (see Overpower D Overcrank
following). The lamp illuminates and the alarm horn D Overspeed
sounds when the controller detects an output power that D Remote shutdown
exceeds the shutdown limit for a time greater than one
minute. The local display shows alternator protection. ECM Red Alarm. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn
However, the event as seen in Event History, Menu 5 will sounds, and the unit shuts down when the controller
be alternator protection kw. receives a signal from the engine. The local display
shows ECM red alarm. This fault only relates to the
Auxiliary (Shutdown). The lamp illuminates, the alarm DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC. The user can
horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when an auxiliary navigate the menus to access the fault code. The
digital or analog input signals the controller. The user engine operation manual provides the fault code
can define inputs as shutdowns or warnings. The local descriptions.
display shows digital input D01-D21 or analog input
A01-A07 when activated. EEPROM Write Failure. The lamp illuminates, the
alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when the
Using the remote communications package, the user control logic detects a data save error. The local display
can label the auxiliary functions. The controller displays shows EEPROM write failure.
the selected name instead of digital input D01-D21 or
analog input A01-A07. Emergency Stop. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn
sounds, and the unit shuts down when the local or
Circuit Breaker Common Fault. The lamp illuminates, optional remote emergency stop switch activates. The
the alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when a local display shows emergency stop.
circuit breaker common fault is detected. The local
display shows CB common fault. Engine Stalled. The lamp illuminates and the alarm
horn sounds when the controller has detected that the
Circuit Breaker Trip to Shutdown Time Delay. The engine has stalled for some reason and there is no other
lamp illuminates and the alarm horn sounds and the indication of the root cause of failure. The local display
generator set shuts down when the trip to shutdown time shows engine stalled.
delay expires. The trip to shutdown timer starts when
the controller opens the generator set circuit breaker for Field Overvoltage. The lamp illuminates, the alarm
external trip or protective relay signal. horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when the
controller detects field overvoltage. The local display
Critical Overvoltage. The lamp illuminates, the alarm shows field overvoltage. (generator sets with M4/M5/
horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when the voltage M7/M10 alternators only)
exceeds 275 volts. The local display shows critical
overvoltage.

For voltage configurations of 240 volts and less, the


critical voltage shutdown monitors nominal voltage
line-to-line. For voltage configurations greater than
240 volts and less than 600 volts, the critical voltage
shutdown monitors nominal voltage line-to-line with a
center tap connection. For voltage configurations of
600 volts and above, the critical voltage shutdown
monitors nominal voltage with a stepdown transformer
in the 208--240 voltage range.

42 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


High Coolant Temperature Shutdown. The lamp Loss of ECM Communications. The lamp illuminates,
illuminates, the alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts the alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when
down because of high engine coolant temperature. The the ECM communication link is disrupted. The local
shutdown occurs 5 seconds after the engine reaches display shows loss of ECM comm.
the temperature shutdown range. The high engine
temperature shutdown does not function during the first Loss of Field. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn
30 seconds after startup. The local display shows hi sounds, and the unit shuts down when reactive power
cool temp shutdwn. (VARs) into the generator set exceeds the shutdown
loss of field setting in Menu15 after the time delay
Note: The high engine temperature shutdown function expires. The local display shows sd loss of field.
and the low coolant level shutdown function are
independent. A low coolant level condition may Low Coolant Level. The lamp illuminates, the alarm
not activate the high engine temperature switch. horn sounds, and the unit shuts down because of low
low coolant level. Shutdown occurs 5 seconds after low
High Oil Temperature. The lamp illuminates, the alarm coolant level is detected. Low coolant level shutdown is
horn sounds, and the unit shuts down because of high inhibited during the first 30 seconds after startup. Local
engine oil temperature. The shutdown occurs display shows low coolant level.
5 seconds after the engine oil reaches the temperature
shutdown range. The high engine oil temperature Low Coolant Temperature. The lamp illuminates, the
shutdown does not function during the first 30 seconds alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when the
after startup. The local display shows high oil temp engine coolant temperature is low. The local display
sdwn. shows low cool temp sdwn.

Intake Air Temperature. The lamp illuminates, the Low Fuel (Level or Pressure) Shutdown. The lamp
alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts down because of illuminates and the alarm horn sounds, and the unit
high intake air temperature. The shutdown occurs shuts down when the fuel tank level on diesel models
5 seconds after the engine intake air reaches the approaches empty or low fuel pressure on gaseous
temperature shutdown range. The engine intake air fueled models occurs. This fault requires an optional
temperature shutdown does not function during the first low fuel switch for the lamp to function. The local display
30 seconds after startup. The local display shows shows low fuel shutdwn.
intake air temp sdwn. (DD/MTU models with
MDEC/ADEC- powered models only.) (Low) Oil Pressure Shutdown. The lamp illuminates
and the alarm horn sounds when the unit shuts down
Internal Fault. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn because of low oil pressure. The shutdown occurs
sounds, and the unit shuts down when the internal 5 seconds after the low pressure condition is detected.
diagnostics detect a controller malfunction. The local The low oil pressure shutdown does not function during
display shows internal fault. first the 30 seconds after startup. The local display
shows oil pressure shutdown.
J1939 CAN Shutdown. The lamp illuminates and the
alarm horn sounds when the engine ECM has shut down Master Switch Error. The lamp illuminates, the alarm
the engine for some reason, but has not provided a horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when the
defined error message. The local display shows J1939 controller detects a fault in the master switch position or
can shutdown. circuit. The local display shows master switch error.

Locked Rotor. If none of the speed sensing inputs Master Switch Open. The lamp illuminates, the alarm
show engine rotation within 5 seconds of initiating horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when the
engine cranking, the ignition and crank circuits turn off controller detects an open circuit in the master switch
for 5 seconds and the cycle repeats. The lamp circuit. The local display shows master switch open.
illuminates, the alarm horn sound, and the unit shuts
down after the second cycle of 5 seconds of cranking.
The local display shows locked rotor.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 43


Master Switch to Off. The NOT IN AUTO lamp Overcurrent Voltage Restraint Shutdown. The lamp
illuminates, the alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts illuminates, the alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts
down when the controller master switch OFF button is down when the controller detects an overcurrent fault.
pressed. The local display shows master switch to off. When output voltage is less than rated, the current limit
is reduced proportionately. The local display shows sd
NFPA 110 Fault. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn over current vr.
sounds, and the unit shuts down when NFPA 110 faults
signal the controller. The NFPA 110 faults (Warning/ Overfrequency. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn
Shutdown) include: sounds, and the unit shuts down when the frequency is
D Battery charger fault (Factory-reserved D01) (W) above the overfrequency setting. The local display
shows overfrequency. See Figure 2-5.
D EPS supplying load (W)
D High battery voltage (W)
Overfrequency Overfrequency
D High coolant temperature (W)
Setting Range Time Delay Default Setting
D High coolant temperature (S)
102%--140% of nominal 10 sec. 140% of nominal
D Low battery voltage (W)
D Low coolant level (Factory-reserved D14) (S) Figure 2-5 Overfrequency Specs
D Low coolant temperature
(Factory-reserved D03) (W) Overpower (see Alternator Protection kW
D Low fuel (level or pressure) previously). The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn
(Factory-reserved D02) (W) sounds, and the unit shuts down when the controller
detects output power that exceeds the shut down over
D Low oil pressure (W)
power limit (Menu 15) after the time delay expires. The
D Low oil pressure (S)
local display shows over power.
D Master switch not in auto (W)
D Overcrank (S) Overspeed. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn
D Overspeed (S) sounds, and the unit shuts down immediately when the
governed frequency on 50 and 60 Hz models exceeds
No Coolant Temperature Signal. The lamp the overspeed setting for 0.25 seconds. The local
illuminates, the alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts display shows overspeed. See Figure 2-6 for
down when the engine coolant temperature sender overspeed specs.
circuit is open. The local display shows no cool temp
signal.
Generator Set Overspeed Overspeed Default
Frequency Hz Time Delay Range Hz Setting Hz
No Oil Pressure Signal. The lamp illuminates, the
alarm horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when the 60 0.25 sec. 65--70 70
engine oil pressure sender circuit is open. The local 50 0.25 sec. 55--70 70
display shows no oil pressure signal.
Figure 2-6 Overspeed Specs
Overcrank. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn
sounds, and cranking stops when the unit does not start Overvoltage. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn
within the defined cranking period. The local display sounds, and the unit shuts down when the voltage
shows overcrank. See Section 2.3.2, Auto Starting, and exceeds the overvoltage setting for the time delay
Section 1, Specifications and Features, for cyclic crank period. The local display shows overvoltage.
specifications. Overvoltage specifications follow. See Figure 2-7.

Note: The controller is equipped with an automatic Note: Overvoltage can damage sensitive equipment in
restart function. When speed drops below 13 Hz less than one second. Install separate
(390 rpm) while the engine is running, the unit overvoltage protection (surge protectors) on
attempts to recrank. The unit then follows the online equipment requiring faster than 2-second
cyclic cranking cycle and, if the engine fails to shutdown.
start, will shut down on an overcrank fault
condition. Overvoltage Time Delay Overvoltage Default Setting
Setting Range Range with Paralleling
105%--135% of
2--10 sec. 135% at 10 sec.
nominal

Figure 2-7 Overvoltage Specs

44 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


Remote Shutdown. The lamp illuminates, the alarm Refer to Section 2.3.4, Emergency Stop Switch Reset
horn sounds, and the unit shuts down when a remote Procedure, to reset the generator set after an
shutdown signal is detected. The local display shows emergency stop.
remote shutdwn.
1. Disconnect the generator set load using the line
Reverse Power. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn circuit breaker or automatic transfer switch.
sounds, and the unit shuts down when the controller
detects a reverse power condition. The reverse power 2. Correct the cause of the fault shutdown or warning.
relay senses AC power flow into the generator set. If the See the Safety Precautions and Instructions
power into the generator set exceeds the reverse power section of this manual before proceeding.
shutdown limit (Menu 15), the controller trips the circuit
breaker and shuts down the unit. The local display 3. Start the generator set by pressing the generator
shows sd reverse power. set master switch OFF button and then press the
RUN button.
Underfrequency. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn When equipped, the remote annunciator alarm
sounds, and the unit shuts down when the frequency horn sounds. Press the ALARM SILENCE/LAMP
falls below the underfrequency setting. The local TEST button to stop the alarm horn. The lamp
display shows underfrequency. See Figure 2-8. turns off.

Underfreq. Underfrequency Default 4. Test operate the generator set to verify correction
Setting Ranger Time Delay Setting with Paralleling of the shutdown cause.
80%--95% of
nominal
10 sec. 80% of nominal 5. Press the generator set master switch OFF button
to stop the generator set.
Figure 2-8 Underfrequency Specs
6. Press the generator set master switch AUTO
Undervoltage. The lamp illuminates, the alarm horn button.
sounds, and the unit shuts down when the voltage falls
below the undervoltage setting for the time delay period. 7. Silence the controller alarm horn by pressing the
The local display shows undervoltage. Undervoltage ALARM SILENCE button.
specifications follow. See Figure 2-9.
8. Reconnect the generator set load via the line circuit
breaker or automatic transfer switch.
Undervoltage Time Delay Undervoltage Default
Setting Range Range Setting w/Paralleling
9. When equipped, the remote annunciator alarm
70%--95% of
5--30 sec. 70% of nominal at 30 sec. horn sounds. Press the ALARM SILENCE/LAMP
nominal
TEST button to stop the alarm horn. The lamp
Figure 2-9 Undervoltage Specs turns off.

2.3.7 Controller Resetting (Following 2.4 Factory Reserved Inputs


System Shutdown or Warning) Available user inputs are dependent on factory-
Use the following procedure to restart the generator set reserved inputs for specific engine types, engine
after a system shutdown or to clear a warning lamp controls, and paralleling applications. See Figure 2-10
condition. This procedure includes the resetting of the for analog and digital inputs that are not user-selectable.
optional remote annunciator and the audiovisual alarm.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 45


Specific Applications
DD/MTU Other
Input Non-ECM Paralleling Engine with Specialized
Type ECM Engine Engine NFPA 110 Application MDEC/ADEC Application Factory Defaults
Analog Inputs
A1 X Coolant Temp. X X X X
A2 X Oil Pressure X X X X
A3 X X X X X X
A4 X X X X X X
A5 X X X X X X
A6 X X X X X X (1)
A7 Voltage Adjust
Digital Inputs
D1 X X Battery Charger Fault X X X Battery Charger Fault
D2 X X Low Fuel Warning X X X Low Fuel Warning
D3 X X Low Coolant Temp. X X X Low Coolant Temp.
D4 X X X X X X (2) Over Excitation (2)
Breaker
D5 X X X X X Gen CB Closed
Closed
D6 X X X X X X VAR/PF Mode Enable
kW Base Load Mode
D7 X X X X X X
Enable
System kW Control
D8 X X X X X X
Mode Enable
D9 X X X X X X Low Fuel Shutdown
D10 X X X X X X Load Enable
Master Switch
D11 X X X X X X
Auto/Synch Auto
Master Switch Auto
D12 X X X X X X
Synch Permissible
Master Switch Auto
D13 X X X X X X
Synch Check
Low Coolant Level
D14 X X X X X Low Coolant Level
(with LCL Switch)*
D15 X X X X X X Remote Shutdown
D16 X X X X X X Remote Reset
D17 X X X X X X Voltage Lower
D18 X X X X X X Voltage Raise
D19 X X X X X X Speed Lower
D20 X X X X X X Speed Raise
Idle (Speed) Mode
D21 X X X X X X
Function
(1) A6 is preassigned as Speed Adjustment on 450/500REOZVB with EMS2.
(2) D4 is preassigned as Field Overvolts when using M4/M5/M7/M10 alternators.

Figure 2-10 User Inputs (X) and Factory-Reserved Inputs

46 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.5 Reviewing Digital Display Enter  Key. Press the enter  key to confirm the
entered information on the display when selecting
The user interacts with the controller with a keypad and menus or programming.
digital display. Use the keypad to access the generator
set informational data and preset settings. This review Lamp Test Key. Press the lamp test key to check that
section shows how to access the data. See Section 2.8, the status and fault lamps illuminate, the horn sounds,
Local Programming Mode On, for instructions on how to and the digital display clears. Press the reset menu key
change the information. See Figure 2-11 for an before pressing the lamp test key.
illustration of the digital display and keypad.
Menu Down  Key. The controller displays consist of
menus with various data levels or programming steps.
Use the menu down  key to navigate through the menu
levels.

Note: Pressing the menu down  key in some menus


locks the user into that level structure of the menu
where the display will not change. Press the reset
menu key to access other main menus.

Menu Right  Key. Press the menu right  key to


-- + scroll through sub-levels of each main menu. The
display contains an arrow in the right-hand corner when
there is a sub-level. Pressing the menu right  key
when no arrow is present moves to the next submenu
header. Press the menu right  key prior to entering
decimal values when required.

Note: Pressing the menu right  key in some menus


TP-5829-2
locks the user into that level structure of the menu
Figure 2-11 Digital Display and Keypad where the display will not change. Press the reset
menu key to access other main menus.
Note: After energizing the controller by reconnecting
the battery, set the controller time and date. See Numeric 0--9 Keys. Press the numeric keys when
Section 2.8.6, Local Programming Mode On, selecting menus or entering numeric values during
Menu 6—Time and Date. programming. The controller ignores the secondary
function of the key (yes, no, etc.) when only numeric
Pressing any key on the keypad activates the controller values are valid.
panel display. The panel lamps and display turn off
5 minutes after the last keypad entry. Reset Menu Key. The reset menu key exits a menu,
clears incorrect entries, and cancels the auto-scroll
2.5.1 Keypad Operation function. Press the reset menu key to exit a menu or any
layer within that menu.
Use the keypad to enter information into the controller.
Some of the keys have two functions. The following Stop Prog Run Key. Press the stop prog run key to end
gives keypad definitions and functions. the generator set programmed exercise run created in
Menu 4—Operational Records. The generator set
Alarm (Horn) Off Key. Press the alarm off key to
shuts down after the time delay for engine cooldown
silence the horn at the user’s discretion. Press the
expires. The stop prog run key does not affect the
master switch AUTO button before pressing the alarm
programmed transfer switch exercise function.
silence button. The alarm horn cannot be silenced
unless the master switch AUTO button is pressed. See Yes/No Keys. When the controller displays a question
Section 2.3.7, Controller Reset Procedure, for more during programming requiring a nonnumeric answer (yes
information on turning the alarm horn off. or no), the controller accepts the secondary key function
and ignores the numeric value of the key. Press the
AM/PM Key. When the controller displays a question
ENTER key to confirm the response.
during programming requiring a nonnumeric answer (am
or pm), the controller accepts the secondary key function +/-- (6 and 4) Keys. Press the keys to provide data
and ignores the alarm off function of the key. entries when programming and raise/lower functions for
voltage and speed when manually synchronizing.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 47


2.5.2 Auto-Scroll Function Error Messages
The auto-scroll function continuously shows voltage When an error message appears, the entered
and current data from Menu 1—Generator Monitoring, information is not within the allowable parameters set by
V & A Summary without the need to press the down the control firmware or is not permitted as described
arrow for each display. below. In cases where the data was outside the
parameters, press the Reset Menu key and enter the
For auto-scroll function press ENTER at the V & A corrected information.
Summary menu. Press the Reset Menu key or Menu
Right  key to stop the auto-scroll function. Access Denied appears when the user attempts to:

D Enter data prohibited by the master switch position,


2.5.3 Request and Error Messages D Enter data prohibited by the generator set state, or
Note: When EEPROM errors occur or initializing the D Enable the LDD (load disturbance detection).
EEPROM is required, contact an authorized
distributor/dealer. Access Denied Idle Mode Active appears when the
user attempts to modify the voltage regulator setup
while the idle mode is active.
Request and Status Messages
Alarm Active appears when the user attempts to modify
Display messages require the user to enter additional
an analog or a digital input that is active. See Menu
data, confirm the previous entry or require time to
9—Input Setup.
process as described below.
Cannot Change Preset appears when the user
Entry Accepted appears for several seconds after
attempts to change the factory preset analog input,
pressing the Enter key during the programming mode.
digital input, or input parameter.
The display then shows the new data.
EEPROM Write Error appears when a component
Initialize EEPROM? Prompt to confirm EEPROM
failure occurs. Contact an authorized distributor/dealer.
initialization.
Entry Unacceptable appears when the user attempts
Reset Complete indicates the user has successfully:
an invalid input to the voltage regulator setup.
D Reset the maintenance records,
D Restored the AC analog inputs to the default settings, Some alternators are intended to operate within a
or specific, limited range of conditions (voltage, frequency,
and phase or connection). The following error messages
D Restored voltage regulator settings to the defaults.
can appear when attempts are made to enter system
Right Arrow  directs the user to the next menu. The values that do not match acceptable conditions for the
menus loop; press the right arrow key to move to the particular alternator.
next menu.
D Fixed Frequency when entry is beyond the range of
Setup Complete indicates the completion of the analog limited entries for the respective alternator. Occurs
input setup. when the alternator is not rated for the value entered.
Updated parameter files may be available by
Setup Locked appears when user attempts to change a contacting an authorized service dealer/distributor.
value or perform a function available only when the
system is unlocked. D Fixed Phase when entry is beyond the range of
limited entries for the respective alternator. Occurs
Setup Unlocked appears when user has unlocked the when the alternator is not rated for the value entered.
system for maintenance or troubleshooting. Updated parameter files may be available by
contacting an authorized service dealer/distributor.
(Question) ? asked by the control firmware; answer the
question by pressing the yes/no, numeric digit, or D Fixed Voltage when entry is beyond the range of
am/pm key. limited entries for the respective alternator. Occurs
when the alternator is not rated for the value entered.
Wait for System Reset (6 Sec) appears while the Updated parameter files may be available by
EEPROM initializes. contacting an authorized service dealer/distributor.

48 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


Func (Function) Used by (RDO) XX Reassign? Remove Load appears when trying to calibrate the
appears when the user attempts to assign an RDO to a voltage regulator in menu 12 with load connection. The
function already assigned. voltage regulation calibration must be performed during
a no load condition.
Internal Error appears when controller logic detects a
functional sequence error. Setpoint Values Cannot be Equal appears when the
user attempts to enter the same value for both setpoints
Invalid Code appears when the user attempts to enter: during the analog input calibration.
D An invalid access code for programming mode setup,
or 2.6 Monitoring and Programming
D An invalid access code for setup unlock.
Setup
Invalid Menu ID appears when the user attempts to
The user can access the controller data with the
enter a menu number that is unavailable or non-
controller keypad and display or a personal computer
functional.
(PC) with optional software to monitor and/or program.
N/A appears when data to be displayed is not available. Access the controller system with a PC using local
(direct) or remote (modem) systems. Refer to the
No Input Assigned appears when the user attempts to Introduction, List of Related Materials for related
assign any of the following system faults to an RDO software literature. See Menu 13—Communications.
where the digital input is not defined. See digital input
scale requirements in Menu 12—Calibration. The user can access the controller data while in the
programming mode off or programming mode on. See
D Battery charger fault Menu 14—Programming Mode.
D Ground fault
D High oil temperature shutdown While this manual focuses on data access and
programming through the controller keypad and display,
D Low coolant level
some data entries require input using a PC for initial
D Low fuel setup. The PC entries typically include alpha characters
such as digital input descriptions. The individual menus
Not in Local Program Mode appears when the user in Section 2.8, Local Programming Mode On, indicate
attempts to program using the keypad when the where data requires entry using a PC.
programming mode is set for remote or off.
There are six basic configurations for data monitoring
Not User-Selectable appears when the user attempts and programming using access source options. See
to change an analog or digital input that is factory- Figure 2-15.
reserved. Items identified as not user-selectable are
included for specific applications. The user cannot Other combinations of data monitoring and
disable an analog or digital input when identified as not programming are possible but require programming
user-selectable. See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for from a single location. Figure 2-15, Monitoring and
factory-reserved digital and analog inputs that are not Programming Configurations, briefly describes the
user-selectable. settings of Menu 13—Communications and Menu 14—
Programming Mode based on user-selected operating
Output in Use appears when the user attempts to mode.
modify or reassign an active RDO.
Use the keypad and digital display to setup the access
Port in Use appears when the user attempts to use an configurations the first time. Go to Section 2.8, Local
already assigned communications port. Programming Mode On, and set the desired
selection in Menu 13—Communication and Menu 14—
Range Error appears when the user attempts to enter:
Programming Mode before accessing data.
D A numeric input that is not within the acceptable
range of the system settings, time delays, addresses,
etc.
D An invalid analog or digital input number.
D An invalid date/time.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 49


2.6.1 PC Communications Local Area Network (LAN)
There are four ways to communicate between a PC and A PC connects to the device’s LAN. A LAN is a system
the generator set and/or transfer switch devices using that connects more than one device to a single PC. See
Modbusr communication protocol. The PC Figure 2-14. Acceptable devices include:
connections require optional software and possibly D Decision-Makerr 6000 controller
other hardware, communication modules in the
D Decision-Makerr 550 controller
generator set controller and/or transfer switch. See the
D MPACt 1000 transfer switch control
monitor software operation manual for details. Contact
your authorized distributor/dealer for availability. D MPACt 1500 transfer switch control

Local Single Connection Generator Set


Controller,
A PC connects to the COM port of the controller module Transfer Switch
Control, or
using an RS-232 cable when the PC is within 15 m Power Monitor
(50 ft.) of the device or an RS-485 cable when the PC is
Generator Set
within 1220 m (4000 ft.) of the device. See Figure 2-12 Controller,
or Figure 2-13. Transfer Switch
Control, or
RS-232 to RS-485 Power Monitor
Port Converter
Generator Set
RS-485 Controller,
up to Transfer Switch
Generator Set Personal Control, or
1220 m
Controller, Computer Power Monitor
(4000 ft.)
Transfer Switch
Control, or Generator Set
Power Monitor Controller,
RS-232 Transfer Switch
Personal up to Control, or
Computer 15 m (50 ft.) Power Monitor

Figure 2-12 Local Single Connection, Figure 2-14 Local Area Network
up to 15 m (50 ft.)
The controller can be used as an RS-232 to RS-485 port
converter in a LAN network if the controller is located
within 15 m (50 ft.) of the PC. This configuration is the
Local LAN Conv option.
Generator Set
Controller,
RS-232 to RS-485
Transfer Switch
Port Converter
Control, or
RS-485 Power Monitor
up to
Personal 1220 m
Computer (4000 ft.)

Figure 2-13 Local Single Connection, up to


1220 m (4000 ft.)

User Operating Mode Selection Menu 13—Communications Settings Menu 14—Programming Mode
User On Local Remote Single Programming Local Programming Remote
Activity Access Source Line? LAN? or LAN? Mode Off? Mode? Programming Mode?
Controller No No No Yes No No
Monitor
Direct PC Yes Yes No Yes No No
only
PC via Internet Yes No Yes Yes No No
Controller No No No No Yes No
Monitor
and Direct PC Yes Yes No No No Yes
Program PC via Internet Yes No Yes No No Yes

Figure 2-15 Monitoring and Programming Configurations

Modbusr is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

50 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


Remote Single Connection
A modem connects a PC to a single device. The PC Modbusr/
Ether-
communicates with the device via telephone line or an Ethernet
net Converter
ethernet network. See Figure 2-16. Personal
Computer Net-
OR
with NIC work
Remote RS-232 to
Network RS-485 Port
(Modem) Converter
Modbusr/
Ether- Ethernet
RS-485 up to
net Converter
Generator Set
Personal
Computer
Telephone
lines 1220 m (4000 ft.)
Personal
Computer OR Net- Controller or
Transfer
with NIC work Switch Control
Remote Generator Set Generator Set Generator Set Generator Set
Network Controller or Controller or Controller or Controller or
(Modem) Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
Switch Control Switch Control Switch Control Switch Control

Personal Telephone RS-232 up to 15 m (50 ft.)


Computer lines
Figure 2-17 Remote Area Network

Ether-
Modbusr/
Ethernet
2.6.2 Modbusr Communications
net Converter
Personal
Net-
Generator Set
Controller or
The controller communicates using Modbusr as a slave
Computer OR
with NIC work Transfer connection with the Modbusr master initiating the
Switch Control
Remote RS-232 to communication. The controller seeks the system and
Network
(Modem)
RS-485 Port
Converter
alternator parameters and diagnostic information then
responds back to the Modbusr master. In addition, the
Personal Telephone RS-485 up to 1220 m (4000 ft.)
controller accepts information to alter controller
Computer lines parameters including generator set starting and
stopping. See Figure 2-18. Refer to the List of Related
Figure 2-16 Remote Single Connections
Materials for available Modbusr literature.

Note: Only one Modbusr master can be connected to


Remote Area Network the controller. Examples include the remote
A PC connects to a modem. The devices connect to a serial annunciator, Monitor III, and switchgear
LAN network. The PC communicates to the devices via applications.
telephone line or an ethernet network that is interfaced
to the LAN network. See Figure 2-17.
RS-485
up to 1220 m (4000 ft.)
Acceptable devices include:
Generator Set
D Decision-Makerr 6000 controller Controller
Modbusr Master
D Decision-Makerr 550 controller RS-232
D MPACt 1000 transfer switch control up to 15 m (50 ft.)
D MPACt 1500 transfer switch control
The controller can be used as an RS-232 to RS-485 port Figure 2-18 Modbusr Connections
converter in a LAN network if the controller is located
within 15 m (50 ft.) of the device modem. This
configuration is the Remote LAN Conv option.

Modbusr is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 51


2.7 Reviewing Menu Displays See Section 2.5.3, Request and Error Messages, for
error display messages and explanations while
Use this section to review a summary of the generator navigating the menus.
set controller data. See Figure 2-19 for which menus
provide data monitoring and adjusting data. Legend:
Menu Down Key
Press the Reset key, enter the desired menu number
key(s), and then press the Enter key. Use the down Menu Right Key
arrow and right arrow keys for navigation.
Menu View Only View and
See Section 1, Specifications and Features, to review Number Menu Name Data Adjust Data
set point ranges and default settings for comparison to
1 Generator Monitoring X
the actual setup.
2 Engine Monitoring X
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the
3 Analog Monitoring X
display. See Menu 14—Programming Mode and
Section 2.8, Local Programming Mode On, for more 4 Operational Records X
information.
5 Event History X
Note: Press any key on the keypad to activate the 6 Time and Date X
controller panel display. The panel display turns
off 5 minutes after the last keypad entry. 7 Generator System X

8 Time Delays X
Note: Press the Reset Menu key to clear error
messages. 9 Input Setup X

10 Output Setup X
Note: Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering
decimal values where necessary. 11 Voltage Regulator X

Note: Entering 99.99 where applicable, designates 12 Calibration X


infinite delay and no shutdown. This value 13 Communications X
effectively disables a fault shutdown.
14 Programming Mode X
Menus displaying the # symbol represent one of the 15 Protective Relays X
following data types:
16 Paralleling Menu X
D System-calculated data
17 Load Share Control X
D System-measured data
18 Battery Chargers X
D User-entered data
20 Factory Setup X
Menus displaying the ? symbol require the user to enter
data. Figure 2-19 Menu Displays for Viewing and Adjusting

Menus displaying the * symbol represent access code or


password type entries. The actual key entry does not
display.

52 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.1 Menu 1—Generator Monitoring Note: For the auto-scroll function, press ENTER at V &
A Summary menu. Press the Reset Menu key or
Menu 1 displays generator output data including Menu Right  key to stop the auto-scroll function.
line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltages, current,
frequency, power factor, total kilowatts, percent of Note: Pressing a right arrow key from any submenu
maximum kW, total kVA, and total kVAR. Menu 1 moves to the next submenu header.
displays three-phase voltage and current readings
when applicable.

All menu displays apply to both single-phase and three-


phase voltages unless otherwise noted as (1 PH) or
(3 PH) on the menu overview. The phase designation
does not appear in the controller menu displays.

Menu 1 Overview (Three-Phase Connections)


MENU 1
GENERATOR MONITORING

VOLTS & AMPS  V & A SUMMARY  POWER KW  POWER KVAR  POWER KVA 

L1-L2 VOLTS # V L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 TOTAL KW # TOTAL KVAR # TOTAL KVA #
L1 AMPS # # # # PF # LEADING/LAGGING ABSORBING/GENERATING

L2-L3 VOLTS # V L1-L0 L2-L0 L3-L0 L1 KW # L1 KVAR # L1 KVA #


L2 AMPS # # # # PF # LEADING/LAGGING ABSORBING/GENERATING

L3-L1 VOLTS # A L1 L2 L3 L2 KW # L2 KVAR # L2 KVA #


L3 AMPS # # # # PF # LEADING/LAGGING ABSORBING/GENERATING

L1-L0 VOLTS # For the auto-scroll function, L3 KW (3 PH) # L3 KVAR (3 PH) # L3 KVA #
L1 AMPS # press ENTER at PF # LEADING/LAGGING ABSORBING/GENERATING
V & A SUMMARY menu.

L2-L0 VOLTS # TOTAL KW #


L2 AMPS # Use the MENU  % OF RATED KW #
key to
stop the auto-scroll function.
L3-L0 VOLTS #
L3 AMPS #

FREQUENCY # HZ

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 53


Menu 1—Generator Monitoring, continued
Menu 1 Overview (Single-Phase Connections)
MENU 1
GENERATOR MONITORING

VOLTS & AMPS  V & A SUMMARY  POWER KW  POWER KVAR  POWER KVA 

L1-L2 VOLTS # V L1-L2 L1-L0 L2-L0 TOTAL KW # TOTAL KVAR # TOTAL KVA #
L1 AMPS # # # # PF # LEADING/LAGGING ABSORBING/GENERATING

L1-L2 VOLTS # A L1 L2 L1 KW # L1 KVAR # L1 KVA #


L2 AMPS # # # PF # LEADING/LAGGING ABSORBING/GENERATING

L1-L0 VOLTS # For the auto-scroll function, L2 KW # L2 KVAR # L2 KVA #


L1 AMPS # press ENTER at PF # LEADING/LAGGING ABSORBING/GENERATING
V & A SUMMARY menu.

L2-L0 VOLTS # TOTAL KW #


L2 AMPS # Use the MENU  % OF RATED KW #
key to
stop the auto-scroll function.
FREQUENCY # HZ

54 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.2 Menu 2—Engine Monitoring
Menu 2 displays engine operating data including oil
pressure and temperature, coolant pressure and
temperature, fuel pressure and temperature, engine
rpm, and battery voltage. Menu 2 also displays engine
warning and shutdown setpoints and engine
warmed-up and cooled-down temperature setpoints.
The detailed engine monitoring functions appear only
for DDEC/JDEC/EMS2/EDC3-equipped engine and
MDEC/ADEC-equipped engine versions.

Note: A right arrow from any submenu moves to the


next submenu header.

Menu 2 Overview
MENU 2
ENGINE MONITORING

ENGINE MONITORING  ENGINE MONITORING 


(DDEC/JDEC/EMS2/EDC3-
BASIC DETAILED Equipped Engines only)

OIL PRESSURE # PSI ENGINE FUEL  ENGINE COOLANT  ENGINE OIL  ENGINE MISC 
COOLANT TEMP #F

ENGINE RPM # FUEL PRES # PSI COOLANT PRES # PSI OIL PRES # PSI ECM BATT VDC #
LOCAL BATT VDC # FUEL TEMP #F COOLANT TEMP #F OIL TEMP #F AMBIENT TEMP #F

HCT WARNING #F CHR AIR PRES # PSI COOLANT LEVEL #% OIL LEVEL #% ENGINE MODEL NO.
HCT SHUTDOWN #F CHR AIR TEMP #F CRANKCASE PRES # PSI #

LOP WARNING # PSI FUEL RATE # GPH ENGINE SERIAL NO.


LOP SHUTDOWN # PSI
#

ENGINE WARMED UP USED LAST RUN


#F UNIT NO. #
# GAL
ECM S/N #

ENGINE COOLED DOWN


ECM FAULT CODES
#F
#

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 55


Menu 2 Overview
MENU 2
ENGINE MONITORING
(MDEC/ADEC-Equipped Engines only)
ENGINE MONITORING  ENGINE MONITORING 
BASIC DETAILED

OIL PRESSURE # PSI ENGINE FUEL  ENGINE OIL  ENGINE MISC 


COOLANT TEMP #F

INTAKE AIR (not used) #F FUEL PRES # PSI OIL PRES # PSI ECU SUPPLY VDC #
OIL TEMP (not used) #F FUEL TEMP #F OIL TEMP #F AMBIENT TEMP #F

ENGINE RPM # CHG AIR PRES # PSI ECU HOURS #


LOCAL BATT VDC # CHG AIR TEMP #F

HCT WARNING #F FUEL RATE * # GPH ECU FAULTS CODES #


HCT SHUTDOWN #F

LOP WARNING # PSI DAILY FUEL USED * # GAL


LOP SHUTDOWN # PSI

ENGINE WARMED UP TOTAL FUEL USED * # GAL


#F

ENGINE COOLED DOWN


#F

* While these menu displays do appear on the controller, the engine ECM is not currently set up to provide this data.

56 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.3 Menu 3—Analog Monitoring Note: If the analog display shows O/R (out of range), no
input is connected or the input voltage is beyond
Menu 3 displays battery voltage and up to 7 user- the acceptable operating range (0--5 VDC).
defined analog items dependent upon the generator
system. Note: See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for factory
reserved inputs which are not user selectable.
The User Defined Desc display refers to a description
entered into the controller using the PC software. This
description remains as the display for future review until
changed by the PC software user. The display has
20 characters maximum.

The default description is Analog Auxiliary In.

Menu 3 Overview (ECM Engines)


MENU 3 Menu 3 Overview (Non-ECM Engines)
ANALOG MONITORING
MENU 3
ANALOG MONITORING

LOCAL BATT VDC #


LOCAL BATT VDC #

ANALOG 01 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)
ANALOG 03 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 02 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)
ANALOG 04 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 03 #
(USER DEFINED DESC) ANALOG 05 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 04 #
(USER DEFINED DESC) ANALOG 06 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 05 #
(USER DEFINED DESC) ANALOG 07 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 06 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 07 #
(USER DEFINED DESC)

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 57


2.7.4 Menu 4—Operational Records After performing maintenance, enter YES to reset
records reflecting the current day. The user must enable
Menu 4 displays the generator set’s operating record the programming mode to edit the display.
including operating start date, last logged maintenance,
total run time loaded and unloaded, run time since last See Section 2.8.4 to make changes in this menu.
maintenance, number of starts, and number of days the
unit ran.

Menu 4 Overview
MENU 4
OPERATIONAL RECORDS

FACTORY TEST DATE


##-###-##

TOTAL RUN TIME


HRS #

TOTAL RUN TIME


LOADED HRS #

TOTAL RUN TIME


UNLOADED HRS #

TOTAL RUN TIME


KW HRS #

NO. OF STARTS #

ENGINE START? Y/N RUN TIME HR:MN 


COUNTDOWN ##:## ??:??

RECORDS - MAINT  MAINT REMINDER  RESET RECORDS? (Y/N)


HRS #

RUN TIME SINCE MAINT


TOTAL HRS #

RUN TIME SINCE MAINT


LOADED HRS #

RUN TIME SINCE MAINT


UNLOADED HRS # NO. OF STARTS #
LAST MAINT ##-###-##

RUN TIME SINCE MAINT LAST START ##:## AM/PM


KW HRS # DATE ##-###-##

OPERATING DAYS # LENGTH OF RUN


LAST MAINT ##-###-## (UN)LOADED HRS #

58 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.5 Menu 5—Event History 2.7.7 Menu 7—Generator System
Menu 5 stores and displays the times and dates of up to Menu 7 shows the generator set system data including
100 stored status, warning, and shutdown events. After voltage, frequency, phase connection, battery voltage,
the first 100 events, each additional new event replaces etc. Use the values entered in this menu to determine
the oldest event. See Menu 10—Output Setup for a list shutdown values and time delays.
of possible events.
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the
display.
Menu 5 Overview
See Section 2.8.7 to change system information in this
MENU 5 menu.
EVENT HISTORY

Note: Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering


(MESSAGE TEXT) decimal values where necessary.
##-###-## ##:## AM/PM
Note: The user defines the data shown in Menu 7. It is
NOT data measured by the controller and
SCROLL THROUGH 100 (max.) associated sensing devices. The user defines
STORED EVENTS
these values for purposes of calibrating the
control.

Note: Some alternators are designed to operate at


2.7.6 Menu 6—Time and Date limited voltage, frequency, or phase connections.
Menu 6 shows the internal clock time and calendar date. Settings outside of these parameters may cause
The controller uses the set clock time to determine a range error message.
exercise run time and event records. The time and date
Items marked * apply only to DD/MTU engines using
are valid as long as the controller power (starting
MDEC/ADEC.
battery) remains connected.
Note: Menus include variable speed governor (VSG)
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the
and digital speed control (DSC).
display.

See Section 2.8.6 to change the time and/or date.

Menu 6 Overview
MENU 6
TIME AND DATE

DAY OF WEEK ##-###-##


##:##AM/PM

TIME ??:?? AM/PM

DATE ??-???-??

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 59


Menu 7 Overview
MENU 7
GENERATOR SYSTEM

OPERATING MODE  OPERATING MODE 


STANDBY Y/N PRIME POWER Y/N

SYSTEM VOLTAGE
LINE-LINE ?

SYSTEM FREQ # HZ

PHASE  PHASE  PHASE 


3 PHASE DELTA Y/N 3 PHASE WYE N/Y SINGLE PHASE N/Y

KW RATING ?

RATED CURRENT #

LOAD SHED OUTPUT  TIME DELAY MIN:SEC 


?% # KW ??:??

OVERVOLTAGE  TIME DELAY MIN:SEC 


?% # VAC ??:??

UNDERVOLTAGE  TIME DELAY MIN:SEC 


?% # VAC ??:??

OVERFREQUENCY
?% # HZ

UNDERFREQUENCY
?% # HZ

OVERSPEED
? HZ # RPM

BATTERY VOLTAGE  BATTERY VOLTAGE 


12 VDC Y/N 24 VDC Y/N BLOCK HEATER OFF * #F

LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE


?.? VDC ENABLE VSG * Y/N

HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE


?.? VDC ENABLE DSC * Y/N

BLOCK HEATER ON * #F METRIC UNITS Y/N

SET NFPA 110 Y/N


*DD/MTU engine with MDEC/ADEC only DEFAULTS

60 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.8 Menu 8—Time Delays If the Cooldown Temperature Override is not enabled,
the unit will cease to run when the engine temperature
Menu 8 displays the cyclic cranking cycles, various falls below the ENGINE COOLED DOWN temperature
engine related starting and shutdown features, and (shown in Menu 2).
auxiliary shutdown and inhibit time delays.
Engine cooldown and this cooldown temperature
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the override feature apply to remote shutdown when the
display. master switch is in the AUTO position. No cooldown will
occur when the master switch is moved to the OFF
See Section 2.8.8 to change settings in this menu. position.
Cooldown Temperature Override. This feature allows
the user to bypass (override) the temperature-based
cooldown. When this feature is enabled, the engine will
run in cooldown mode for the entire time defined as
TIME DELAY ENG COOLDOWN, regardless of engine
temperature.

Menu 8 Overview
MENU 8
TIME DELAYS

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


ENGINE START ??:??

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


STARTING AID ??:??

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


CRANK ON ??:??

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


CRANK PAUSE ??:??

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


ENG COOLDOWN ??:??

COOLDOWN TEMPERATURE
OVERRIDE Y/N

OVERCRANK SHUTDOWN
CRANK CYCLES ?

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


OVERVOLTAGE ??:??

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


UNDERVOLTAGE ??:??

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


LOAD SHED KW ??:??

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 61


2.7.9 Menu 9—Input Setup Battle Switch/Fault Shutdown Override Switch. The
battle switch function forces the system to ignore normal
Menu 9 displays the setup of user-defined digital and fault shutdowns such as low oil pressure and high
analog warning and shutdown inputs. These inputs engine temperature. The battle switch does not
provide a multitude of choices for configuring override the emergency stop and overspeed shutdown.
customized auxiliary inputs. When the battle switch function is enabled the generator
set continues to run regardless of shutdown signals
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the where potential engine/generator damage can occur.
display.
When this input is enabled the yellow warning lamp
See Section 2.8.9 to change settings in this menu. illuminates and stored warning/shutdown events that
are ignored continue to log in Menu 5— Event History.
Note: Press the down arrow to move to the start of the
next input setup. Shutdown Type A and Shutdown Type B. Choose
shutdown type A for standard shutdown where red
Note: See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for factory
lamp illuminates and alarm horn sounds. Choose
reserved inputs which are not user selectable.
shutdown type B for shutdown where air damper
D Enabled. The controller will ignore the input until the indicator RDO-23 energizes for two seconds, red lamp
inhibit time expires. If the inhibit time is set to zero, the illuminates, and alarm horn sounds.
input is monitored at all times, even when the
Analog Input A07—Analog Voltage Adjust. Analog
generator is not running. Analog inputs have
voltage adjust is a feature that the user may choose to
separate warning and shutdown enabled choices.
enable. The input designated for use as Analog Voltage
D Inhibit Time Delay. The inhibit time delay is the time Adjust is analog input A07.
period following crank disconnect during which the
Enable Analog Voltage Adjust through Menu 11.
generator set stabilizes and the controller does not
Additionally, Monitor 2 or Monitor 3 may be used to
detect the fault or status event. This menu indicates
enable Analog Voltage Adjust by entering the proper
whether or not the input is enabled. If the input is not
description (Analog Volt Adjust) for A07. When Analog
enabled, the controller will ignore this input signal.
Voltage Adjust is enabled, the description for A07 is
The inhibit time delay range is from 0 to 60 seconds.
Analog Volt Adjust. Changing the description using
D Time Delay (shutdown or warning). The time delay Monitor 2 or Monitor 3 disables the analog voltage
follows the inhibit time delay. The time delay is the adjust feature.
time period between when the controller first detects
When Analog Voltage Adjust is enabled, no warning or
the fault or status event and the controller warning or
shutdown may be enabled for A07.
shutdown lamp illuminates. The delay prevents any
nuisance alarms. The time delay range is from 0 to Note: If the analog input A07 description does not
60 seconds. match Analog Volt Adjust, input A07 will not
function as the voltage adjust.
Additional Analog Input Entries. The analog input
selection typically requires entering four values—low Identification and Descriptions. Descriptions for user
warning, high warning, low shutdown, and high inputs (auxiliary analog or auxiliary digital) may be
shutdown. entered using the Monitor II software accessory where
the user determines the descriptions in upper and lower
case.

62 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 9 Overview
MENU 9
INPUT SETUP

SETUP DIGITAL  TO ANALOG INPUT


AUXILIARY INPUTS SETUP (NEXT)

DIGITAL INPUT 01  DIGITAL INPUT 01  DIGITAL INPUT 01  DIGITAL INPUT 01  DIGITAL INPUT 01 
(USER DEFINED DESC) (see Group A) YES/NO ENABLED YES/NO INHIBIT TIME ?:?? DELAY TIME ?:??

Press the down arrow to Group A—Digital Inputs Group A—Digital Inputs,
scroll through additional The preprogrammed continued
DIGITAL auxiliary inputs selections include the CLOSE COMMAND Y/N
1--21 or enter the input following list. See RAISE SPEED Y/N
number. Appendix E for application
and restrictions with LOWER SPEED Y/N
specific engines. SYNC AUTO Y/N
WARNING Y/N SYNC PERMISSIVE Y/N
SHUTDOWN TYPE A Y/N SYNC CHECK/TEST Y/N
SHUTDOWN TYPE B Y/N SYNC RESET Y/N
VOLTAGE RAISE Y/N FIRST ON ENABLE Y/N
VOLTAGE LOWER Y/N FIRST ON RESET Y/N
VAR/PF MODE Y/N LOAD ENABLE Y/N
REMOTE SHUTDOWN Y/N KW BASELOAD CTL ENBL Y/
REMOTE RESET Y/N N
AIR DAMPER Y/N LOAD RAMP HOLD ENABL Y/N
FIELD OVER VOLTS Y/N FREQ TRIM DISABLE Y/N
IDLE MODE ACTIVE Y/N VOLTS TRIM DISABLE Y/N
BATTLE SWITCH Y/N REACT DROOP ENABLE Y/N
GROUND FAULT Y/N KW SYSTEM CTL ENABLE Y/N
HIGH OIL TEMP Y/N VAR/PF SYSTEM CTL EN Y/N
LOW COOLANT LEVEL Y/N EXT KW ADJ ENABLE Y/N
ENABLE SYNCH Y/N EXT VAR/PF ADJ ENABL Y/N
LOW FUEL SHUTDWN Y/N VAR/PF MODE CTL ENBL Y/N
UTILITY CB AUX Y/N KVAR CONTROL ENABLE Y/N
OPEN COMMAND Y/N PF CONTROL ENABLE Y/N
CB COMM FLT RESET Y/N
CB OVER CRNT TRIP Y/N
SETUP ANALOG  TO DIGITAL INPUT
AUXILIARY INPUTS SETUP (PREVIOUS)

ANALOG INPUT XX  ANALOG INPUT XX  ANALOG INPUT XX  ANALOG INPUT XX 


(USER DEFINED DESC) WARNING ENABLED Y/N SHUTDOWN ENABLED Y/N INHIBIT TIME ?:??

ANALOG INPUT XX  ANALOG INPUT XX  ANALOG INPUT XX  ANALOG INPUT XX 


WARN DELAY TIME ?:?? SDWN DELAY TIME ?:?? LO SDWN VALUE ?? LO WARN VALUE ??

ANALOG INPUT XX  ANALOG INPUT XX 


HI WARN VALUE ?? HI SDWN VALUE ??

Note: For ECM engines, auxiliary analog inputs


A01--A07 will appear.

Note: For non-ECM engines, auxiliary analog inputs


A03--A07 will appear.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 63


2.7.10 Menu 10—Output Setup The user can select up to 21 user-defined digital status
events and faults designated as D01 to D21. Each of the
Menu 10 displays the setup of user-defined system, 21 status events and faults are assignable as
digital and analog status, and fault outputs and relay shutdowns or warnings.
driver outputs (RDO) 1--31. These RDO outputs provide
multiple choices for configuring customized auxiliary The user can select up to 7 user-defined analog status
outputs. Additional individual outputs are available for events and faults designated as A01 to A07. Each of the
monitoring, diagnostics, and control functions. 7 status events and faults are assignable as shutdowns
or warnings with high or low settings for a total of up to
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the 7 status events and fault functions.
display. See Section 2.8.10 to change this menu.
Relay Driver Outputs (RDOs)
Note: Some data require entry using a PC in the
Remote Programming mode. See the Monitor Up to 31 RDOs are available using the system, digital,
Software operation manual for details. and analog status events and faults. RDOs provide only
the driver. The contact relays that interface with other
Note: See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for factory equipment are optional. See Group F for the available
reserved inputs which are not user selectable. RDO selection items. See Group E for the factory
default RDOs.
Common Faults
Note: Func(tion) Used By (RDO) XX Reassign? error
The user can program a single fault comprised of status message appears when the user attempts to
and fault events from 3 common fault programs— duplicate an existing RDO selection.
system, digital, and analog faults.
Note: Cannot Change NFPA is Enabled. error
Up to 60 user-defined system status events and faults message appears when the user attempts to
are available. See Group B on the following pages for modify RDO setting defaulted as NFPA 110
specific descriptions. The NFPA 110 faults are part of requirement.
the system fault program and are comprised of
15 individual faults shown on the next page.

Menu 10 Overview
MENU 10
OUTPUT SETUP

DEFINE COMMON  SYSTEM EVENTS  DIGITAL INPUTS  ANALOG INPUTS 


FAULTS

COMMON FAULT Y/N COMMON FAULT Y/N COMMON FAULT Y/N COMMON FAULT Y/N
(see Group B) (see Group C) (see Group D)LO WARNING HI WARNING

Press down arrow to scroll Press down arrow to scroll Press down arrow to scroll
through available faults. through digital auxiliary through analog auxiliary
inputs. inputs.

COMMON FAULT Y/N COMMON FAULT Y/N


LO SHUTDOWN HI SHUTDOWN

RELAY DRV OUT XX  SYSTEM EVENTS  DIGITAL INPUTS  ANALOG INPUTS 


(see Group E, RDO
defaults)
Press down arrow to scroll
through RDO’s 1--31 or RELAY DRV OUT XX Y/N RELAY DRV OUT XX Y/N RELAY DRV OUT XX Y/N RELAY DRV OUT Y/N
enter RDO number. (see Group F, RDO list) (see Group C) (see Group D)LO WARNING HI WARNING

Press down arrow to scroll Press down arrow to scroll Press down arrow to scroll
through available RDO through RDO digital auxiliary through RDO analog
faults. inputs. auxiliary inputs.

RELAY DRV OUT Y/N RELAY DRV OUT Y/N


LO SHUTDOWN HI SHUTDOWN

64 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 10 Overview, continued
Group B—System Events Group B—System Events, continued Group D—Analog Inputs
For defined system events, choose SD REVERSE POWER Up to 7 analog inputs, user- defined status
from the following status events and SD OVER POWER events and faults designated as A01 to A07.
faults by changing selection to YES. Each of the 7 is assignable as a shutdown or
See Appendix E for application and SD LOSS OF FIELD warning with high or low settings.
restrictions with specific engines. SD OVERCURRENT VR
Group E—RDO Factory Defaults
EMERGENCY STOP (RDO-02) IN SYNCH (RDO-27)
Up to 31 status event and fault RDOs are
OVERSPEED BREAKER TRIP (RDO-31) available. The following list is the factory
OVERCRANK HI OIL TEMP WARNING defaults:
HI COOL TEMP SHUTDWN INTAKE AIR TEMP WARN SYSTEM READY (RDO-01)
(LOW) OIL PRESS SHUTDOWN INTAKE AIR TEMP SDWN EMERGENCY STOP (RDO-02)
REMOTE SHUTDOWN ECM YELLOW ALARM DEFINED COMMON FAULT (RDO-03)
LOW COOLANT TEMP (RDO-07) ECM RED ALARM DELAY ENG COOLDOWN (RDO-04)
(non-ECM engines) CB TRIP TO SD TIME DELAY LOW FUEL WARNING (RDO-05)
LOW FUEL WARNING (RDO-05) STARTER ’A’ FAILURE HI COOL TEMP WARNING (RDO-06)
HI COOL TEMP WARNING (RDO-06) STARTER ’B’ FAILURE LOW COOLANT TEMP (non-ECM engines)
OIL PRESS WARNING (RDO-09) (RDO-07)
*NFPA 110 FAULT
MASTER NOT IN AUTO (RDO-23) LOW COOLANT LEVEL (RDO-08)
The NFPA 110 Fault Alarms are
NFPA 110 FAULT (RDO-10)* user-defined and typically include the OIL PRESS WARNING (RDO-09)
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (RDO-11) following:: NFPA 110 FAULT (RDO-10)*
HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE OVERSPEED LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (RDO-11)
BATTERY CHARGER FAULT (RDO-12) OVERCRANK BATTERY CHARGER FAULT (RDO-12)
SYSTEM READY (RDO-01) HIGH COOLANT TEMP SHUTDOWN MAINTENANCE DUE (RDO-13)
LOSS OF ECM COMM OIL PRESSURE SHUTDOWN OVER CURRENT (RDO-14)
(ECM engines) LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE DELAY ENG START (RDO-15)
NO OIL PRESS SIGNAL HIGH COOLANT TEMP WARNING STARTING AID (RDO-16)
HIGH OIL TEMP SDWN OIL PRESSURE WARNING GROUND FAULT (RDO-17)
NO COOL TEMP SIGNAL LOW FUEL EPS SUPPLYING LOAD (RDO--18)
LOW COOLANT LEVEL (RDO-08) MASTER NOT IN AUTO ALTERNATOR PROTECTION SHUTDOWN
SPEED SENSOR FAULT BATTERY CHARGER FAULT (RDO-19)
LOCKED ROTOR LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE ENGINE DERATE ACTIVE (RDO-20)
MASTER SWITCH ERROR HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE CONTACTOR (RDO-21)
MASTER SWITCH OPEN LOW COOLANT LEVEL GENERATOR RUNNING (RDO-22)
MASTER SWITCH TO OFF EPS SUPPLYING LOAD MASTER NOT IN AUTO (RDO-23)
AC SENSING LOSS AIR DAMPER INDICATOR COMMON WARNING (RDO-24)
OVER VOLTAGE Group C—Digital Inputs COMMON LOAD SHED (RDO-25)
UNDER VOLTAGE Up to 21 user-defined digital status MISSING PGEN NODE (RDO-26)
events and fault inputs designated as IN SYNCH (RDO-27)
WEAK BATTERY
D01 to D21 can result in a digital input
OVER FREQUENCY common fault. The following list is the CB COMMON FAULT (RDO-28)
UNDER FREQUENCY factory defaults: COMMON PR OUTPUT (RDO-29)
LOAD SHED KW OVER BATTERY CHARGER FAULT (RDO-12) CLOSE BREAKER (RDO-30)
LOAD SHED UNDER FREQ LOW FUEL WARNING (RDO-05) BREAKER TRIP (RDO-31)
OVER CURRENT (RDO-14) LOW COOLANT TEMP (non-ECM
EPS SUPPLYING LOAD (RDO--18)
engines) (RDO-07) Note: The default event for RDO--21
INTERNAL FAULT
FIELD OVER VOLTS is Contactor. Prior to firmware
GEN CB AUX version 2.9.0, the default
DELAY ENG COOLDOWN (RDO-04)
VAR/PF MODE event for RDO--21 was Key
DELAY ENG START (RDO-15)
KW BASE LOAD MODE Switch Off.
STARTING AID (RDO-16)
SYS KW CONTROL ENABLE
GENERATOR RUNNING (RDO-22)
LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN
AIR DAMPER CONTROL
LOAD ENABLE
GROUND FAULT (RDO-17)
SYNC MODE AUTO
EEPROM WRITE FAILURE
SYNC PERMISSIVE
CRITICAL OVERVOLTAGE
SYNC CHECK/TEST
ALTERNATOR PROTECTION
SHUTDOWN (RDO-19) LOW COOLANT LEVEL (RDO-08)
AIR DAMPER INDICATOR REMOTE SHUTDOWN
REMOTE RESET
Note: (RDO-xx) represent factory VOLTAGE LOWER
Relay Driver Output defaults.
VOLTAGE RAISE
LOWER SPEED
RAISE SPEED
CB OVER CURRENT TRIP

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 65


Menu 10 Overview, continued
Group F—RDO Selection List NFPA 110 FAULT
For Relay Driver Output (RDO) The NFPA 110 Fault
selections, choose from the following Alarms are user-defined
119 status events and faults by and typically include the
changing selection to YES. following:
Up to 31 status event and fault RDOs OVERSPEED
are available. OVERCRANK
See Appendix E for application and HIGH COOLANT TEMP
restrictions with specific engines. SHUTDOWN
EMERGENCY STOP (RDO-02) OIL PRESSURE
OVER SPEED SHUTDOWN
OVER CRANK LOW COOLANT
HI COOL TEMP SHUTDWN TEMPERATURE
OIL PRESS SHUTDOWN HIGH COOLANT TEMP
WARNING
LOW COOLANT TEMP (non-ECM
engines) (RDO-07) OIL PRESSURE
WARNING
LOW FUEL WARNING (RDO-05)
LOW FUEL
HI COOL TEMP WARNING (RDO-06)
MASTER NOT IN AUTO
OIL PRESS WARNING (RDO-09)
BATTERY CHARGER
MASTER NOT IN AUTO (RDO-23) FAULT
NFPA 110 FAULT (RDO-10) LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (RDO-11) HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE
HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW COOLANT LEVEL
BATTERY CHARGER FAULT (RDO-12) EPS SUPPLYING LOAD
SYSTEM READY (RDO-01) AIR DAMPER INDICATOR
LOSS OF ECM COMM
(ECM engines)
NO OIL PRESS SIGNAL DEFINED COMMON
FAULT
HIGH OIL TEMP SHUTDOWN
The 6 defined common
NO COOL TEMP SIGNAL
faults include the
LOW COOLANT LEVEL (RDO-08) following:
SPEED SENSOR FAULT EMERGENCY STOP
LOCKED ROTOR HI COOL TEMP
MASTER SWITCH ERROR SHUTDOWN
MASTER SWITCH OPEN OIL PRESS SHUTDOWN
MASTER SWITCH TO OFF OVERCRANK
AC SENSING LOSS OVERSPEED
OVER VOLTAGE REMOTE SHUTDOWN
UNDER VOLTAGE
WEAK BATTERY
OVER FREQUENCY
UNDER FREQUENCY
LOAD SHED KW OVER
LOAD SHED UNDER FREQ
OVER CURRENT (RDO-14)
EPS SUPPLYING LOAD (RDO--18)
INTERNAL FAULT
DELAY ENG COOLDOWN (RDO-04)
DELAY ENG START (RDO-15)
STARTING AID (RDO-16)
GENERATOR RUNNING (RDO-22)
AIR DAMPER CONTROL
GROUND FAULT (RDO-17)
EEPROM WRITE FAILURE
CRITICAL OVERVOLTAGE
ALTERNATOR PROTECTION
SHUTDOWN (RDO-19)
AIR DAMPER INDICATOR
DEFINED COMMON FAULT (RDO-03)
SCRDOs 1--4 (software controlled
RDOs)

66 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 10 Overview, continued
Group F—RDO Selection List, continued Group F—RDO Selection List, continued COMMON WARNING (RDO-24)
CLOSE BREAKER (RDO-30) includes the following:
SD REVERSE POWER
EXTERNAL BREAKER TRIP LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SD OVER POWER
REMOTE SHUTDOWN LOW FUEL WARNING
SD LOSS OF FIELD
DUAL STARTER APPLICATION HIGH COOLANT TEMP SHUTDOWN
SD OVERCURRENT VR
STARTER ’A’ FAILURE OIL PRESSURE WARNING
COMMON PR OUTPUT (RDO-29)
STARTER ’B’ FAILURE MASTER SWITCH NOT IN AUTO
IN SYNCH (RDO-27)
DUAL STARTER ’B’ (RDO-23) LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
BREAKER TRIP (RDO-31)
CONTROLLER SETUP ERROR HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE
HI OIL TEMP WARNING
PHASE SELECTION ERROR BATTERY CHARGER FAULT
INTAKE AIR TEMP WARNING
VOLT SELECTION ERROR LOSS ECM COMMUNICATION
INTAKE AIR TEMP SHUTDOWN
FREQ SELECTION ERROR LOW COOLANT LEVEL
ECM YELLOW ALARM
KW SELECTION ERROR SPEED SENSOR FAULT
ECM RED ALARM
EEPROM INITIALIZED LOSS AC SENSING
MSG MDEC BLOCK HEATER
CONTROL (MDEC only) DATE CHANGED FROM WEAK BATTERY
MSG LOW COOLANT STATE INITIALIZED LOAD SHED KW OVERLOAD
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN (MDEC LOAD SHED UNDER FREQUENCY
only) OVER CURRENT
MSG MDEC LOAD SHED OVER COMMON PR OUTPUT (RDO-29) GENSET PARAMETER WARNING
TEMPERATURE (MDEC only) includes the following:
GENSET SNUM MISMATCH WARNING
MAINTENANCE DUE (RDO-13) PR OVER VOLTAGE
PR OVER VOLTAGE
ENGINE DERATE ACTIVE (RDO-20) PR UNDER VOLTAGE
PR UNDER VOLTAGE
AFM ENGINE START DELAY PR OVER FREQUENCY
PR OVER FREQUENCY
ACTIVE NO DIAL PR UNDER FREQUENCY
PR UNDER FREQUENCY
DIALOUT MESSAGE SENT PR REVERSE POWER
PR REVERSE POWER
NO MODEM AT POWER UP PR OVER POWER
PR OVER POWER
CONNECTION FAILED PR LOSS OF FIELD
PR LOSS OF FIELD
CLOSE BUTTON PRESSED PR OVER CURRENT VR
PR OVER CURRENT VR
OPEN BUTTON PRESSED EXT BREAKER TRIP
HIGH OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING
KEY SWITCH LOCKED
HIGH INTAKE AIR TEMP WARNING
KEY SWITCH UNLOCKED
MDEC YELLOW ALARM
AUTO BUTTON PRESSED
MDEC RED ALARM
OFF BUTTON PRESSED
MDEC LOAD SHED OVER TEMP
RUN BUTTON PRESSED
MAINTENANCE REMINDER
GEN CB CLOSED
DERATE ACTIVE
GEN CB OPEN
LOAD SHED COMMON
UTILITY CB CLOSED
PGEN NOT ONLINE
UTILITY CB OPEN
PGEN DUPLICATE ID
COMMON WARNING (RDO-24)
PGEN MISSING NODE
COMMON LOAD SHED (RDO-25) COMMON LOAD SHED (RDO-25)
includes the following: PGEN EXTRA NODE
PGEN COMM NOT ONLINE
LOAD SHED OVER TEMPERATURE AUTO SYNCH DISABLED
DUPLICATE PGEN ID
LOAD SHED UNDER FREQUENCY DEAD BUS SENSE ERROR
MISSING PGEN NODE (RDO-26)
LOAD SHED OVER KW FIRST ON FAULT
EXTRA PGEN NODE
LOAD SHED ENGINE DERATE SYNC TIMEOUT
AUTO SYNCH DISABLED
CB CLOSE FAULT
GEN VOLTS HZ OK
CB CLOSE ATTEMPTS FAULT
SYNCH FREQ MATCH
CB OPEN FAULT
SYNCH PHASE MATCH Note: The default event for RDO--21 is CB CURRENT FAULT
SYNCH VOLTS MATCH Contactor. Prior to firmware version CB COMMON FAULT
CB TRIP TO SD TIME DELAY
2.9.0, the default event for RDO--21 EXTERNAL BREAKER TRIP
DEAD BUS SENSE FAULT
was Key Switch Off. STARTER “A” FAILURE
FIRST ON FAULT
STARTER “B” FAILURE
SYNC TIMEOUT
CB COMMON FAULT (RDO-28) CONTROLLER SETUP WARNING
CB CLOSE FAULT
includes the following: PHASE SELECTION ERROR
CB CLOSE ATTEMPTS FAULTS
CB CLOSE FAULT VOLTAGE SELECTION ERROR
CB OPEN FAULT
CB CLOSE ATTEMPTS FAULTS FREQUENCY SELECTION ERROR
CB CURRENT FAULT
CB OPEN FAULT KW SELECTION ERROR
CB COMMON FAULT (RDO-28)
CB CURRENT FAULT
CONTACTOR (RDO-21)

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 67


2.7.11 Menu 11—Voltage Regulator The user must enable the programming mode to edit the
display.
Menu 11 displays setup of the voltage regulator functions
including line-to-line voltages, underfrequency unloading See Section 2.8.11 to make changes in this menu.
(volts per Hz), reactive droop, power factor, and kVAR
adjustments. Note: The individual line-to-line voltages are displayed
for review purposes only.
The Reactive Droop Enable setting in Menu 11 is also
reflected in Menu 16, Paralleling Menu. Select Yes Note: Voltage regulator gain is used for adjusting
(enabled), Menu 16 shows SFWR OFF. Select No voltage stability and/or response.
(disabled), Menu 16 shows SFWR ON. To enable the
use of the designated digital input, select DIGIN in Note: Utility gain is used for VAR or PF stability adjust
Menu 16. while paralleling to a utility.

Menu 11 Overview
MENU 11
VOLTAGE REGULATOR

AVG L-L V #  L1-L2 VOLTS  L2-L3 VOLTS (3 PHASE)  L3-L1 VOLTS (3 PHASE) 
VOLT ADJ ?.? # # #

UNDER FREQ UNLOAD  FREQUENCY # HZ  SLOPE 


ENABLED Y/N SETPOINT ?.? HZ ?.? VOLTS-PER-CYCLE

REACTIVE DROOP  .8 PF RATED LOAD 


ENABLED Y/N VOLTAGE DROOP ?.?%

REGULATOR GAIN ADJ


GAIN #

ANALOG VOLT ADJUST


ENABLED Y/N

RESET REGULATOR
DEFAULTS?

68 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.12 Menu 12—Calibration The user must enable the programming mode to edit the
display.
Menu 12 provides access to the calibration factors for
metering (volts and amps) and auxiliary analog inputs. See Section 2.8.12 to make calibration changes.
Changing the system voltage or replacing the main logic
control circuit board requires calibration adjustment.

Menu 12 Overview
MENU 12
CALIBRATION

SCALE AC ANALOG TO SCALE AUX. ANALOG


INPUTS INPUTS SETUP (NEXT)

GEN VOLTAGE LN GEN VOLTAGE LL GEN AMPS BUS VOLTAGE LN RESTORE DEFAULTS Y/N

GEN L1--L0 V # GEN L1--L2 V # GEN L1 AMPS # BUS L1--L0 V # RESTORE GEN
CALIB REF ? CALIB REF ? CALIB REF ? CALIB REF (PARALLEL) ? VOLTAGE DEFAULTS?

GEN L2--L0 V # GEN L2--L3 V (3 PHASE) # GEN L2 AMPS (3 PHASE) # BUS L3--L0 V # RESTORE GEN
CALIB REF ? CALIB REF ? CALIB REF ? CALIB REF (PARALLEL) ? AMPERAGE DEFAULTS?

GEN L3--L0 V (3 PHASE) # GEN L3--L1 V (3 PHASE) # GEN L3 AMPS (3 PHASE) # RESTORE BUS VOLTAGE
CALIB REF ? CALIB REF ? CALIB REF ? DEFAULTS?

CALIBRATE REGULATOR? RESTORE ALL CALIB


Y/N DEFAULTS?

SCALE AUX. ANALOG TO AC ANALOG INPUTS


INPUTS SETUP (PREVIOUS)

ZERO AUX. ANALOG Press YES or NO. Text


INPUTS? Y/N appears on display lower
line. Pressing ENTER
confirms YES or NO
selection.
ANALOG XX # SCAL 1 #V
SCALE VALUE 1 ? SCAL 2 #V

ANALOG XX # SCAL 1 #V
SCALE VALUE 2 ? SCAL 2 #V

Press the down arrow to


scroll through additional
ANALOG auxiliary inputs
1--7 or enter the input
number.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 69


2.7.13 Menu 13—Communications See Section 2.8.13 to make changes in this menu.

Menu 13 shows the settings for remote See the Modbusr Communications Protocol operation
communications. manual for a list of Modbusr registers for the controller.

Menu 13 Overview
MENU 13
COMMUNICATIONS

PROTOCOL  PROTOCOL 
MODBUS 0 MODBUS 1

MODBUS ONLINE Y/N MODBUS ONLINE Y/N

CONNECTION TYPE  CONNECTION TYPES CONNECTION TYPE  CONNECTION TYPES


(USER DEFINED) Y/N SINGLE Y/N (USER DEFINED) Y/N SINGLE Y/N
CONVERTOR Y/N CONVERTOR Y/N

PRIMARY PORT  PRIMARY PORTS PRIMARY PORT 


(USER DEFINED) RS-232 (P18) (SINGLE) Y/N RS--485 ISO (P19) Y/N
RS-485 (P20) (MULTIPLE) Y/N

ADDRESS ? ADDRESS ?
(LAN Connections)

BAUD RATE  BAUD RATES BAUD RATE  BAUD RATES


(USER DEFINED) Y/N 9600 Y/N (USER DEFINED) Y/N 9600 Y/N
19200 Y/N 19200 Y/N

The Dial Out menu is visible PROTOCOL 


only when dial out feature is DIAL OUT
available.

ENABLED Y/N

TARGET  TARGET
PAGER Y/N MODEM Y/N

PHONE NUMBER PHONE NUMBER


???--???--???? ???--???--????

PHONE DELAY ?

PIN NUMBER ?

PIN DELAY ?

Modbusr is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

70 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.14 Menu 14—Programming Mode
Menu 14 provides local or remote access to the
programming function. The user enters a password to
access the programming mode.

Note: Log into the local programming mode to edit


the programming access code. The factory
default access code is the number 0.

Use Menu 14 to change the access code. Record the


new number and give the access code only to
authorized individuals. Should the controller logic not
accept the access code or if the new code number is
lost, contact your local authorized distributor/dealer for
password information.

The user chooses one of three programming modes:

D Local—using the controller keypad


D Remote—using a PC
D Off—no programming is permitted

Note: Use the generator set controller to initially set up


remote programming. Remote programming
cannot be accessed from a PC unless the
controller is first set for remote programming
using Menu 14.

See Section 2.8.14 to make changes to this menu.

Menu 14 Overview
MENU 14
PROGRAMMING MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE  PROGRAMMING MODE  PROGRAMMING MODE 


LOCAL Y/N REMOTE Y/N OFF Y/N

PROGRAMMING MODE  PROGRAMMING MODE  PROGRAMMING MODE 


CHANGE ACCESS CODE ENTER OLD CODE ? ENTER NEW CODE ?

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 71


2.7.15 Menu 15—Protective Relays (PR) Note: Entering 99.99, where applicable, designates
infinite delay and no shutdown. This value
Menu 15 provides protective relay setup and time effectively disables a fault shutdown.
delays for units with paralleling applications. The
shutdown (SD) settings override those in menu 7 and/or See Section 2.8.15 to make changes in this menu, when
menu 8. the paralleling is desired.

Menu 15 Overview
MENU 15
PROTECTIVE RELAYS

PR OVERVOLTAGE  TIME DELAY 


?% # VAC ? SEC

PR UNDERVOLTAGE  TIME DELAY 


?% # VAC ? SEC

PR OVERFREQUENCY  TIME DELAY 


?% # HZ ? SEC

PR UNDERFREQUENCY  TIME DELAY 


?% # HZ ? SEC

PR REVERSE POWER  TIME DELAY 


?% # KW ? SEC

SD REVERSE POWER  TIME DELAY 


?% # KW ? SEC

PR OVER POWER  TIME DELAY 


?% # KW ? SEC

SD OVER POWER  TIME DELAY 


?% # KW ? SEC

PR LOSS OF FIELD  TIME DELAY 


?% # KVAR ? SEC

SD LOSS OF FIELD  TIME DELAY 


?% # KVAR ? SEC

PR OVER CURRENT VR  TIME DELAY 


?% # AMPS ? SEC

SD OVER CURRENT VR  TIME DELAY 


?% # AMPS ? SEC

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


BRKR TRIP TO SD ??:??

72 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.16 Menu 16—Paralleling Menu KVAR Control and PF Control are mutually exclusive. If
either one is set up to SFWR_ON or DIGIN, the other will
Menu 16 provides voltage, frequency, phase rotation, automatically change to SFWR_OFF.
and dwell time synchronizing for units with paralleling
applications. PF Control has priority over KVAR Control and will
default to DIGIN. Should both control variables be set to
The Reactive Droop Enable setting in Menu 16 is also SWFR_OFF, PF Control will be used when KVAR/PF
reflected in Menu 11, Voltage Regulator. Select Control is required. This would occur when the
SFWR_OFF, Menu 11 shows Reactive Droop Enabled KVAR/PF Control Enable is set to SFWR_ON, when set
No. For any other setting, Menu 11 shows Reactive to DIGIN and the designated input activated, or when
Droop Enabled Yes. Select DIGIN allows the input to be the utility breaker is closed.
activated by the designated digital input.
See Section 2.8.16 to make changes in this menu, when
DIGIN is the hardware auxiliary digital input. SFWR is a the paralleling is desired.
fixed, an override, or software controlled setting.

Menu 16 Overview
MENU 16
PARALLELING MENU

PGEN SETTINGS  GENERATOR ID ?

NUMBER OF NODES ON BUS ?

SYNCH PARAMS  VOLTS MATCH WINDOW  VOLTS MATCH GAIN  VOLTS MATCH RESET 
ADJUST   +/-- ?.? % V  #.# ?.?  #.# ?.?

SYNC FREQ WINDOW  FREQ MATCH GAIN 


  +/-- ?.? % HZ  #.# ?.?

PHASE MATCH WINDOW  PHASE MATCH GAIN  PHASE MATCH RESET 


  +/-- ?.? DEG  #.# ?.?  #.# ?.?

DWELL TIME  FIRST ON CLOSE TD 


?.? SEC ?.? SEC

FAIL TO SYNC TIME DELAY  VOLT_FREQ OK TIMER 


? SEC ?.? SEC

MANUAL SYNCH CONTROL  PHASE ROTATION  VOLTAGE ADJ 3 PH 


BUS ABC / GEN ABC BUS ### / GEN ###

FREQUENCY ADJUST  PHASE ADJUST  SPEED BIAS VOLT BIAS


BUS #.## / GEN #.## VERY FAST # #.## #.##

CONTROL INPUT  FIRST ON ENABLE  FIRST ON ENABLE 


SETTINGS (USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

LOAD ENABLE  LOAD ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

continued on next page

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 73


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu, continued

Menu 16 Overview
SYNCH MODE IN AUTO  SYNCH MODE IN AUTO 
(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: AUTO
SFWR: TEST/CHECK (OFF/ON)
SFWR: PERMISSIVE (OFF/ON)

SYNC MODE IN RUN  SYNCH MODE IN RUN 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: AUTO
SFWR: TEST/CHECK (OFF/ON)
SFWR: PERMISSIVE (OFF/ON)

KW BASELOAD CTL ENBL  KW BASELOAD CTL ENBL 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

LOAD RAMP HOLD ENABLE  KW RAMP HOLD 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

FREQ TRIM ENABLE  FREQ TRIM ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

VOLTS TRIM ENABLE  VOLTS TRIM ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

REACT DROOP ENABLE  REACT DROOP ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

KW SYSTEM CTL ENABLE  KW SYSTEM CTL ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

VAR/PF SYSTEM CTL EN  VAR/PF SYSTEM CTL EN 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

EXT KW ADJ ENABLE  EXT KW ADJ ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

EXT VAR/PF ADJ ENABL  EXT VAR/PF ADJ ENABL 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

VAR/PF MODE CTL ENBL  VAR/PF MODE CTL ENBL 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

KVAR CONTROL ENABLE  KVAR CONTROL ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

MENU 16 DEFAULTS Y/N PF CONTROL ENABLE  PF CONTROL ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED) DIGIN: (OFF/ON)
SFWR: (OFF/ON)

74 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.17 Menu 17—Load Share Control See Section 2.8.17 to make changes in this menu, when
the paralleling is desired.
Menu 17 provides load sharing parameters for units with
paralleling applications.

Menu 17 Overview
MENU 17
LOAD SHARE CONTROL

KW LOAD  KW SHARING  KW SHARING GAIN  KW SHARING RESET 


CONTROL PARAMETERS CONTROL PARAMETERS ?.?? ?.?

KW SHARING DB  FREQ TRIM GAIN 


#.# % RATED KW ?.??

FREQ TRIM DB 
?.? % # HZ

KW BASE LOAD  KW BASE LOAD ADJ  KW BASE LOAD GAIN 


CONTROL PARAMETERS ?.? % # KW ?.?

KW BASE LOAD RESET  KW BASE LOAD DB 


?.? ?.? % RATED KW

KW DROOP  % DROOP AT RATED KW 


CONTROL PARAMETERS ?.? % [# RPM]

KW RAMP RATES  % KW RAMP RATE  % KW UP/DOWN RATE 


?.? %/SEC [ # KW/S] ?.? %/SEC [# KW/S]

DISCONNECT  DISCONNECT 
LOAD LEVEL ?.? % [# KW]

KVAR LOAD  KVAR SHARE  KVAR SHARING GAIN  KVAR SHARING RESET 
CONTROL PARAMETERS CONTROL PARAMETERS ?.? ?.?

KVAR SHARE DEADBAND  VOLTAGE TRIM GAIN 


?.? % RATED KVAR ?.?

VOLTS TRIM DEADBAND


?.? % [# V]

KVAR BASE LOAD  KVAR BASE LOAD  GENERATE KVAR? 


CONTROL PARAMETERS ?.? % [# KVAR] Y/N (if NO, ABSORB)

KVAR BASE LOAD GAIN  KVAR BASE LOAD RESET 


?.? ?.?

KVAR BASE DEAD BAND  KVAR UP/DOWN RATE 


?.? % RATED KVAR ?.? % RATED KVAR/S

to circuit breaker & misc


control parameters

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 75


Menu 17—Load Share Control, continued

Menu 17 Overview
POWER FACTOR  PF SETTING  LAGGING PF? 
CONTROL PARAMETERS ?.? PF Y/N (if NO, LEADING)

PF CONTROL GAIN  PF CONTROL RESET 


?.? ?.?

PF CONTROL DEAD BAND  PF UP/DOWN RATE 


?.? PF ?.??? PF/S

REACTIVE DROOP  % VOLTAGE DROOP 


CONTROL PARAMETERS AT RATED LOAD ?.?%

CIRCUIT BREAKER & MISC  BREAKER ENERGIZE TD 


CONTROL PARAMETERS ?.? SEC

BREAKER RECLOSE TD 
?.? SEC

BREAKER CLOSE 
ATTEMPTS ?

CB CURRENT FAULT LIMIT 


?.?% A [# AMPS]

CB CURRENT FAULT TD 
?.? SEC

MENU 17 DEFAULTS XFMR PHASE SHIFT 


Y/N ?.?? DEG

76 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.18 Menu 18—Battery Chargers Menu 18 provides battery charger information, settings,
(Version 2.9.0 or Higher) and parameter configurations. Use this menu to view
the battery metering and output state and to change or
enable parameter settings such as equalize charge and
WARNING temperature compensation. For more information on
parameters, refer to the battery charger operation
manual and the battery manufacturer’s recommended
specifications.

Explosion. Note: Incorrect charger output system voltage may


Can cause severe injury or death. cause irreversible damage to the battery and
Relays in the battery charger abnormal out gassing. Ensure that the battery
cause arcs or sparks. charger parameters match the battery
manufacturer’s specifications before using. In the
Locate the battery in a well-ventilated
area. Isolate the battery charger from controller user interface settings, verify that the
explosive fumes. battery topology and system voltage is set
correctly for the battery type that is used.
Battery gases. Explosion can cause severe injury or
death. Incorrect use of the equalize charge state may lead to Note: The battery charger menus are designed to work
hazardous situations. Equalization is ONLY applicable for with charger GM87448. Unless connected to
flooded lead acid (FLA) type batteries and will damage gel, charger GM87448 through CAN communication,
absorbed glass mat (AGM), or nickel-cadmium (NiCad) type the battery charger menus, although visible, have
batteries. In the controller menu or SiteTecht settings, verify no effect on the battery charger.
that the battery topology is set correctly for the battery type
used. Do not smoke or permit flames, sparks, or other sources
of ignition to occur near a battery at any time.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 77


Menu 18 Overview, continued
MENU 18
BATTERY CHARGERS

BATTERY CHARGER 1 BATTERY CHARGER 2

BATTERY CHARGER BATTERY CHARGER BASIC BATTERY CHARGER


METERING CONFIG ADVANCED CONFIG

OUTPUT VOLTAGE # BATTERY TOPOLOGY CUSTOM CHARGING PROFILE


OUTPUT CURRENT # VRLA YES ENABLE NO

BATTERY CHARGER STATE CHARGER SYSTEM VOLTAGE, BULK VOLTAGE


# 12V YES ?.????VDC

SFWR VER # AUTOMATIC EQUALIZE ABSORPTION VOLTAGE


ENABLED NO ?.????VDC

REDUCED OUTPUT NO TEMP TEMP COMPENSATION FLOAT VOLTAGE


COMP ACTIVE NO ENABLED NO ?.????VDC

ABSORPTION TERMINATION MANUAL EQUALIZE ACTIVE


?.????A NO

TEMPERATURE COMP SLOPE


-??mV/C

EQUALIZE VOLTAGE
?.????VDC

MAX ABSORPTION TIME


???MIN

MAX BULK TIME ???MIN

BULK STATE RETURN


VOLTAGE ?.???V

78 Section 2 Operation TP-6750 7/18d


2.7.19 Menu 20—Factory Setup Note: For Version 2.5.22 and lower, enter the numeric
serial number from the generator set nameplate.
Menu 20 provides factory setup information including For Version 2.5.23 and higher, confirm that the
the number of operating days, generator set alphanumeric number shown on the display
information, alternator information, engine information, matches the serial number shown on the
controller information, and the controller firmware code generator set nameplate. If the serial numbers
version. The temperature sensor setup applies to match, press the YES key and then press
non-ECM engines only. ENTER. If the serial numbers do not match, the
wrong personality parameter file is installed.
See Section 2.8.19 for more information about this Refer to the Program Loader documentation for
menu. instructions on reloading the personality
parameter file.

Menu 20 Overview
MENU 20 CONTROLLER SERIAL NO
FACTORY SETUP

FINAL ASSEMBLY DATE CODE VERSION #.#


DD/MM/YY COPYRIGHT ####

FINAL ASSEMBLY  REGULATOR 


CLOCK NO ? PARAMETERS

OPERATING DAYS  SETUP LOCK YES


#

MODEL NO #

SPEC NO #

GENSET SERIAL NO #

ALTERNATOR PART NO #

ENGINE PART NO #

TEMP SENSOR  (right arrow scroll thru avail-


GM##### Y/N able sensors) (non-ECM
models only)
DISABLE LOW COOLANT (DD/MTU models with
TEMP WARNING Y/N MDEC only)

TEST OVERSPEED (DD/MTU models with


SHUTDOWN Y/N MDEC only)

SERIAL NO CONFIRM  CONFIRM SERIAL? Y/N


######

TP-6750 7/18d Section 2 Operation 79


2.8 Local Programming Mode On All menu displays apply to both single-phase and
three-phase voltages unless otherwise noted as (1 PH)
The Local Programming Mode On section explains how or (3 PH) on the menu overview. The phase designation
to program the generator set controller logic. Each does not appear in the actual menu displays.
menu contains a step-by-step procedure for
programming the various logic groups. Note: Press the generator set master switch OFF
button when using local programming mode on.
See Section 1, Specifications, for setting ranges and
default settings. Use Appendix B, User-Defined Note: Use the generator set controller to initially set up
Settings for documenting any changes to the factory the remote programming. Set the controller for
defaults. remote programming using Menu 14 and remote
communication using Menu 13 before attempting
Please read and understand the entire Local remote programming.
Programming Mode On section before attempting any
programming. The factory settings are adjustable and Note: Press any key on the keypad to activate the
programming without full understanding of the logic controller panel display. The panel display turns
features and functions can cause inadvertent changes. off 5 minutes after the last keypad entry.

Refer to Menu 14—Programming Mode for information Note: Press the Reset Menu key to clear the Error
regarding menu programming activation. After display.
completing the programming always place the
controller back in the Programming Mode Off position to Note: Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering
prevent inadvertent program changes. decimal values where necessary.

The programming feature alters stored settings and Note: Entering 99.99, where applicable, designates
changes characteristics of the logic. Do not operate the infinite delay and no shutdown. This value
controller with the program mode on unless there is a effectively disables a fault shutdown.
need to edit program logic or clear stored data. Limit
Refer to Figure 2-20 for a quick reference to the menu
programming responsibilities to individuals with training
number and description.
and authority.

The product application requires expertise in the design Menu No. Menu Description
and programming of control systems. Only qualified 1 Generator Monitoring (Three-Phase Connections)
personnel should program, install, alter, and apply this 1 Generator Monitoring (Single-Phase Connections)
product. 2 Engine Monitoring

Use Section 2.7, Reviewing the Menu Displays, to view 3 Analog Monitoring
the generator set operation data and review previously 4 Operational Records
programmed information and to review the data when 5 Event History
no programming is necessary. 6 Time and Date
7 Generator System
Menus displaying the # symbol represent one of the
following data types: 8 Time Delays
9 Input Setup
D System-calculated data
10 Output Setup
D System-measured data
11 Voltage Regulator
D User-entered data previously done in another menu
12 Calibration
Menus displaying the ? symbol represent one of the 13 Communication
following data entry circumstances: 14 Programming Mode
D Require the user to enter data for setup 15 Protective Relays
D Offer the user a choice to enter new data if desired. 16 Paralleling Menu
17 Load Share Control
Menus displaying the * symbol represent access code or
password type entries. Actual key entry does not 18 Battery Chargers
display. 20 Factory Setup

See Section 2.5.3, Request and Error Messages, for Figure 2-20 Menu Number and Description
error display messages and explanations should they
appear while navigating through the menus.

80 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.1 Menu 1—Generator Monitoring Note: For the auto-scroll function, press ENTER at the
V & A Summary menu. Press the Reset Menu
Menu 1 provides generator output data including key or Menu Right  key to stop the auto-scroll
line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltages, current, function.
frequency, power factor, total kilowatts, percent of
maximum kW, total kVA and total kVAR displays. Note: A right arrow from any submenu moves to the
Menu 1 displays three-phase and single-phase next submenu header.
connections separately.

Menu 1—Generator Monitoring (Three-Phase Connections)


Note: This menu is for monitoring only; no adjustments or user settings can be entered.

Key Entry Display Description


ENTER MENU NO. 1--17
Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 1


Press the Enter key.

MENU 1
GENERATOR MONITORING
Displays the menu number and name.

VOLTS & AMPS 


Displays the volts and amps heading.

L1-L2 VOLTS #
L1 AMPS # Displays L1 and L2 volts and L1 amps.

L2-L3 VOLTS #
Displays L2 and L3 volts and L2 amps.
L2 AMPS #

L3-L1 VOLTS #
L3 AMPS #
Displays L3 and L1 volts and L3 amps.

L1-L0 VOLTS #
L1 AMPS #
Displays L1-L0 volts and L1 amps.

L2-L0 VOLTS #
L2 AMPS #
Displays L2 and L0 volts and L2 amps.

L3-L0 VOLTS #
L3 AMPS #
Displays L3-L0 volts and L3 amps.

FREQUENCY # HZ Displays the frequency.

MENU 1
GENERATOR MONITORING
Returns the user to the menu number and name.

VOLTS & AMPS 


Returns the user to volts and amps heading.

V & A SUMMARY 
Displays the volts and amps summary heading.

V L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1


# # # Displays L1-L2, L2-L3, and L3-L1 volts.

V L1-L0 L2-L0 L3-L0


# # # Displays L1-L0, L2-L0, and L3-L0 volts. (3 ph. only)

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 81


Menu 1—Generator Monitoring (Three-Phase Connections), continued
Key
Entry Display Description

A L1 L2 L3
# # # Displays L1, L2, and L3 amps.

V & A SUMMARY 
Returns the user to the volts and amps summary heading.

POWER KW 
Displays the power kilowatt heading.

TOTAL KW #
Displays total kilowatts and leading or lagging power factor.
PF # LEADING/LAGGING

L1 KW #
PF # LEADING/LAGGING
Displays total L1 kilowatts and leading or lagging power factor.

L2 KW #
PF # LEADING/LAGGING
Displays total L2 kilowatts and leading or lagging power factor.

L3 KW # Displays total L3 kilowatts and leading or lagging power factor.


PF # LEADING/LAGGING

TOTAL KW #
% OF RATED KW # Displays the total kW and percent of rated kilowatts.

POWER KW 
Returns the user to the power kilowatt heading.

POWER KVAR 
Displays the power kVAR heading.

TOTAL KVAR #
ABSORBING/GENERATING
Displays total kVAR, absorbing or generating.

L1 KVAR #
ABSORBING/GENERATING
Displays L1 kVAR, absorbing or generating.

L2 KVAR #
ABSORBING/GENERATING Displays L2 kVAR, absorbing or generating.

L3 KVAR #
ABSORBING/GENERATING
Displays L3 kVAR, absorbing or generating. (3 ph. only)

POWER KVAR 
Returns the user to power kVAR heading.

POWER KVA 
Displays the power kVA heading.

TOTAL KVA #
Displays total kVA.

L1 KVA #
Displays L1 kVA.

L2 KVA #
Displays L2 kVA.

82 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 1—Generator Monitoring (Three-Phase Connections), continued
Key
Entry Display Description

L3 KVA #
Displays L3 kVA.

POWER kVA 
Returns the user to power kVA heading.

Menu 1—Generator Monitoring (Single-Phase Connections)


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 1


Press the Enter key.

MENU 1
GENERATOR MONITORING
Displays the menu number and name.

VOLTS & AMPS 


Displays the volts and amps heading.

L1-L2 VOLTS #
L1 AMPS # Displays L1 and L2 volts and L1 amps.

L1-L2 VOLTS #
L2 AMPS # Displays L1 and L2 volts and L2 amps.

L1-L0 VOLTS #
L1 AMPS #
Displays L1-L0 volts and L1 amps.

L2-L0 VOLTS #
L2 AMPS #
Displays L2 and L0 volts and L2 amps.

FREQUENCY # HZ Displays the frequency.

MENU 1
GENERATOR MONITORING
Returns the user to the menu number and name.

VOLTS & AMPS 


Returns the user to volts and amps heading.

V & A SUMMARY 
Displays the volts and amps summary heading.

V L1-L2 L1-L0 L2-L0


# # # Displays L1-L2, L1-L0, and L2-L0 volts.

A L1 L2
# # Displays L1 and L2 amps.

V & A SUMMARY 
Returns the user to the volts and amps summary heading.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 83


Menu 1—Generator Monitoring (Single-Phase Connections), continued
Key
Entry Display Description

POWER KW 
Displays the power kilowatt heading.

TOTAL KW #
Displays total kilowatts and leading or lagging power factor.
PF # LEADING/LAGGING

L1 KW #
PF # LEADING/LAGGING
Displays total L1 kilowatts and leading or lagging power factor.

L2 KW #
PF # LEADING/LAGGING
Displays total L2 kilowatts and leading or lagging power factor.

TOTAL KW #
% OF RATED KW # Displays the total kW and percent of rated kilowatts.

POWER KW 
Returns the user to the power kilowatt heading.

POWER KVAR 
Displays the power kVAR heading.

TOTAL KVAR #
ABSORBING/GENERATING
Displays total kVAR, absorbing or generating.

L1 KVAR #
ABSORBING/GENERATING
Displays L1 kVAR, absorbing or generating.

L2 KVAR #
ABSORBING/GENERATING Displays L2 kVAR, absorbing or generating.

POWER KVAR 
Returns the user to power kVAR heading.

POWER KVA 
Displays the power kVA heading.

TOTAL KVA #
Displays total kVA.

L1 KVA #
Displays L1 kVA.

L2 KVA #
Displays L2 kVA.

POWER kVA 
Returns the user to power kVA heading.

84 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.2 Menu 2—Engine Monitoring
Menu 2 provides engine operating data including oil down temperature setpoints. The detailed engine
pressure and temperature, coolant temperature, fuel monitoring functions appear only for DDEC/JDEC/
pressure and temperature, engine rpm, and battery EMS2/EDC3 or MDEC/ADEC-equipped engines.
voltage. Menu 2 also displays engine warning and
shutdown setpoints and engine warmed-up and cooled- Note: A right arrow from any submenu moves to the
next submenu header.

Menu 2—Engine Monitoring


Note: This menu is for monitoring only; no adjustments or user settings can be entered.

Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 2


Press the Enter key.

MENU 2
Displays the menu number and name.
ENGINE MONITORING

ENGINE MONITORING 
Displays the basic engine monitoring heading.
BASIC

OIL PRESSURE # PSI


Displays the oil pressure and coolant temperature.
COOLANT TEMP #F

ENGINE RPM #
Displays the engine rpm and local battery VDC.
LOCAL BATT VDC #

HCT WARN #F
Displays the high coolant temperature warning and shutdown
HCT SDOWN #F
setpoints.
LOP WARN # PSI
Displays the low oil pressure warning and shutdown setpoints.
LOP SDOWN # PSI

ENGINE WARMED UP
#F Displays the engine warmed up temperature setpoint.

ENGINE COOLED DOWN


#F Displays the engine cooled down temperature setpoint.

MENU 2
ENGINE MONITORING Returns the user to the menu number and name.

ENGINE MONITORING 
Returns the user to basic engine monitoring heading.
BASIC

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 85


Menu 2—Engine Monitoring, continued
DDEC/JDEC/EMS2/EDC3-Equipped Engines only
Key
Entry Display Description

ENGINE MONITORING  Displays the detailed engine monitoring heading.


DETAILED Note: The detailed engine monitoring feature requires a
DDEC/JDEC/EMS2/EDC3-equipped engine.
ENGINE FUEL 
Displays the engine fuel subheading.

FUEL PRES # PSI


Displays the fuel pressure and fuel temperature.
FUEL TEMP #F

CHARGE AIR PRESS # PSI


Displays the charge air pressure and temperature.
CHARGE AIR TEMP #F

FUEL RATE # GPH


Displays the fuel rate per hour.

USED LAST RUN


Displays the amount of fuel used during the last run.
# GAL

ENGINE MONITORING 
DETAILED
Returns the user to the detailed engine monitoring heading.

ENGINE FUEL 
Displays the engine fuel subheading.

ENGINE COOLANT 
Displays the engine coolant subheading.

COOLANT PRES # PSI


Displays the coolant pressure and coolant temperature.
COOLANT TEMP #F

COOLANT LEVEL #%
Displays the coolant level as a percent of full capacity.

ENGINE COOLANT 
Returns the user to engine coolant subheading.

ENGINE OIL 
Displays the engine oil subheading.

OIL PRES # PSI


Displays the oil pressure and oil temperature.
OIL TEMP #F

OIL LEVEL #% Displays the oil level as a percent of full capacity and crankcase
CRANKCASE PRES # PSI pressure.

ENGINE OIL 
Returns the user to engine oil subheading.

86 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 2—Engine Monitoring, continued
DDEC/JDEC/EMS2/EDC3-Equipped Engines only, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

ENGINE MISC 
Displays the miscellaneous engine subheading.

ECM BATT VDC #


Displays the engine ECM battery VDC and ambient temperature.
AMBIENT TEMP #F

ENGINE MODEL NO.


Displays the engine model number.
#

ENGINE SERIAL NO.


Displays the engine serial number.
#

UNIT NO. #
ECM S/N # Displays the unit number and ECM serial number.

ECM FAULT CODES


Displays engine ECM fault codes.
#

ENGINE MISC 
Returns the user to the miscellaneous engine subheading.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 87


Menu 2—Engine Monitoring, continued
MDEC/ADEC-Equipped Engines only
Key
Entry Display Description

ENGINE MONITORING  Displays the detailed engine monitoring heading. Note: The detailed
DETAILED engine monitoring feature requires a MDEC/ADEC-equipped engine.
ENGINE FUEL 
Displays the engine fuel subheading.

FUEL PRES # PSI


Displays the fuel pressure and fuel temperature.
FUEL TEMP #F

CHG AIR PRESSURE # PSI


Displays the turbocharger air pressure and temperature.
CHG AIR TEMP #F

FUEL RATE * # GPH


Displays the fuel rate per hour.

DAILY FUEL USED * # GAL


Displays the amount of fuel used during the last 24 hours.

TOTAL FUEL USED * # GAL


Displays the amount of fuel used since the last reset.

ENGINE MONITORING 
Returns the user to the detailed engine monitoring heading.
DETAILED

ENGINE FUEL 
Displays the engine fuel subheading.

ENGINE OIL 
Displays the engine oil subheading.

OIL PRES # PSI


Displays the oil pressure and oil temperature.
OIL TEMP #F

ENGINE OIL 
Returns the user to engine oil subheading.

ENGINE MISC 
Displays the miscellaneous engine subheading.

ECU SUPPLY VDC #


Displays the engine ECU supply VDC and ambient temperature.
AMBIENT TEMP #F

ECU HOURS #
Displays the ECU operating hours.

ECU FAULT CODES #


Displays the ECU fault codes.

ENGINE MISC 
Returns the user to the miscellaneous engine subheading.

* While these menu displays do appear on the controller, the engine ECM is not currently set up to provide this data.

88 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.3 Menu 3—Analog Monitoring
Menu 3 provides the battery voltage and up to 7 user- midpoint 2.5 volts corresponds to 0 volts offset. If there
defined analog monitoring items dependent upon the is no connection at analog input 7, no voltage adjust is
generator system. recognized.

The User Defined Desc display refers to a description Note: If the analog display shows O/R (out of range), no
entered into the controller using the PC software. This input is connected.
description remains as the display for future review until
changed by the PC software user. The display has Note: Some data require entry using a PC in the
20 characters maximum. Remote Programming mode. See the monitor
software operation manual for details.
Analog Voltage Adjust. When the analog voltage
adjust option is enabled (see Menu 11), analog input 7 is Note: See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for factory
predefined as voltage adjust. The voltage of this input reserved inputs which are not user selectable.
will define the adjustment from the setting in Menu 11,
Voltage Regulator. The normal analog input range of Note: This menu is for monitoring only; no adjustments
0.5 to 4.5 corresponds to a 10% of system voltage. The or user settings can be entered.

Menu 3—Analog Monitoring (ECM Engines)


Key Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 3


Press the Enter key.

MENU 3
Displays the menu number and name.
ANALOG MONITORING

LOCAL BATT VDC #


Displays the local battery VDC.

ANALOG 01 #
Displays analog 01 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 02 #
(USER DEFINED DESC) Displays analog 02 and the user defined description.

ANALOG 03 #
Displays analog 03 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 04 #
Displays analog 04 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 05 #
Displays analog 05 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 06 #
Displays analog 06 end the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 07 #
Displays analog 07 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)
OR
ANALOG 07 # Displays analog 07 voltage adjustment VDC value when analog
ANALOG VOLT ADJUST voltage adjust is enabled.

ANALOG MONITORING Returns user to analog monitoring heading.


MENU 3 Note: Enter data using a PC in the Remote Programming Mode.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 89


Menu 3—Analog Monitoring (Non-ECM Engines)
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 3


Press the Enter key.

MENU 3
Displays the menu number and name.
ANALOG MONITORING

LOCAL BATT VDC #


Displays the local battery VDC.

ANALOG 03 #
Displays analog 03 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 04 #
Displays analog 04 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 05 #
Displays analog 05 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 06 #
Displays analog 06 end the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG 07 #
Displays analog 07 and the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

OR
Displays analog 07 voltage adjustment VDC value when this option is
ANALOG 07 #
enabled. Note: This function may be overridden by changing the
ANALOG VOLT ADJUST
description using the optional Monitor III software or by disabling in
Menu 11.
ANALOG MONITORING Returns user to analog monitoring heading.
MENU 3 Note: Enter data using a PC in the Remote Programming Mode.

90 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.4 Menu 4—Operational Records
Menu 4 provides the generator set operational records Generator set connected to an automatic transfer
including the operating start date, last logged switch. Should a utility power failure occur while the
maintenance, total run time loaded and unloaded, run unit is in the run time mode, the controller bypasses the
time since the last maintenance, number of starts, and run time mode and functions in the standby (backup)
number of running days. mode. If the utility power returns, the generator set
continues to run for the duration of the run time period if
Run Time Feature. This menu provides the ability to run not timed out.
the generator set for a designated time. After the run time
elapses. the generator set shuts down and functions in Note: Press the STOP PROG RUN key to stop the
the standby mode. The generator set controller does not generator set when in the run time mode, if
provide weekly scheduled exercise periods. necessary.

After performing maintenance, enter yes to reset


records reflecting the current day. The user must enable
the programming mode to edit the display.
Menu 4—Operational Records
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 4


Press the Enter key.

MENU 4
Displays the menu number and name.
OPERATIONAL RECORDS

FACTORY TEST DATE


##-###-## Displays the factory test date (day-month-year).

TOTAL RUN TIME


HRS #
Displays the total run time (hours:minutes).

TOTAL RUN TIME


Displays the total run time for loaded hours.
LOADED HRS #

TOTAL RUN TIME


UNLOADED HRS #
Displays the total run time for unloaded hours.

TOTAL RUN TIME


KW HRS # Displays the total run time in kW hours.

NO. OF STARTS #
Displays the number of engine starts.

ENGINE START? Y/N


Displays the start and countdown subheading.
COUNTDOWN ##:##

RUN TIME HR:MN Displays the run time (hours:minutes) feature. When required, use
??:?? the numeric keys to enter the selected run time (hours:minutes) and
press the Enter key.
RUN TIME HR:MN Confirms entry and displays the selected run time (hours:minutes).
##:## The generator set will start after activation. Note: Activate the
generator set run time feature by pressing the Yes and Enter keys.
See the following steps.
ENGINE START? Y/N Returns the user to the start and countdown subheading. Enter Yes
COUNTDOWN ##:## to start the generator set.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 91


Menu 4—Operational Records, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

ENGINE START? YES


Press the Enter key.
COUNTDOWN ##:##

RUN TIME HR:MN Confirms the entry. The generator set will begin cranking and run
##:## based on the run time (hours:minutes) period and all previously
established time (hours:minutes) delays from Menu 8—Time Delays.
Note: Press the STOP PROG RUN key to stop the generator set
when in the run time mode, if necessary.
RECORDS -- MAINT  Displays the records maintenance subheading.

MAINTENANCE REMINDER 
Displays the maintenance reminder settings in hours. A reminder is
HRS ??
issued when the engine run time exceeds this setting. When required,
use the numeric keys to set the hour value. Use 0 when no
maintenance reminder is wanted. Press the Enter key.

MAINTENANCE REMINDER  Displays the user assigned value to the maintenance hours reminder.
HRS ##

RESET RECORDS?  Displays the reset records option. After performing maintenance or
when required, enter Yes to reset.

RESET RECORDS? YES


Enter Yes to reset to the current date and press the Enter key.

RESET RECORDS? YES


Confirms the entry.

RECORDS -- MAINT 
Returns the user to records maintenance subheading.

RUN TIME SINCE MAINT


TOTAL HRS # Displays the run time since the last maintenance with total hours.

RUN TIME SINCE MAINT


LOADED HRS # Displays the run time since last the maintenance with loaded hours.

RUN TIME SINCE MAINT


UNLOADED HRS # Displays the run time since the last maintenance with unloaded hours.

RUN TIME SINCE MAINT


KW HRS #
Displays the run time since the last maintenance in kW hours.

OPERATING DAYS #
LAST MAINT ##-###-##
Displays the operating days since the last maintenance.

NO. OF STARTS # Displays the number of starts since the last maintenance date
LAST MAINT ##-###-## (day-month-year).

LAST START ##:## AM/PM


Displays last the start time (hours:minutes) and date
DATE ##-###-##
(day-month-year).
LENGTH OF RUN
Displays the length of last run in (un)loaded hours.
(UN)LOADED HRS #

MENU 4
OPERATIONAL RECORDS Returns the user to the operational records heading.

92 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.5 Menu 5—Event History
Menu 5 stores and displays the times and dates of up to
100 stored status, warning, and shutdown events. After
the first 100 events, each additional new event replaces
the oldest event. See Menu 10—Output Setup for a list
of possible events.

Note: This menu is for monitoring only; no adjustments


or user settings can be entered.

Menu 5—Event History


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 5


Press the Enter key.

MENU 5 Displays the menu number and name.


EVENT HISTORY

(MESSAGE TEXT) Displays the message text, date (day-month-year) and time
##-###-## ##:## AM/PM (hours:minutes). Scroll through up to 100 stored events. See
Section 2.3.5, System Warning Lamp, for fault descriptions.
MENU 5
Returns the user to event history heading.
EVENT HISTORY

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 93


2.8.6 Menu 6—Time and Date
Menu 6 sets the clock time and date and internal Note: A change to the time/date is recorded as a system
calendar. The controller uses set time for determining event. The time/date reset and other events are
the exercise run time and event records. The time and viewable (up to 100 events). For events that
date are valid only if the controller power (starting occurred prior to a date change, use the previous
battery) remains connected. date as the reference point for determining the
event’s actual date.
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the
display.

Menu 6—Time and Date


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 6


Press the Enter key.

MENU 6
Displays the menu number and name.
TIME AND DATE

DAY OF WEEK ##-###-## Displays the day of the week, date (day-month-year), and time
##:## AM/PM (hours:minutes).

TIME ??:?? AM/PM Displays the time (hours:minutes) of day entry. When required, use
the numeric and am/pm keys to set the time (hours:minutes) of day
and press the Enter key.
DAY OF WEEK ##-###-##
##:## AM/PM
Displays the corrected time (hours:minutes) of day.

DATE ??-???-?? Displays the date (day-month-year) entry. When required, use the
numeric keys to set the day of the month.
AND
DATE ??-???-?? Use the Menu Right  key to select the month.

AND
DATE ??-???-?? Use the numeric keys to set the two-digit year and press the Enter
key.
AND
DAY OF WEEK ##-###-##
##:## AM/PM
Displays the corrected date (day- month-year).

94 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.7 Menu 7—Generator System Note A:Some alternators have limited voltage and
frequency configurations. Inappropriate
Menu 7 contains the factory-preset generator set voltage or frequency entries will cause a
voltage and frequency data. Enter the corresponding RANGE ERROR message.
data if the generator set requires voltage reconnection
and/or frequency adjustment. It is imperative that the Note: The user defines the data shown in Menu 7. It is
user enter the correct data because these settings NOT data measured by the controller and
trigger all related shutdowns. associated sensing devices. The user defines
these values for purposes of calibrating the
See Section 2.5.3, Request and Error Messages, for control.
error display messages and explanations while
navigating the menus. Note: Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering
decimal values where necessary.
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the
display. Note: The variable speed governor (VSG) display
provides the ability to parallel the generator set.

Menu 7—Generator System


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 7


Press the Enter key.

MENU 7 Displays the menu number and name.


GENERATOR SYSTEM

OPERATING MODE  Displays the operating mode selection. Note: The display sample
(see note) YES may differ depending upon previous entries. The previously selected
operating mode appears first, either standby or prime power.

OPERATING MODE  Displays the optional operating mode selection. When required, enter
STANDBY NO YES for standby operating mode. Note: This display indicates the
generator set application.
OPERATING MODE  Enter YES to change the operating mode selection to standby and
STANDBY YES press the Enter key.

OPERATING MODE 
STANDBY YES
Confirms the entry.

OR
OPERATING MODE  Displays the optional operating mode selection. When required, enter
PRIME POWER NO YES for the prime power operating mode. Note: This display
indicates the generator set application.
OPERATING MODE  Enter YES to change the operating mode selection to prime power
PRIME POWER YES and press the Enter key.

OPERATING MODE 
PRIME POWER YES
Confirms the entry.

SYSTEM VOLTAGE Displays the line-to-line system voltage as entered data. When
LINE-LINE ? required, use the numeric keys to set new value. Press the Enter key.

SYSTEM VOLTAGE
Displays the corrected line-to-line system voltage. See NOTE A in
LINE-LINE #
2.8.7 Generator System.
SYSTEM FREQ # HZ Displays the system frequency as entered data. When required, use
the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter key.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 95


Menu 7—Generator System, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

SYSTEM FREQ # HZ Displays the corrected system frequency. See NOTE A in 2.8.7
Generator System.

PHASE  Displays the phase configuration selection. Note: The display sample
(see note) YES may differ depending upon previous entries. The user-selected phase
appears first, either wye, delta, or single phase.
PHASE  Displays the optional phase configuration selection. When required,
3 PHASE DELTA NO use the YES key to choose the delta phase configuration.

PHASE  Enter YES to change the phase configuration to a delta phase


3 PHASE DELTA YES configuration and press the Enter key.

PHASE 
3 PHASE DELTA YES Confirms the entry. See NOTE A in 2.8.7 Generator System.

OR
PHASE  Displays the optional phase configuration selection. When required,
3 PHASE WYE NO use the YES key to choose the wye phase configuration.
PHASE  Enter YES to change the phase configuration to a wye phase
3 PHASE WYE YES configuration and press the Enter key.

PHASE 
3 PHASE WYE YES Confirms the entry. See NOTE A in 2.8.7 Generator System.

OR
PHASE  Displays the optional phase configuration selection. When required,
SINGLE-PHASE NO use the YES key to choose the single-phase configuration.
PHASE  Enter YES to change the phase configuration to a single-phase
SINGLE-PHASE YES configuration and press the Enter key.

PHASE 
SINGLE-PHASE YES Confirms the entry. See NOTE A in 2.8.7 Generator System.

KW RATING ? Displays the generator set kW rating as entered data. When required,
use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter key.

KW RATING #
Displays the corrected system kilowatt rating.

RATED CURRENT # Displays the generator set rated current as entered data. Note: This
is a read-only display.

LOAD SHED OUTPUT  Displays the load shed output setting. When required, use the
?% # KW numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter key. See Menu
10, Output Setup for Group B User-Defined Systems Events
LOAD SHED OUTPUT 
#% # KW Displays the corrected load shed output setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC  Displays the load shed time (minutes:seconds) delay setting. When
??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC 
##:##
Displays the corrected load shed time (minutes:seconds) delay
setting.
LOAD SHED OUTPUT 
#% # KW
Returns the user to the load shed output setting.

96 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 7—Generator System, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

OVERVOLTAGE  Displays the overvoltage setting. When required, use the numeric
?% # VAC keys to set the new value. Press the Enter key.

OVERVOLTAGE 
Displays the corrected overvoltage setting.
#% # VAC

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC  Displays the overvoltage time (minutes:seconds) delay setting. When
??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC  Displays the corrected overvoltage time (minutes:seconds) delay
##:## setting.

OVERVOLTAGE 
#% # VAC
Returns the user to the overvoltage setting.

UNDERVOLTAGE  Displays the undervoltage setting. When required, use the numeric
?% # VAC keys to set the new value. Press the Enter key.

UNDERVOLTAGE 
#% # VAC
Displays the corrected undervoltage setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC  Displays the undervoltage time (minutes:seconds) delay setting.
??:?? When required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC  Displays the corrected overvoltage time (minutes:seconds) delay
##:## setting.

UNDERVOLTAGE 
Returns the user to the undervoltage setting.
#% # VAC

OVERFREQUENCY Displays the overfrequency setting. When required, use the numeric
?% # HZ keys to set the new value. Press the Enter key.

OVERFREQUENCY
#% # HZ Displays the corrected overfrequency setting.

UNDERFREQUENCY Displays the underfrequency setting. When required, use the numeric
?% # HZ keys to set the new value. Press the Enter key.

UNDERFREQUENCY
Displays the corrected underfrequency setting.
#% # HZ

OVERSPEED
Displays the overspeed setting. When required, use the numeric keys
? HZ # RPM
to set the new value. Press the Enter key.

OVERSPEED
# HZ # RPM Displays the corrected overspeed setting.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 97


Menu 7—Generator System, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

BATTERY VOLTAGE  Displays the battery voltage selection. Note: The display sample may
(see note) YES differ depending upon previous entries. The user-selected battery
voltage appears first, either 12 VDC or 24 VDC.
BATTERY VOLTAGE  Displays the 12 VDC battery voltage selection. When required, use
12 VDC NO the YES key to choose the 12 VDC battery voltage.

BATTERY VOLTAGE  Enter YES to change the battery voltage to 12 VDC and press the
12 VDC YES Enter key.

BATTERY VOLTAGE 
12 VDC YES Confirms the entry.

OR
BATTERY VOLTAGE  Displays the 24 VDC battery voltage selection. When required, use
24 VDC NO the YES key to choose the 24 VDC battery voltage.

BATTERY VOLTAGE  Enter YES to change the battery voltage to 24 VDC and press the
24 VDC YES Enter key.
BATTERY VOLTAGE 
24 VDC YES Confirms the entry.

LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE Displays the low battery voltage setting. When required, use the
?.? VDC numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Menu Right  key prior
AND to entering the decimal value.
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
?.? VDC Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE


Displays the corrected low battery voltage setting.
#.# VDC

HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE Displays the high battery voltage setting. When required, use the
?.? VDC numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Menu Right  key prior
AND to entering the decimal value.
HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.
?.? VDC

HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE


Displays the corrected high battery voltage setting.
#.# VDC

BLOCK HEATER ON #F Displays the block heater energize temperature setting. When
required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Applies to
DD/MTU engines with MDEC/ADEC engine controls only.
AND
BLOCK HEATER ON ?F
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

BLOCK HEATER ON #F
Displays the corrected block heater energize temperature setting.

BLOCK HEATER OFF #F Displays the block heater deenergize temperature setting. When
required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Applies to
DD/MTU engines with MDEC/ADEC engine controls only.
AND
BLOCK HEATER OFF ?F
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

BLOCK HEATER OFF #F


Displays the corrected block heater deenergize temperature setting.

98 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 7—Generator System, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

ENABLE VSG YES/NO


Displays the variable speed governor (VSG) yes or no selection for
paralleling applications. When required, use the numeric keys to set
the new value. Applies to DD/MTU MDEC/ADEC engine only.
ENABLE VSG NO

ENABLE VSG YES Entering YES enables the VSG function.

ENABLE VSG YES


Confirms the entry..

OR
ENABLE VSG YES

ENABLE VSG NO Entering NO disables the VSG function.

ENABLE VSG NO
Confirms the entry..

ENABLE DSC YES/NO


Displays the digital speed control (DSC) yes or no selection for
paralleling applications. When required, use the numeric keys to set
the new value. Applies to DD/MTU MDEC/ADEC engine only.
ENABLE DSC NO

ENABLE DSC YES Entering YES enables the DSC function.

ENABLE DSC YES


Confirms the entry..

OR
ENABLE DSC YES

ENABLE DSC NO Entering NO disables the DSC function.

ENABLE DSC NO
Confirms the entry..

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 99


Menu 7—Generator System, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

METRIC UNITS Y/N


Displays the metric units selection.

METRIC UNITS NO

METRIC UNITS YES Enter YES to change to metric displays and press the Enter key.

METRIC UNITS YES


Confirms the entry.

OR
METRIC UNITS YES

METRIC UNITS NO
Enter NO to change to English displays and press the Enter key.

METRIC UNITS NO
Confirms the entry.

SET NFPA-110 Y/N Displays the NFPA 110 default yes or no selection. Note: See
DEFAULTS Menu 10—Output Setup, Overview for a list of the NFPA-110 faults.

SET NFPA-110 NO
DEFAULTS
SET NFPA-110 YES Enter YES to select the NFPA 110 default selection and press the
DEFAULTS Enter key.
SET NFPA-110 YES
Confirms the entry.
DEFAULTS

OR
SET NFPA-110 YES
DEFAULTS
SET NFPA-110 NO Enter NO to deselect the NFPA 110 default selection and press the
DEFAULTS Enter key.

SET NFPA-110 NO
Confirms the entry.
DEFAULTS

MENU 7
Returns the user to the generator system heading.
GENERATOR SYSTEM

100 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.8 Menu 8—Time Delays
Menu 8 displays the various time delays for cyclic the generator set to run for the full engine cooldown time
cranking and other engine-related starting and delay.
shutdown features.
If the engine is above the preset temperature and the
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the unit is signalled to shut down, the unit will continue to run
display. for the duration of the TDEC.

Cooldown Temperature Override. This feature If the engine is at or below the preset temperature and
provides the ability to bypass (override) the generator the unit is signalled to shut down or the TDES is running,
set’s smart cooldown temperature shutdown and force the unit will shut down without waiting for the time delay
to expire.

Menu 8—Time Delays


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 8


Press the Enter key.

MENU 8 Displays the menu number and name.


TIME DELAYS

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the engine start time delay in minutes:seconds. When
ENGINE START ??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the corrected engine start time (minutes:seconds) delay
ENGINE START ##:## setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the starting aid time delay in minutes:seconds. When
STARTING AID ??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the corrected starting aid time (minutes:seconds) delay
STARTING AID ##:## setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the crank on time delay in minutes:seconds. When required,
CRANK ON ??:?? use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter key.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC


CRANK ON ##:## Displays the corrected crank on time (minutes:seconds) delay setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the crank pause time delay in minutes:seconds. When
CRANK PAUSE ??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC
Displays the corrected crank pause time (minutes:seconds) delay
CRANK PAUSE ##:##
setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the engine cooldown time delay in minutes:seconds. When
ENG COOLDOWN ??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC
Displays the corrected engine cooldown time (minutes:seconds) delay
ENG COOLDOWN ##:##
setting.

COOLDOWN TEMPERATURE Displays the cooldown temperature override. When required, use the
OVERRIDE Y/N Yes key to override the cooldown temperature time delay.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 101


Menu 8—Time Delays, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

COOLDOWN TEMPERATURE Enter YES to select cooldown temperature override time delay and
OVERRIDE YES press the Enter key.

COOLDOWN TEMPERATURE
Confirms the entry.
OVERRIDE Y/N

OVERCRANK SHUTDOWN Displays the engine crank cycles before overcrank shutdown. When
CRANK CYCLES ? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
OVERCRANK SHUTDOWN Displays the corrected engine crank cycles before overcrank
CRANK CYCLES # shutdown setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the overvoltage time delay in minutes:seconds. When
OVERVOLTAGE ??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the corrected overvoltage time (minutes:seconds) delay
OVERVOLTAGE ##:## setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the undervoltage time delay in minutes:seconds. When
UNDERVOLTAGE ??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the corrected undervoltage time (minutes:seconds) delay
UNDERVOLTAGE ##:## setting.

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the load shed time delay in minutes:seconds. When
LOAD SHED KW ??:?? required, use the numeric keys to set the new value. Press the Enter
key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the corrected load shed time (minutes:seconds) delay
LOAD SHED KW ##:## setting.

MENU 8
Returns the user to the time delays heading.
TIME DELAYS

102 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.9 Menu 9—Input Setup D TIme Delay (Shutdown or Warning). The time
delay follows the inhibit time delay. The time delay is
Menu 9 provides the setup of user-defined digital and the time period between the controller fault or status
analog warning and shutdown inputs. These inputs event detection and the controller warning or
provide a multitude of choices for configuring shutdown lamp illumination. The delay prevents any
customized auxiliary inputs. nuisance alarms. The time delay range is from 0 to
60 seconds.
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the
display. Digital Inputs. Items identified as not user selectable
are included for specific applications. (Example: AFM
Note: Press the down arrow to move to the start of the SHUTDOWN is enabled with a Waukesha-powered
next input setup. model.) The user can not disable a digital input when
identified as not user selectable.
Note: The user must scale the analog input value in
order to calculate the low/high warning and Analog Inputs. View up to 7 user-defined analog inputs
shutdown analog values based on a 0--5 VDC A01--A07.
scale. See Menu 12, Calibration.
Analog Input A07—Analog Voltage Adjust. Analog
Note: If the ALARM ACTIVE message appears, the voltage adjust is a feature that the user may choose to
selected input has an active fault disabling the enable. The input designated for use as Analog Voltage
input. This prevents the enabled choice change Adjust is analog input A07.
from yes to no. The LED display indicates
whether the fault is a warning or shutdown. Enable Analog Voltage Adjust through Menu 11.
Correct the fault condition before attempting the Additionally, Monitor 2 or Monitor 3 may be used to
keypad entry. enable Analog Voltage Adjust by entering the proper
description (Analog Volt Adjust) for A07. When Analog
Note: Some data requires entry by a PC in the Remote Voltage Adjust is enabled, the description for A07 is
Programming mode. See the monitor software Analog Volt Adjust. Changing the description using
operation manual for details. Monitor 2 or Monitor 3 disables the analog voltage
adjust feature.
Digital and Analog Inputs. After the user selects the
input, the setup requires entering the following choices When Analog Voltage Adjust is enabled, no warning or
or values: enabled (yes/no), inhibit time, and delay time. shutdown may be enabled for A07.
Note: See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for factory Note: If the analog input A07 description does not
reserved digital and analog inputs which are not match Analog Volt Adjust, input A07 will not
user selectable. function as the voltage adjust.
D Enabled. This menu entry enables the input. The Identification and Descriptions. Descriptions for user
previous yes/no selection does not activate the input. inputs (auxiliary analog or auxiliary digital) may be
Digital inputs have three tier groups: the selection entered using the Monitor III software accessory where
group (25 total), the chosen group (up to 21 total), and the user determines the descriptions in upper and lower
the enabled group (up to 21 total based on the chosen case.
group). Analog inputs have separate warning and
shutdown enabled choices.

D Inhibit Time Delay. The inhibit time delay is the time


period following crank disconnect during which the
generator set stabilizes and the controller does not
detect fault or status events. The inhibit time delay
range is from 0 to 60 seconds.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 103


Analog Input Values. The analog input selection Battle Switch/Fault Shutdown Override Switch. The
typically requires entering four values: low warning, high battle switch function forces the system to ignore normal
warning, low shutdown, and high shutdown. The analog fault shutdowns such as low oil pressure and high
values and time delays affect how and when the engine temperature. The battle switch does not
controller reacts. See Figure 2-21. The user must set override the emergency stop and overspeed shutdown.
both the high and low levels so the unit will not When the battle switch function is enabled the generator
inadvertently trigger the adjacent high or low value to set continues to run regardless of shutdown signals
cause a warning or shutdown fault. where potential engine/generator damage can occur.

Each analog input has the following nine features: When this input is enabled the yellow warning lamp
illuminates and stored warning/shutdown events that
D One warning enabled and one shutdown enabled are ignored continue to log in Menu 5— Event History.
D One inhibit time period
Shutdown Type A and Shutdown Type B. Choose
D One warning delay and one shutdown delay
shutdown type A for standard shutdowns where the
D Two warning levels (high and low) red lamp illuminates and the alarm horn sounds.
D Two shutdown levels (high and low) Choose shutdown type B for shutdowns where air
damper indicator RDO-23 energizes for two seconds,
Note: The user must scale the analog input value in the red lamp illuminates, and the alarm horn sounds.
order to calculate the low/high warning and
shutdown values based on a 0--5 VDC scale.
See Menu 12—Calibration.

Time after Crank Disconnect


Inhibit Time Time
Analog Time Delay Delay
Values Period ! Period ! Complete
High shutdown value High
is above the high shutdown
warning value function
High warning value is The High warning
above the acceptable The controller function
value controller does view
does not the analog
Acceptable analog System ready
view the input signal
value status
analog value and
Low warning value is input signal the time Low warning
below the acceptable value delay function
value begins

Low shutdown value Low


is below the low shutdown
warning value function

Figure 2-21 Analog Input Logistics

104 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 9—Input Setup
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 9


Press the Enter key.

MENU 9
Displays the menu number and name.
INPUT SETUP

SETUP DIGITAL 
AUXILIARY INPUTS
Displays the setup of digital auxiliary inputs heading.

DIGITAL INPUT 01  Displays the digital input 01 with the user-defined description.
(USER DEFINED DESC) Note: Press the down arrow to move to the start of the next input
setup.

DIGITAL INPUT 01  Identifies the signal source for digital input 01. Use the menu down 
(see Group A) YES/NO key to select the digital input.

Group A—Digital Inputs Group A—Digital Inputs, Group A—Digital Inputs, Group A—Digital Inputs,
The preprogrammed continued continued continued
selections include the AIR DAMPER Y/N RAISE SPEED Y/N VOLTS TRIM DISABLE Y/N
following list. See FIELD OVER VOLTS Y/N LOWER SPEED Y/N REACT DROOP ENABLE Y/N
Appendix E for application
and restrictions with IDLE MODE ACTIVE Y/N SYNC AUTO Y/N KW SYSTEM CTL ENABLE Y/N
specific engines. BATTLE SWITCH Y/N SYNC PERMISSIVE Y/N VAR/PF SYSTEM CTL EN Y/N
WARNING Y/N GROUND FAULT Y/N SYNC CHECK/TEST Y/N EXT KW ADJ ENABLE Y/N
SHUTDOWN TYPE A Y/N HIGH OIL TEMP Y/N SYNC RESET Y/N EXT VAR/PF ADJ ENABL Y/N
SHUTDOWN TYPE B Y/N LOW COOLANT LEVEL Y/N FIRST ON ENABLE Y/N VAR/PF MODE CTL ENBL Y/N
VOLTAGE RAISE Y/N ENABLE SYNCH Y/N FIRST ON RESET Y/N KVAR CONTROL EN Y/N
VOLTAGE LOWER Y/N LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN Y/N LOAD ENABLE Y/N PF CONTROL ENABLE Y/N
VAR/PF MODE Y/N UTILITY CB AUX Y/N KW BASELOAD CTL ENBL Y/N CB COMM FLT RESET Y/N
REMOTE SHUTDOWN Y/N OPEN COMMAND Y/N LOAD RAMP HOLD ENABL Y/N CB OVER CRNT TRIP Y/N
REMOTE RESET Y/N CLOSE COMMAND Y/N FREQ TRIM DISABLE Y/N

DIGITAL INPUT 01 
Displays the digital input 01, enabled yes or no selection.
ENABLED YES/NO

DIGITAL INPUT 01 
Entering YES enables digital input 01.
ENABLED NO

DIGITAL INPUT 01 
Press the Enter key.
ENABLED YES

DIGITAL INPUT 01 
Confirms the entry.
ENABLED YES

OR
DIGITAL INPUT 01 
ENABLED YES Entering NO disables digital input 01.

DIGITAL INPUT 01 
ENABLED NO Press the Enter key.

DIGITAL INPUT 01 
Confirms the entry.
ENABLED NO

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 105


Menu 9—Input Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

DIGITAL INPUT 01 
Displays the digital input 01 inhibit time (minutes:seconds) setting.
INHIBIT TIME ?:??
When required, use the numeric keys to set the new values. Press
the Enter key.

DIGITAL INPUT 01 Displays the corrected inhibit time (minutes:seconds) setting.


INHIBIT TIME #:##

Displays the digital input 01 delay time (minutes:seconds) setting.


DIGITAL INPUT 01 
When required, use the numeric keys to set the new values. Press
DELAY TIME ?:??
the Enter key.

DIGITAL INPUT 01  Displays the corrected delay time (minutes:seconds) setting.


DELAY TIME #:##

DIGITAL INPUT 01  Returns the user to digital input 01.


(USER DEFINED DESC)
Displays digital inputs 02 to 21. Note: Press the down arrow to scroll
through additional digital auxiliary inputs or enter the input number.
DIGITAL INPUT XX  Note: Press the right arrow at each digital auxiliary input to enable the
(USER DEFINED DESC) selection, inhibit time setting, and delay time setting. See Digital
Input 01 instructions for complete procedure and Group A
selections.See Figure 2-10 in User Inputs for factory reserved digital
and analog inputs which are not user selectable.
MENU 9
Returns the user to the menu number and name.
INPUT SETUP

SETUP DIGITAL 
AUXILIARY INPUTS Returns the user to setup digital auxiliary inputs.

SETUP ANALOG 
AUXILIARY INPUTS Displays the setup of analog auxiliary inputs heading.

ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the analog input 01 with user-defined description.


(USER DEFINED DESC) Note: ECM engines have inputs 01--07 and non-ECM engines have
inputs 03--07. Note: Press the down arrow to move to the start of the
next input setup.
ANALOG INPUT 01 
WARNING ENABLED Y/N Displays the analog input 01, warning enabled yes or no selection.

ANALOG INPUT 01 
Entering YES enables the warning analog input 01.
WARNING ENABLED NO

ANALOG INPUT 01 
Press the Enter key.
WARNING ENABLED YES

AND
ANALOG INPUT 01 
Confirms the entry.
WARNING ENABLED YES

OR
ANALOG INPUT 01 
WARNING ENABLED YES Entering NO disables the warning analog input 01.

ANALOG INPUT 01 
WARNING ENABLED NO Press the Enter key.

AND
ANALOG INPUT 01 
Confirms the entry.
WARNING ENABLED NO

106 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 9—Input Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

ANALOG INPUT 01 
SHUTDOWN ENABLED Y/N
Displays the analog input 01, shutdown enabled selection.

ANALOG INPUT 01 
SHUTDOWN ENABLED NO Entering YES enables the shutdown analog input 01.

ANALOG INPUT 01 
SHUTDOWN ENABLED YES Press the Enter key.

AND
ANALOG INPUT 01 
Confirms the entry.
SHUTDOWN ENABLED YES

OR
ANALOG INPUT 01 
Entering NO disables the shutdown analog input 01.
SHUTDOWN ENABLED YES

ANALOG INPUT 01 
Press the Enter key.
SHUTDOWN ENABLED NO
AND
ANALOG INPUT 01 
Confirms the entry.
SHUTDOWN ENABLED NO

ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the analog input 01, inhibit time (minutes:seconds) setting.
INHIBIT TIME ?:?? When required, use the numeric keys to set the new values. Press
the Enter key.
ANALOG INPUT 01 
Displays the corrected inhibit time (minutes:seconds) setting.
INHIBIT TIME #:##

ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the analog input 01, warning time (minutes:seconds) delay
WARN DELAY TIME ?:?? setting. When required, use the numeric keys to set the new values.
Press the Enter key.
ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the corrected warning time (minutes:seconds) delay setting.
WARN DELAY TIME #:##

ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the analog input 01, shutdown time (minutes:seconds) delay
SDWN DELAY TIME ?:?? setting. When required, use the numeric keys to set the new values.
Press the Enter key.
ANALOG INPUT 01 
SDWN DELAY TIME #:##
Displays the corrected shutdown time (minutes:seconds) delay
setting.
ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the analog input 01, low shutdown value. When required,
LO SDWN VALUE ? use the numeric keys to set the new values. Press the Enter key.
Note: The user must scale the analog input value in order to calculate
the low/high warning and shutdown values based on a 0--5 VDC
scale. See Menu 12—Calibration.

ANALOG INPUT 01 
LO SDWN VALUE #
Displays the corrected low shutdown value.

ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the analog input 01, low warning value. When required, use
LO WARN VALUE ? the numeric keys to set the new values. Press the Enter key.
Note: The user must scale the analog input value in order to calculate
the low/high warning and shutdown values based on a 0--5 VDC
scale. See Menu 12—Calibration.
ANALOG INPUT 01 
Displays the corrected low warning value.
LO WARN VALUE #

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 107


Menu 9—Input Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the analog input 01, high warning value. When required, use
HI WARN VALUE ? the numeric keys to set the new values. Press the Enter key.
Note: The user must scale the analog input value in order to calculate
the low/high warning and shutdown values based on a 0--5 VDC
scale. See Menu 12—Calibration.
ANALOG INPUT 01 
Displays the corrected high warning value.
HI WARN VALUE #

ANALOG INPUT 01  Displays the analog input 01, high shutdown value. When required,
HI SDWN VALUE ? use the numeric keys to set the new values. Press the Enter key.
Note: The user must scale the analog input value in order to calculate
the low/high warning and shutdown values based on a 0--5 VDC
scale. See Menu 12—Calibration.

ANALOG INPUT 01 
Displays the corrected high shutdown value.
HI SDWN VALUE #

ANALOG INPUT 01 
Returns the user to analog input 01.
(USER DEFINED DESC)

ANALOG INPUT XX  Displays analog inputs A02 to A07. Note: Press the down arrow to
(USER DEFINED DESC) scroll through additional analog auxiliary inputs or enter the input
number. Note: ECM engines have inputs A01--A07 and non-ECM
engines have inputs A03--A07. Waukesha engines have inputs
A05--A07.
Note: Press the right arrow at each analog auxiliary input for the
following selections and settings:
Warning enabled
Shutdown enabled
Inhibit time
Warning delay time
Shutdown delay time
Low shutdown value
Low warning value
High warning value
High shutdown value
See the Analog Input 01 instructions for the complete procedure.
SETUP ANALOG 
AUXILIARY INPUTS
Returns the user to the setup analog auxiliary input heading.

SETUP DIGITAL 
Returns the user to the setup digital auxiliary input heading.
AUXILIARY INPUTS

108 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.10 Menu 10—Output Setup Engine Derate Active. This RDO is signalled by the
engine ECM that an engine derate has occured. This is
Menu 10 provides setup of the user-defined system, an RDO only and not a system event.
digital and analog status and fault outputs, and relay
driver outputs (RDO) 1--31. These outputs provide a In Synch. This RDO is signaled when the generator set
multitude of choices for configuring customized auxiliary is in synchronization with the bus.
outputs. Additional individual outputs are available for
monitoring, diagnostic, and control functions. Maintenance Due. This RDO is signaled by a
user-definable Menu 10 entry indicating the specified
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the maintenance period has elapsed. This is an RDO only
display. and not a system event.

Note: Some data require entry using a PC in the Software Controlled RDOs (SCRDOs)
Remote Programming mode. See the monitor
software operation manual for details. The SCRDO is set up and enabled using the keypad or
PC. See the monitor software operation manual when
Common Faults reactivating the SCRDO. The user can deactivate an
SCRDO at the controller. The user cannot reactivate the
The user can program a single fault comprised of status SCRDO at the controller. The procedure to deactivate
and fault events from 3 common fault programs— the SCRDO appears at the end of Menu 10—Output
system, digital, and analog faults. Setup, Displays with Entry Keys—Deactivating the
SCRDO. The user must enable the programming mode
Up to 60 user-defined system events are available, to edit the display.
which provide status and fault information. See Group B
on the following pages for specific descriptions. The NFPA 110 Faults
NFPA-110 faults are part of the system fault program
and are comprised of 15 individual faults shown on this The NFPA 110 fault alarms are user-defined and
page. typically include the following:
D Overspeed
Up to 21 user-defined digital status and fault events
designated as D01 to D21 are available. Each of the D Overcrank
21 status events and faults are assignable as D High Coolant Temperature Shutdown
shutdowns or warnings. D Oil Pressure Shutdown
D Low Coolant Temperature
Up to 7 user-defined analog status events and faults D High Coolant Temperature Warning
designated as A01 to A07 are available. Each of the
D Oil Pressure Warning
7 status events and faults are assignable as shutdowns
D Low Fuel
or warnings with high or low settings for a total of up to
7 status events and fault functions. D Master Not in Auto
D Battery Charger Fault
Relay Driver Outputs (RDOs) D Low Battery Voltage
D High Battery Voltage
Up to 31 RDOs are available using the system, digital, D Low Coolant Level
and analog status events and faults. RDOs provide only
D EPS Supplying Load
the relay driver, not the relay. The contact relays that
D Air Damper Indicator
interface with other equipment are user supplied.
Defined Common Faults
Note: Func(Function) Used by (RDO) XX Reassign?
appears when the user attempts to assign an The 6 defined common faults include the following:
RDO to a function already assigned.
D Emergency Stop
Note: Cannot Change (because the) NFPA is Enabled D High Coolant Temperature Shutdown
appears when the user attempts to modify an D Oil Pressure Shutdown
RDO setting that is a NFPA 110 default D Overcrank
requirement. D Overspeed
D Remote Shutdown

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 109


Menu 10—Output Setup
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 10


Press the Enter key.

MENU 10 Displays the menu number and name.


OUTPUT SETUP

DEFINE COMMON 
FAULTS
Displays the common faults heading.

SYSTEM EVENTS 
Displays the system events heading.

COMMON FAULT Y/N Gives the user the option to add or delete the selection from the
(see Group B) defined system events group. Press the Menu Down key to continue
to the next selection (repeat as necessary).
COMMON FAULT NO
(see Group B)
Entering YES adds the selection to the defined system event group.

COMMON FAULT YES


(see Group B)
Press the Enter key.

COMMON FAULT YES


(see Group B)
Confirms the entry.

OR
COMMON FAULT YES Entering NO removes the selection from the defined system event
(see Group B) group.
COMMON FAULT NO
Press the Enter key.
(see Group B)

COMMON FAULT NO
(see Group B)
Confirms the entry.

Group B—System Events Group B—System Events, continued Group B—System Events, continued
For defined system events, choose LOSS OF ECM COMM STARTING AID (RDO-16)
from the following status events (ECM engines) GENERATOR RUNNING (RDO-22)
and faults by changing selection to NO OIL PRESS SIGNAL AIR DAMPER CONTROL
YES. HIGH OIL TEMP SDWN GROUND FAULT (RDO-17)
See Appendix E for application and
NO COOL TEMP SIGNAL EEPROM WRITE FAILURE
restrictions with specific engines.
LOW COOLANT LEVEL (RDO-08) CRITICAL OVERVOLTAGE
EMERGENCY STOP (RDO-02)
SPEED SENSOR FAULT ALTERNATOR PROTECTION
OVER SPEED
LOCKED ROTOR SHUTDOWN (RDO-19)
OVER CRANK
MASTER SWITCH ERROR AIR DAMPER INDICATOR
HI COOL TEMP SHUTDWN
MASTER SWITCH OPEN SD REVERSE POWER
OIL PRESS SHUTDOWN
MASTER SWITCH TO OFF SD OVER POWER
REMOTE SHUTDOWN
AC SENSING LOSS SD LOSS OF FIELD
LOW COOLANT TEMP
(non-ECM engines) OVER VOLTAGE SD OVERCURRENT VR
LOW FUEL WARNING (RDO-05) UNDER VOLTAGE IN SYNCH (RDO-27)
HI COOL TEMP WARNING (RDO-06) WEAK BATTERY BREAKER TRIP (RDO-31)
OIL PRES WARNING (RDO-09) OVER FREQUENCY HI OIL TEMP WARNING
MASTER NOT IN AUTO (RDO-23) UNDER FREQUENCY INTAKE AIR TEMP WARN
NFPA 110 FAULT (RDO-10) LOAD SHED KW OVER INTAKE AIR TEMP SDWN
(see Menu 10 introduction for list) LOAD SHED UNDER FREQ ECM YELLOW ALARM
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (RDO-11) OVER CURRENT (RDO-14) ECM RED ALARM
HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE EPS SUPPLYING LOAD (RDO-18) CB TRIP TO SD TIME DELAY
BATTERY CHARGE FAULT (RDO-12) INTERNAL FAULT STARTER ’A’ FAILURE
SYSTEM READY (RDO-01) DELAY ENG COOLDOWN (RDO-04) STARTER ’B’ FAILURE
DELAY ENG START (RDO-15)

110 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

DIGITAL INPUTS 
Displays the digital inputs heading.

COMMON FAULT Y/N Gives the user the option to add or delete selection from the defined
Dxx (see Group C) digital faults starting with D01. Note: Press the Menu Down key to
continue to the next selection D02--D21 (repeat as necessary).
COMMON FAULT NO Entering YES adds the selection to the defined digital fault group.
Dxx (see Group C)
COMMON FAULT YES
Dxx (see Group C) Press the Enter key.

COMMON FAULT YES Confirms the entry.


Dxx (see Group C)
OR
COMMON FAULT YES Entering NO removes the selection from the defined digital fault
Dxx (see Group C) group.
COMMON FAULT NO
Dxx (see Group C)
Press the Enter key.

COMMON FAULT NO
Confirms the entry.
Dxx (see Group C)

Group C Group C, continued


Up to 21 PC user-defined digital LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN
status and fault inputs LOAD ENABLE
designated as D01 to D21 can SYNC MODE AUTO
result in an digital input
SYNC PERMISSIVE
common fault. The following list
shows the factory defaults: SYNC CHECK/TEST
BATTERY CHARGER FAULT LOW COOLANT LEVEL
LOW FUEL WARNING REMOTE SHUTDOWN
LOW COOLANT TEMP REMOTE RESET
FIELD OVER VOLTS VOLTAGE LOWER
GEN CB AUX VOLTAGE RAISE
VAR/PF MODE LOWER SPEED
KW BASE LOAD MODE RAISE SPEED
SYS KW CONTROL MODE CB OVER CURRENT TRIP

ANALOG INPUTS 
Displays the analog inputs heading.

COMMON FAULT Y/N Gives the user the option to add or delete selection from the defined
Axx(see Group D) LO analog faults starting with A01. Note: Press the Menu Down key to
WARNING continue to the next selection A02--A07 (repeat as necessary).
Group D
Up to 7 analog inputs, PC user-
defined status events and faults
designated as A01 to A07. Each
of the 7 is assignable as a
shutdown or warning with high
and low settings.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 111


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description
COMMON FAULT Y/N Indicates whether the previously user-defined analog output was
A01 LO WARNING selected (yes or no) as a low warning fault.

COMMON FAULT NO Entering YES adds the low warning selection to the defined analog
A01 LO WARNING fault group.
COMMON FAULT YES Press the Enter key.
A01 LO WARNING

COMMON FAULT YES


Confirms the entry.
A01 LO WARNING

OR
COMMON FAULT YES Entering NO removes the low warning selection from the defined
A01 LO WARNING analog fault group.
COMMON FAULT NO
A01 LO WARNING Press the Enter key.

COMMON FAULT NO
Confirms the entry.
A01 LO WARNING

COMMON FAULT Y/N Indicates whether the previously user-defined analog output was
A01 HI WARNING selected (yes or no) as a high warning fault.

COMMON FAULT NO Entering YES adds the high warning selection to the defined analog
A01 HI WARNING fault group.

COMMON FAULT YES


A01 HI WARNING Press the Enter key.

COMMON FAULT YES


A01 HI WARNING
Confirms the entry.

OR
COMMON FAULT YES Entering NO removes the high warning selection from the defined
A01 HI WARNING analog fault group.
COMMON FAULT NO
A01 HI WARNING Press the Enter key.

COMMON FAULT NO
Confirms the entry.
A01 HI WARNING

112 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

COMMON FAULT Y/N Indicates whether the previously user-defined analog output was
A01 LO SHUTDOWN selected (yes or no) as a low shutdown fault.

COMMON FAULT NO Entering YES adds the low shutdown selection to the defined analog
A01 LO SHUTDOWN fault group.
COMMON FAULT YES Press the Enter key.
A01 LO SHUTDOWN

COMMON FAULT YES


Confirms the entry.
A01 LO SHUTDOWN

OR
COMMON FAULT YES Entering NO removes the low shutdown selection from the defined
A01 LO SHUTDOWN analog fault group.

COMMON FAULT NO
A01 LO SHUTDOWN Press the Enter key.

COMMON FAULT NO
A01 LO SHUTDOWN Confirms the entry.

COMMON FAULT Y/N Indicates whether the previously user-defined analog output was
A01 HI SHUTDOWN selected (yes or no) as a high shutdown fault.

COMMON FAULT NO Entering YES adds the high shutdown selection to the defined analog
A01 HI SHUTDOWN fault group.
COMMON FAULT YES Press the Enter key.
A01 HI SHUTDOWN

COMMON FAULT YES


Confirms the entry.
A01 HI SHUTDOWN

OR
COMMON FAULT YES Entering NO removes the high shutdown selection from the defined
A01 HI SHUTDOWN analog fault group.
COMMON FAULT NO
Press the Enter key.
A01 HI SHUTDOWN

COMMON FAULT NO
Confirms the entry.
A01 HI SHUTDOWN

COMMON FAULT Y/N Returns the user to common fault (analog inputs) heading.
A01 LO WARNING Press the Menu Down key to continue to the next selection A02--A07
(repeat as necessary).
COMMON FAULT Y/N Gives the user the option to add or delete selection from the next
Axx(see Group D) LO defined analog fault. Note: Use the A01 common fault analog input
WARNING setup procedure shown above for A02--A07. Go to
Group D
Up to 7 analog inputs, PC user-
defined status events and faults
designated as A01 to A07. Each
of the 7 is assignable as a
shutdown or warning with high
and low settings.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 113


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description
ANALOG INPUTS 
Returns the user to analog inputs heading.

DEFINE COMMON 
FAULTS
Returns the user to the define common faults heading.

RELAY DRV OUT 01  Gives the user previously selected items for relay driver outputs
(see Group E) (user defined) (RDO) starting with 01. Note: Press the down arrow to continue to
the next relay driver output 02--31 or enter the RDO number.
Note: The RDO can be assigned from the SYSTEM EVENTS,
DIGITAL INPUTS, or ANALOG INPUTS groups. The start of each of
these groups are highlighted on the following pages.

Group E—RDO Factory Group E—RDO Factory Group E—RDO Factory


Defaults Defaults, continued Defaults, continued
Up to 31 status event and OIL PRESS WARNING GENERATOR RUNNING
fault Relay Driver Outputs (RDO-09) (RDO-22)
(RDOs) are available. The NFPA 110 FAULT (RDO-10)* MASTER SWITCH NOT IN
following list is the factory AUTO (RDO-23)
defaults: LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
(RDO-11) COMMON WARNING
See Appendix E for
BATTERY CHARGER FAULT (RDO-24)
application and restrictions
with specific engines. (RDO-12) COMMON LOAD SHED
SYSTEM READY (RDO-01) MAINTENANCE DUE (RDO-25)
EMERGENCY STOP (RDO-13) MISSING PGEN NODE
(RDO-02) OVER CURRENT (RDO-14) (RDO-26)
DEFINED COMMON FAULT DELAY ENG START IN SYNCH (RDO-27)
(RDO-03) (RDO-15) CB COMMON FAULT
DELAY ENG COOLDOWN STARTING AID (RDO-16) (RDO-28)
(RDO-04) GROUND FAULT (RDO-17) COMMON PR OUTPUT
LOW FUEL WARNING (RDO-29)
EPS SUPPLYING LOAD
(RDO-05) (RDO--18) CLOSE BREAKER (RDO-30)
HI COOL TEMP WARNING ALTERNATOR BREAKER TRIP (RDO-31)
(RDO-06) PROTECTION SHUTDOWN
LOW COOLANT TEMP (RDO-19)
(non-ECM engines)
Note: The default event for RDO--21 is
ENGINE DERATE ACTIVE
(RDO-07) (RDO-20)
Contactor. Prior to firmware
LOW COOLANT LEVEL CONTACTOR (RDO-21)
version 2.9.0, the default event
(RDO-08) for RDO--21 was Key Switch Off.

SYSTEM EVENTS 
Displays the system events heading.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Gives the user the option to assign a system event to an RDO. Press
(see Group F) the Menu Down key to continue to the next selection (repeat as
necessary).
RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO Entering YES adds the selection to the RDO group.
(see Group F) Note: Func(Function) Used by (RDO) XX Reassign? appears when
the user attempts to assign an RDO to a function already assigned.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


Press the Enter key.
(see Group F)

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


(see Group F) Confirms the entry.

114 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued

Group F—RDO Selection List NFPA 110 FAULT


For Relay Driver Output (RDO) The NFPA 110 Fault
selections, choose from the following Alarms are user-defined
119 status events and faults by and typically include the
changing selection to YES. following:
Up to 31 status event and fault RDOs OVERSPEED
are available. OVERCRANK
See Appendix E for application and HIGH COOLANT TEMP
restrictions with specific engines. SHUTDOWN
EMERGENCY STOP (RDO-02) OIL PRESSURE
OVER SPEED SHUTDOWN
OVER CRANK LOW COOLANT
HI COOL TEMP SHUTDWN TEMPERATURE
OIL PRESS SHUTDOWN HIGH COOLANT TEMP
WARNING
LOW COOLANT TEMP (non-ECM
engines) (RDO-07) OIL PRESSURE
WARNING
LOW FUEL WARNING (RDO-05)
LOW FUEL
HI COOL TEMP WARNING (RDO-06)
MASTER NOT IN AUTO
OIL PRESS WARNING (RDO-09)
BATTERY CHARGER
MASTER NOT IN AUTO (RDO-23) FAULT
NFPA 110 FAULT (RDO-10) LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (RDO-11) HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE
HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW COOLANT LEVEL
BATTERY CHARGER FAULT (RDO-12) EPS SUPPLYING LOAD
SYSTEM READY (RDO-01) AIR DAMPER INDICATOR
LOSS OF ECM COMM
(ECM engines)
NO OIL PRESS SIGNAL DEFINED COMMON
FAULT
HIGH OIL TEMP SHUTDOWN
The 6 defined common
NO COOL TEMP SIGNAL
faults include the
LOW COOLANT LEVEL (RDO-08) following:
SPEED SENSOR FAULT EMERGENCY STOP
LOCKED ROTOR HI COOL TEMP
MASTER SWITCH ERROR SHUTDOWN
MASTER SWITCH OPEN OIL PRESS SHUTDOWN
MASTER SWITCH TO OFF OVERCRANK
AC SENSING LOSS OVERSPEED
OVER VOLTAGE REMOTE SHUTDOWN
UNDER VOLTAGE
WEAK BATTERY
OVER FREQUENCY
UNDER FREQUENCY
LOAD SHED KW OVER
LOAD SHED UNDER FREQ
OVER CURRENT (RDO-14)
EPS SUPPLYING LOAD (RDO--18)
INTERNAL FAULT
DELAY ENG COOLDOWN (RDO-04)
DELAY ENG START (RDO-15)
STARTING AID (RDO-16)
GENERATOR RUNNING (RDO-22)
AIR DAMPER CONTROL
GROUND FAULT (RDO-17)
EEPROM WRITE FAILURE
CRITICAL OVERVOLTAGE
ALTERNATOR PROTECTION
SHUTDOWN (RDO-19)
AIR DAMPER INDICATOR
DEFINED COMMON FAULT (RDO-03)
SCRDOs 1--4 (software controlled
RDOs)

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 115


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued

Group F—RDO Selection List, continued Group F—RDO Selection List, continued COMMON WARNING (RDO-24)
CLOSE BREAKER (RDO-30) includes the following:
SD REVERSE POWER
EXTERNAL BREAKER TRIP LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SD OVER POWER
REMOTE SHUTDOWN LOW FUEL WARNING
SD LOSS OF FIELD
DUAL STARTER APPLICATION HIGH COOLANT TEMP SHUTDOWN
SD OVERCURRENT VR
STARTER ’A’ FAILURE OIL PRESSURE WARNING
COMMON PR OUTPUT (RDO-29)
STARTER ’B’ FAILURE MASTER SWITCH NOT IN AUTO
IN SYNCH (RDO-27)
DUAL STARTER ’B’ (RDO-23) LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
BREAKER TRIP (RDO-31)
CONTROLLER SETUP ERROR HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE
HI OIL TEMP WARNING
PHASE SELECTION ERROR BATTERY CHARGER FAULT
INTAKE AIR TEMP WARNING
VOLT SELECTION ERROR LOSS ECM COMMUNICATION
INTAKE AIR TEMP SHUTDOWN
FREQ SELECTION ERROR LOW COOLANT LEVEL
ECM YELLOW ALARM
KW SELECTION ERROR SPEED SENSOR FAULT
ECM RED ALARM
EEPROM INITIALIZED LOSS AC SENSING
MSG MDEC BLOCK HEATER
CONTROL (MDEC only) DATE CHANGED FROM WEAK BATTERY
MSG LOW COOLANT STATE INITIALIZED LOAD SHED KW OVERLOAD
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN (MDEC LOAD SHED UNDER FREQUENCY
only) OVER CURRENT
MSG MDEC LOAD SHED OVER COMMON PR OUTPUT (RDO-29) GENSET PARAMETER WARNING
TEMPERATURE (MDEC only) includes the following:
GENSET SNUM MISMATCH WARNING
MAINTENANCE DUE (RDO-13) PR OVER VOLTAGE
PR OVER VOLTAGE
ENGINE DERATE ACTIVE (RDO-20) PR UNDER VOLTAGE
PR UNDER VOLTAGE
AFM ENGINE START DELAY PR OVER FREQUENCY
PR OVER FREQUENCY
ACTIVE NO DIAL PR UNDER FREQUENCY
PR UNDER FREQUENCY
DIALOUT MESSAGE SENT PR REVERSE POWER
PR REVERSE POWER
NO MODEM AT POWER UP PR OVER POWER
PR OVER POWER
CONNECTION FAILED PR LOSS OF FIELD
PR LOSS OF FIELD
CLOSE BUTTON PRESSED PR OVER CURRENT VR
PR OVER CURRENT VR
OPEN BUTTON PRESSED EXT BREAKER TRIP
HIGH OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING
KEY SWITCH LOCKED
HIGH INTAKE AIR TEMP WARNING
KEY SWITCH UNLOCKED
MDEC YELLOW ALARM
AUTO BUTTON PRESSED
MDEC RED ALARM
OFF BUTTON PRESSED
MDEC LOAD SHED OVER TEMP
RUN BUTTON PRESSED
MAINTENANCE REMINDER
GEN CB CLOSED
DERATE ACTIVE
GEN CB OPEN
LOAD SHED COMMON
UTILITY CB CLOSED
PGS NOT ONLINE
UTILITY CB OPEN
PGS DUPLICATE ID
COMMON WARNING (RDO-24)
PGS MISSING NODE
COMMON LOAD SHED (RDO-25) COMMON LOAD SHED (RDO-25)
includes the following: PGS EXTRA NODE
PGEN COMM NOT ONLINE
LOAD SHED OVER TEMPERATURE AUTO SYNCH DISABLED
DUPLICATE PGEN ID
LOAD SHED UNDER FREQUENCY DEAD BUS SENSE ERROR
MISSING PGEN NODE (RDO-26)
LOAD SHED OVER KW FIRST ON FAULT
EXTRA PGEN NODE
LOAD SHED ENGINE DERATE SYNC TIMEOUT
AUTO SYNCH DISABLED
CB CLOSE FAULT
GEN VOLTS HZ OK
CB CLOSE ATTEMPTS FAULT
SYNCH FREQ MATCH CB COMMON FAULT (RDO-28)
includes the following: CB OPEN FAULT
SYNCH PHASE MATCH
CB CLOSE FAULT CB CURRENT FAULT
SYNCH VOLTS MATCH
CB CLOSE ATTEMPTS FAULTS CB COMMON FAULT
CB TRIP TO SD TIME DELAY
CB OPEN FAULT EXTERNAL BREAKER TRIP
DEAD BUS SENSE FAULT
CB CURRENT FAULT STARTER “A” FAILURE
FIRST ON FAULT
STARTER “B” FAILURE
SYNC TIMEOUT
CONTROLLER SETUP WARNING
CB CLOSE FAULT
PHASE SELECTION ERROR
CB CLOSE ATTEMPTS FAULTS
Note: The default event for RDO--21 is VOLTAGE SELECTION ERROR
CB OPEN FAULT
CB CURRENT FAULT
Contactor. Prior to firmware FREQUENCY SELECTION ERROR

CB COMMON FAULT (RDO-28)


version 2.9.0, the default event KW SELECTION ERROR

CONTACTOR (RDO-21)
for RDO--21 was Key Switch Off.

116 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

DIGITAL INPUTS 
Displays the digital inputs heading.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Gives the user the option to assign a digital input to an RDO starting
Dxx (see Group C) with D01. Press the Menu Down key to continue to the next selection
D02--D21 (repeat as necessary).
Note: Func(Function) Used by (RDO) XX Reassign? appears when
the user attempts to assign an RDO to a function already assigned.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO Entering YES adds the selection to the RDO group.
Dxx (see Group C) Note: Func(Function) Used by (RDO) XX Reassign? appears when
the user attempts to assign an RDO to a function already assigned.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


Press the Enter key.
Dxx (see Group C)

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


Confirms the entry.
Dxx (see Group C)

Group C
Up to user-defined digital status
and fault inputs designated as
D01 to D21 can result in a digital
input common fault.

ANALOG INPUTS 
Displays the analog inputs heading.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Gives the user the option to assign an analog input to an RDO starting
Axx(see Group D) LO with A01. Note: Press the Menu Down key to continue to the next
WARNING selection A02-A07 (repeat as necessary).
Group D
Up to 7 analog inputs, user-
defined status events and
faults designated as A01 to
A07. Each of the 7 is
assignable as a shutdown or
warning with high or low
settings.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 117


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Indicates whether the previously user-defined analog RDO was
A01 LO WARNING selected (yes or no) as a low warning fault.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO Entering YES adds the low warning selection to the defined analog
A01 LO WARNING RDO group.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


Press the Enter key.
A01 LO WARNING

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


Confirms the entry.
A01 LO WARNING

OR
RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES Entering NO removes the low warning selection from the defined
A01 LO WARNING analog RDO group.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO


A01 LO WARNING
Press the Enter key.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO


Confirms the entry.
A01 LO WARNING

RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Indicates whether the previously user-defined analog RDO was
A01 HI WARNING selected (yes or no) as a high warning fault.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO Entering YES adds the high warning selection to the defined analog
A01 HI WARNING RDO group.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


A01 HI WARNING Press the Enter key.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


A01 HI WARNING
Confirms the entry.

OR
RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES Entering NO removes the high warning selection from the defined
A01 HI WARNING analog RDO group.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO Press the Enter key.


A01 HI WARNING

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO


Confirms the entry.
A01 HI WARNING

118 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Indicates whether the previously user-defined analog RDO was
A01 LO SHUTDOWN selected (yes or no) as a low shutdown fault.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO Entering YES adds the low shutdown selection to the defined analog
A01 LO SHUTDOWN RDO group.
RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES
A01 LO SHUTDOWN Press the Enter key.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


A01 LO SHUTDOWN Confirms the entry.

OR
RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES Entering NO removes the low shutdown selection from the defined
A01 LO SHUTDOWN analog RDO group.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO


A01 LO SHUTDOWN Press the Enter key.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO


A01 LO SHUTDOWN Confirms the entry.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Indicates whether the previously user-defined analog RDO was
A01 HI SHUTDOWN selected (yes or no) as a high shutdown fault.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO Entering YES adds the high shutdown selection to the defined analog
A01 HI SHUTDOWN RDO group.
RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES
A01 HI SHUTDOWN Press the Enter key.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES


Confirms the entry.
A01 HI SHUTDOWN

OR
RELAY DRV OUT 01 YES Entering NO removes the high shutdown selection from the defined
A01 HI SHUTDOWN analog RDO group.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO


A01 HI SHUTDOWN Press the Enter key.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 NO


Confirms the entry.
A01 HI SHUTDOWN

RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Returns the user to the analog RDO (analog inputs) heading. Press
A01 LO WARNING the Menu Down key to continue to the next selection A02--A07 (repeat
as necessary).
RELAY DRV OUT 01 Y/N Gives the user the option to add or delete a selection for the next
Axx(see Group D) LO analog RDO. Note: Use the A01 analog RDO setup procedure shown
WARNING above for A02--A07. Go to
ANALOG INPUTS  Returns the user to the analog inputs heading. Press the Menu Right
key.

RELAY DRV OUT 01 


Returns the user to the RDO 01 heading.
(user defined)

RELAY DRV OUT XX  Gives the user the option to add or delete a selection for the next
(user defined) RDO. Note: Use the RDO 01 setup procedure shown above for
RDOs 02--31. Go to

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 119


Menu 10—Output Setup, continued
Deactivating the SCRDO
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 10


Press the Enter key.

MENU 10 Displays the menu number and name


OUTPUT SETUP

DEFINE COMMON 
FAULTS
Displays the common faults heading.

RELAY DRV OUT XX  Gives the user previously selected items for the relay driver outputs
S’WARE CONTROLLED #X (RDO). Press the down arrow to scroll through relay driver outputs
1--31 or enter the RDO number. Locate the SCRDO display.

DEACTIVATE RDO?  When required (SCRDO is currently active), enter the YES key to
deactivate the SCRDO.

DEACTIVATE RDO? YES


Press the Enter key.

RELAY DRV OUT XX 


S’WARE CONTROLLED #X

120 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.11 Menu 11—Voltage Regulator
Menu 11 provides the setup of the voltage regulator Note: 350--2000 kW models only, see 1.3.2 Voltage
functions including the line-to-line voltages, Regulator and Calibration Specifications
underfrequency unloading (volts per Hz), reactive regarding the use of the Marathonr DVRr 2000
droop, power factor, and kVAR adjustments. See voltage regulator on some earlier generator sets.
Section 1.3.3 Voltage Regulator Adjustments and
Appendix C Application Programming for additional Analog Voltage Adjust. Analog input A07 is the
information. voltage adjustment for paralleling applications only.
This input adjusts the input up or down from the value
The Reactive Droop Enable setting in Menu 11 also entered in Menu 11, Voltage Regulator. If the keypad
affects settings in Menu 16, Paralleling Menu. Select entry does not match the displayed value for voltage
Yes (enabled), Menu 16 shows SFWR OFF. Select No adjust, the analog input is likely not at zero (2.5 VDC).
(disabled), Menu 16 shows SFWR ON. To enable the Analog input A07 can be monitored or checked in Menu
use of the designated digital input, select DIGIN in 3, Analog Monitoring.
Menu 16.
Note: Utility paralleling applications require enabling
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the the VAR/PF controls. The Utility Gain Adjust is
display. used for VAR or PF stability adjustment while
paralleling to a utility.
Note: Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering the
decimal values where necessary. Marathonr and DVRr are registered trademarks of Marathon Electric
Mfg. Corp.

Menu 11—Voltage Regulator


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 11


Press the Enter key.

MENU 11 Displays the menu number and name.


VOLTAGE REGULATOR

AVG L-L V # Displays the average running line-to-line volts and voltage adjustment.
VOLT ADJ ?.? Enter the desired nominal voltage using the numeric keys. Press the
Menu Right  key prior to entering the decimal value.
AND
AVG L-L V #
VOLT ADJ ?.?
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

AVG L-L V #
Confirms the entry.
VOLT ADJ #.#

L1-L2 VOLTS 
Displays L1-L2 volts.
#

L2-L3 VOLTS  Displays L2-L3 volts (3 phase only).


#

L3-L1 VOLTS 
Displays L3-L1 volts (3 phase only).
#

AVG L-L V # Returns the user to the average line-to-line volts and voltage
VOLT ADJ # adjustment heading.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 121


Menu 11—Voltage Regulator, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

UNDER FREQ UNLOAD  Displays the under frequency (volts per Hz) unloading (yes or no)
ENABLED N/Y selection.

UNDER FREQ UNLOAD 


ENABLED NO Entering YES enables the underfrequency unloading feature.

UNDER FREQ UNLOAD 


Press the Enter key.
ENABLED YES

UNDER FREQ UNLOAD  Confirms the entry.


ENABLED YES

OR
UNDER FREQ UNLOAD  Entering NO disables the underfrequency unloading feature.
ENABLED YES

UNDER FREQ UNLOAD 


ENABLED NO Press the Enter key.

UNDER FREQ UNLOAD 


Confirms the entry.
ENABLED NO

FREQUENCY # HZ Displays the present operating frequency and underfrequency


SETPOINT ?.? HZ unloading cut-in point. Enter the desired underfrequency cut-in point
using the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior to
entering the decimal value.
AND
FREQUENCY # HZ
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.
SETPOINT ?.? HZ

FREQUENCY # HZ
SETPOINT #.# HZ
Confirms the entry.

SLOPE  Displays the underfrequency unloading slope (volts-per-cycle). Enter


?.? VOLTS-PER-CYCLE the desired underfrequency unloading slope using the numeric keys.
Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering the decimal value.
AND
SLOPE 
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.
?.? VOLTS-PER-CYCLE

SLOPE 
Confirms the entry.
#.# VOLTS-PER-CYCLE

UNDER FREQ UNLOAD 


ENABLED N/Y Returns the user to the underfrequency unloading heading.

122 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 11—Voltage Regulator, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

REACTIVE DROOP  Displays the reactive droop selection (yes or no). See 2.8.11 Menu
ENABLED N/Y 11—Voltage Regulator for information regarding reactive droop.

REACTIVE DROOP 
ENABLED NO
Entering YES enables the reactive droop feature.

REACTIVE DROOP 
Press the Enter key.
ENABLED YES

REACTIVE DROOP 
ENABLED YES
Confirms the entry.

OR
REACTIVE DROOP 
Entering NO disables the reactive droop feature.
ENABLED YES

REACTIVE DROOP 
Press the Enter key.
ENABLED NO

REACTIVE DROOP  Confirms the entry.


ENABLED NO

.8 PF RATED LOAD  Displays the reactive (voltage) droop as a percentage of the rated
VOLTAGE DROOP ?.?% voltage at rated load. When required, enter the desired reactive droop
using the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior to
entering the decimal value.
AND
.8 PF RATED LOAD 
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.
VOLTAGE DROOP ?.?%

.8 PF RATED LOAD 
Confirms the entry.
VOLTAGE DROOP #.#%

REACTIVE DROOP 
ENABLED N/Y Returns the user to reactive droop selection heading.

REGULATOR GAIN ADJ Displays the generator set voltage regulator gain adjustment. When
GAIN # required, use the numeric keys to enter the desired gain value.

REGULATOR GAIN ADJ


Confirms the entry.
GAIN #

ANALOG VOLT ADJUST Displays current status and provides a means to change the status.
ENABLED? Y/N

RESET REGULATOR
Displays the reset regulator defaults selection.
DEFAULTS?

RESET REGULATOR When required, use the YES key to reset the regulator defaults.
YES DEFAULTS?

RESET REGULATOR
DEFAULTS? Confirms the entry.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 123


2.8.12 Menu 12—Calibration Note: The user must scale the analog input value in
order to calculate the low/high warning and
Menu 12 provides the calibration of the voltage and shutdown analog values based on a 0--5 VDC
current sensing logic. Changing the system voltage or scale.
replacing the main logic control circuit board requires a
calibration adjustment. Note: ECM engines have user-defined analog inputs
A01--A07. Non-ECM engines have user-defined
The user must enable the programming mode to edit the analog inputs A03--A07 where analog inputs A01
display. and A02 are reserved for the engine coolant
temperature A01 and oil pressure A02 displays.
Connect a meter with a minimum accuracy of 1% to
the generator set output leads to calibrate the Note: Analog input A07 is the voltage adjustment for
voltage-sensing logic. Configure the generator set paralleling applications only. This input adjusts
controller for the system operating configuration using the input up or down from the value entered in
Menu 7—Generator System. Adjust the generator set Menu 11, Voltage Regulator. Calibration is not
voltage using Menu 11—Voltage Regulator, when necessary.
required and adjust the frequency at the generator set
governor before making calibration adjustments. Note: Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering
decimal values where necessary.
Reduce the voltage regulator gain using Menu 11,
Voltage Regulator until the voltage is stable prior to Note: Changes to the generator set system parameters
calibration. causes a CHECK CALIBRATION display
message. If the generator set system
parameters are changed, verify the controller
display calibration by comparing the results to a
known measured value.

Menu 12—Calibration
(Scale AC Analog Inputs)
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 12


Press the Enter key.

MENU 12 Displays the menu number and name.


CALIBRATION

SCALE AC ANALOG
Displays the scale AC analog inputs heading.
INPUTS

GEN VOLTAGE LN
Displays the generator set voltage line-to-neutral heading.

GEN L1-L0 V # Note: The generator set must be running for the following steps.
CALIB REF ?.?
Measure the generator set output voltage for single and three-phase
models between L1-L0 using a voltmeter and enter the result using
the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering the
decimal value.
AND
GEN L1-L0 V #
CALIB REF ?.?
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

GEN L1-L0 V #
Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF #.#

124 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 12—Calibration, continued
(Scale AC Analog Inputs)
Key
Entry Display Description

GEN L2-L0 V # Measure the generator set output voltage for three-phase models
CALIB REF ?.? between L2-L0 using a voltmeter and enter the result using the
numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering the
decimal value.
AND
GEN L2-L0 V # Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.
CALIB REF ?.?

GEN L2-L0 V #
Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF #.#

GEN L3-L0 V # Three-Phase Models only. Measure the generator set output voltage
CALIB REF ?.? for three-phase models between L3-L0 using a voltmeter and enter
the result using the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior
to entering the decimal value.
AND
GEN L3-L0 V #
CALIB REF ?.?
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

GEN L3-L0 V #
Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF #

GEN VOLTAGE LN
Returns the user to the generator set voltage line-to-neutral heading.

GEN VOLTAGE LL
Displays the generator set voltage line-to-line heading.

GEN L1-L2 V # Note: The generator set must be running for the following steps.
CALIB REF ?.?
Measure the generator set output voltage for single and three-phase
models between L1-L2 using a voltmeter and enter the result using
the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering the
decimal value.
AND
GEN L1-L2 V #
CALIB REF ?.?
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

GEN L1-L2 V #
Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF #.#

GEN L2-L3 V # Three-Phase Models only. Measure the generator set output
CALIB REF ?.? voltage for three-phase models between L2-L3 using a voltmeter and
enter the result using the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key
prior to entering the decimal value.
Note: The generator set must be running for the following steps.
AND
GEN L2-L3 V #
CALIB REF ?.?
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

GEN L2-L3 V #
Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF #.#

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 125


Menu 12—Calibration, continued
(Scale AC Analog Inputs)
Key
Entry Display Description

GEN L3-L1 V # Three-Phase Models only. Measure the generator set output voltage
CALIB REF ?.? for three-phase models between L3-L1 using a voltmeter and enter
the result using the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior
to entering the decimal value.
AND
GEN L3-L1 V #
CALIB REF ?.?
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

GEN L3-L1 V #
Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF #

CALIBRATE REGULATOR? Displays the calibrate regulator selection.


Y/N Note: After changing the meter calibration the voltage regulator
should be calibrated—enter YES.
CALIBRATE REGULATOR?
YES
When required, use the YES key to calibrate the voltage regulator.

CALIBRATE REGULATOR?
Confirms the entry.
Y/N

GEN VOLTAGE LL
Returns the user to the generator set line-to-line voltage heading.

GEN AMPS
Displays the generator set amps heading.

GEN L1 AMPS # Note: The generator set must be running for the following steps.
CALIB REF ?.? Measure the generator set output current for single- and three-phase
models at L1 using an AC ammeter and enter the result using the
numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering the
decimal value.
AND
GEN L1 AMPS # Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.
CALIB REF ?.? Note: The current can be changed by 50% of the present reading. If
the current calibration is significantly different, small incremental steps
may be required.
GEN L1 AMPS #
CALIB REF # Confirms the entry.

GEN L2 AMPS # Measure the generator set output current for three-phase models at
CALIB REF ?.? L2 using an AC ammeter and enter the result using the numeric keys.
Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering the decimal value.
AND
GEN L2 AMPS # Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.
CALIB REF ?.? Note: The current can be changed by 50% of the present reading. If
the current calibration is significantly different, small incremental steps
may be required.
GEN L2 AMPS # Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF #

126 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 12—Calibration, continued
(Scale AC Analog Inputs)
Key
Entry Display Description

GEN L3 AMPS # Three-Phase Models only. Measure the generator set output current
CALIB REF ?.? for three-phase models at L3 using an AC ammeter and enter the
result using the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior to
entering the decimal value.
AND
GEN L3 AMPS # Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.
CALIB REF ?.? Note: The current can be changed by 50% of the present reading. If
the current calibration is significantly different, small incremental steps
may be required.
GEN L3 AMPS #
CALIB REF #
Confirms the entry.

GEN AMPS
Returns the user to the generator set amps heading.

BUS VOLTAGE LN
Displays the bus voltage line-to-neutral voltage heading.

BUS L1--L0 V # Note: There must be voltage on the bus side of the paralleling breaker
CALIB REF (PARALLEL) ?.? and the generator sets must be running for the following steps.
Paralleling Applications. Measure the bus voltage between L1-L0
using a voltmeter and enter the result using the numeric keys. Press
the Menu Right  key prior to entering the decimal value.
NOTE: Wait about 15 seconds for filtering to settle out before
entering new values.
AND
BUS L1-L0 V #
CALIB REF (PARALLEL) ?.?
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

BUS L1-L0 V #
Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF (PARALLEL) #

BUS L3--L0 V # Note: There must be voltage on the bus side of the paralleling breaker
CALIB REF (PARALLEL) ?.? and the generator sets must be running for the following steps.
Paralleling Applications. Measure the bus voltage for three-phase
models between L3-L0 using a voltmeter and enter the result using
the numeric keys. Press the Menu Right  key prior to entering the
decimal value. NOTE: Wait about 15 seconds for filtering to settle out
AND before entering new values.
BUS L3-L0 V #
CALIB REF (PARALLEL) ?.?
Use the numeric keys to enter the decimal value. Press the Enter key.

BUS L3-L0 V #
Confirms the entry.
CALIB REF (PARALLEL) #

BUS VOLTAGE LN
Returns the user to the bus voltage line-to-neutral voltage heading.

RESTORE DEFAULTS? Y/N


Displays the restore defaults selection.

RESTORE DEFAULTS? YES When required, enter YES to enter the restore calibration default
menus. Press the Enter key.

RESTORE DEFAULTS? Y/N


Confirms the entry.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 127


Menu 12—Calibration, continued
(Scale AC Analog Inputs)
Key
Entry Display Description

RESTORE GEN Displays the restore generator voltage calibration defaults selection.
VOLTAGE DEFAULTS? When required, enter YES to activate the restore voltage calibration
defaults setting. Note: Press the Menu Down key to continue to the
next selection if no default resetting is needed.
RESTORE GEN
VOLTAGE DEFAULTS YES
Press the Enter key.

RESTORE GEN
Confirms the entry.
VOLTAGE DEFAULTS

RESTORE GEN Displays the restore generator amperage calibration defaults


AMPERAGE DEFAULTS? selection. When required, enter YES to activate the restore amperage
calibration defaults setting. Note: Press the Menu Down key to
continue to the next selection if no default resetting is needed.
RESTORE GEN
AMPERAGE DEFAULTS YES
Press the Enter key.

RESTORE GEN
Confirms the entry.
AMPERAGE DEFAULTS

RESTORE BUS Displays the restore bus voltage calibration defaults selection. When
VOLTAGE DEFAULTS? required, enter YES to activate the restore the bus voltage calibration
defaults setting. Note: Press the Menu Down key to continue to the
next selection if no default resetting is needed.
RESTORE BUS
VOLTAGE DEFAULTS YES
Press the Enter key.

RESTORE BUS
Confirms the entry.
VOLTAGE DEFAULTS

RESTORE ALL CALIB Displays the restore all calibration defaults selection. When required,
DEFAULTS? enter YES to activate the restore all calibration defaults setting. Note:
Press the Menu Down key to continue to the next selection if no
default resetting is needed.
RESTORE ALL CALIB
DEFAULTS YES
Press the Enter key.

RESTORE ALL CALIB


Confirms the entry.
DEFAULTS

RESTORE DEFAULTS? Y/N


Returns the user to the generator set voltage line-to-neutral heading.

128 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 12—Calibration, continued
(Scale Aux. Analog Inputs)
No calibration is available for inputs A01--A02 for
non-ECM engines.
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--15


Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 12


Press the Enter key.

MENU 12 Displays the menu number and name.


CALIBRATION

SCALE AC ANALOG
Displays the scale AC analog inputs heading.
INPUTS

SCALE AUX. ANALOG 


Displays the scale auxiliary analog inputs heading.
INPUTS

ZERO AUX. ANALOG Gives the user the option to calibrate the auxiliary analog inputs for
INPUTS? zero input signals. Note: ECM engines have inputs A01--A07 and
non-ECM engines have inputs A03--A07. A07 may be used for analog
voltage adjust.

ZERO AUX. ANALOG When required, enter YES to activate the auto-zero auxiliary analog
INPUTS? YES inputs feature. Press the Enter key.

ZERO AUX. ANALOG


Confirms the entry.
INPUTS? YES

ANALOG 01 # Displays the analog 01 and scale value 1 settings. Use the numeric
SCALE VALUE 1 ? keys to enter the minimum value based on the previously calculated
5 VDC analog input value.

SCAL 1 #--#.#V Note: Press the Menu Right  key to review both the scale value 1
SCAL 2 #--#.#V and scale value 2 settings any time during the setup procedure.

ANALOG 01 # Displays analog 01 and scale value 2 settings. Use the numeric keys
SCALE VALUE 2 ? to enter the maximum value based on the previously calculated
5 VDC analog value.

SCALE AUX. ANALOG 


Returns the user to the scale auxiliary analog inputs heading.
INPUTS

ZERO AUX. ANALOG


INPUTS?
Press the down arrow to go to the desired analog XX.

ANALOG XX # Displays scale auxiliary analog inputs 01 to 07.


SCALE VALUE 1 ? Note: Press the down arrow to scroll through the additional analog
auxiliary inputs 02--07.
Note: Press the down arrow to scroll through the additional analog
scale value 1 and value 2 for each analog selection.
Note: Press the right arrow at each analog auxiliary input that
provides display of the scale 1 and scale 2 voltage settings.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 129


2.8.13 Menu 13—Communications Modbusr is a registered trademark of Schneider
Electric.
Menu 13 enables communication with the controller for
monitoring or controlling the generator set using The user must enable local programming to make
Modbusr RTU protocols. Local and remote access is changes in Menu 13; see Section 2.8.14. After the
available using single or multiple connections. Use the communications settings have been appropriately
local programming mode to edit displays in this menu. entered, set the programming mode to remote to utilize
Use the LAN (local area network) to gain remote access remote programming.
to multiple devices/addresses. Use the monitor
software operation manual when accessing this menu, The dial out menu is visible only when the dial out
programming from a remote location, and determining feature is available.
address and system identification information.
Protocol Port Type

The user must enable the programming mode to edit the P18 RS-232 Modbus Monitor III
Modbus 0
display. P20 RS-485 Modbus to RSA or Ethernet converter
RS-485 Modbus to DPS, SiteTech software, or
See Section 2.6 for descriptions of the different types of Modbus 1 P19
Ethernet converter
connections. See Figure 2-22 for connection ports.
Figure 2-22 Communication Ports

Menu 13—Communications
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 13


Press the Enter key.

MENU 13
COMMUNICATIONS Displays the menu number and name.

PROTOCOL 
MODBUS 0
Displays the protocol heading.

MODBUS ONLINE Y/N


Displays the online selection.

MODBUS ONLINE NO Entering YES activates the online selection.

MODBUS ONLINE YES Press the Enter key.

MODBUS ONLINE YES


Confirms the entry.

OR
MODBUS ONLINE YES Entering NO deactivates the online selection.

MODBUS ONLINE NO Press the Enter key.

MODBUS ONLINE NO
Confirms the entry.

130 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 13—Communications, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

CONNECTION TYPE  Displays the user-defined connection type. Press the Down arrow key
(USER DEFINED) Y/N if the correct connection type is displayed. If the desired connection
type is not displayed, press the Right arrow key until the desired
connection type appears.
CONNECTION TYPES
SINGLE Y/N Entering YES selects the connection type shown. Note: Selecting
CONVERTOR N/Y one connection type deselects any previously selected choice.

CONNECTION TYPE  Press the Enter key.


(USER DEFINED) YES

CONNECTION TYPE 
(USER DEFINED) YES
Confirms the entry.

PRIMARY PORT  Displays the user-defined primary port subheading. Press the Down
(USER DEFINED) Y/N arrow key if the correct primary port type is displayed. If the desired
primary port type is not displayed, press the Right arrow key until the
desired primary port type appears.

PRIMARY PORTS Entering YES selects the primary port shown. Note: Selecting one
RS-232 (P18) (SINGLE) Y/N primary port deselects any previously selected choice.
RS-485 (P20) (MULTIPLE) N/Y

PRIMARY PORT  Press the Enter key.


(USER DEFINED) YES

PRIMARY PORT 
Confirms the entry.
(USER DEFINED) YES

ADDRESS ? Displays the LAN connection address number. Use the numeric keys
(LAN Connections) to enter the desired address 1--128. Use one address number per
unit and use consecutive numbers. Individual addresses are
necessary for the software to call up the desired unit.
ADDRESS #
Confirms the entry.
(LAN Connections)

BAUD RATE  Displays the user-defined baud rate selection. Press the Down arrow
(USER DEFINED) Y/N key if the correct baud rate is displayed. If the desired baud rate is not
displayed, press the Right arrow key until the desired baud rate
appears.
BAUD RATES
Entering YES selects the baud rate shown. Note: Selecting one baud
9600 Y/N
rate deselects any previously selected choice.
19200 N/Y

PROTOCOL 
Returns the user to the protocol Modbus 0 heading.
MODBUS 0

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 131


Menu 13—Communications, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

PROTOCOL 
MODBUS 1
Displays the Modbus protocol heading.

MODBUS ONLINE Y/N


Displays the Modbus online selection (yes or no).

MODBUS ONLINE NO Entering YES activates the online Modbus selection.

MODBUS ONLINE YES


Press the Enter key.

MODBUS ONLINE YES


Confirms the entry.

OR
MODBUS ONLINE YES Entering NO deactivates the online Modbus selection.

MODBUS ONLINE NO Press the Enter key.

MODBUS ONLINE NO
Confirms the entry.

CONNECTION TYPE  Displays the user-defined connection types. Press the Down arrow
(USER DEFINED) Y/N key if the correct connection type is displayed. If the desired
connection type is not displayed, press the Right arrow key until the
desired connection type appears.
CONNECTION TYPES
Entering YES selects the connection type shown. Choices are a
SINGLE Y/N
single or RS-232 to RS-485 convertor. Note: Selecting one
CONVERTOR N/Y
connection type deselects any previously selected choice.

CONNECTION TYPE  Press the Enter key.


(USER DEFINED) YES

CONNECTION TYPE 
Confirms the entry.
(USER DEFINED) YES

PRIMARY PORT  Displays the RS-485 ISO (P19) primary port. Press the YES button to
RS-485 ISO (P19) Y/N select the RS-485 ISO (P19) primary port.

PRIMARY PORT 
Press the Enter key.
RS-485 ISO (P19) YES

PRIMARY PORT 
RS-485 ISO (P19) Y/N Confirms the entry.

ADDRESS ? Displays the address number. Use the numeric keys to enter the
desired address 1--128. Use one address number per unit and use
consecutive numbers. Individual addresses are necessary for the
software to call up the desired unit.
ADDRESS #
Confirms the entry.

132 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 13—Communications, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

BAUD RATE  Displays the user-defined baud rate. Press the Down arrow key if the
(USER DEFINED) Y/N correct baud rate is displayed. If the desired baud rate is not
displayed, press the Right arrow key until the desired baud rate
appears.
BAUD RATES
9600 N/Y Entering YES selects the baud rate shown. Note: Selecting one baud
19200 N/Y rate deselects any previously selected choice.

BAUD RATE  Press the Enter key.


(USER DEFINED) YES

BAUD RATE 
Confirms the entry.
(USER DEFINED) YES

PROTOCOL 
Returns the user to the protocol Modbus 1 heading.
MODBUS 1

PROTOCOL  Displays the protocol dial out heading. NOTE: The dial out menu is
DIAL OUT visible only when the dial out feature is available.

ENABLED Y/N Displays the dial out enabled selection. Press the YES key to initiate
the dial out feature.

ENABLED YES Press the Enter key.

ENABLED Y/N
Confirms the entry.

TARGET  Displays the pager selection. Press the YES key to select pager as
PAGER Y/N the dial out target.

TARGET  Press the Enter key.


PAGER YES

TARGET 
Confirms the entry.
PAGER Y/N

PHONE NUMBER Displays the pager phone number selection. Press the numeric keys
???--???--???? as needed.

PHONE NUMBER Press the Enter key.


###--###--####

PHONE NUMBER
Confirms the entry.
###--###--####

PHONE DELAY ? Displays the pager phone delay in seconds. Press the numeric keys
as needed.

PHONE DELAY #
Press the Enter key.

PHONE DELAY #
Confirms the entry.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 133


Menu 13—Communications, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

PIN NUMBER ? Displays the pager pin number (10 characters max.). Press the
numeric keys as needed.

PIN NUMBER #
Press the Enter key.

PIN NUMBER #
Confirms the entry.

PIN DELAY ? Displays the pager pin delay in seconds. Press the numeric keys as
needed.

PIN DELAY #
Press the Enter key.

PIN DELAY #
Confirms the entry.

TARGET  Displays the pager selection. Press the right arrow key to access the
PAGER Y/N modem selection as the dial out target.

TARGET  Displays the modem selection. Press the YES key to select modem
MODEM Y/N as the dial out target. Press the Enter key.

TARGET 
MODEM YES
Press the Enter key.

TARGET 
Confirms the entry.
MODEM Y/N

PHONE NUMBER Displays the modem phone number selection. Press the numeric
???--???--???? keys as needed.

PHONE NUMBER Press the Enter key.


###--###--####

PHONE NUMBER
Confirms the entry.
###--###--####

134 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.14 Menu 14—Programming Mode The user chooses one of three programming modes:

Menu 14 allows altering controller data either locally D Local—using the controller keypad
using the keypad or remotely using a PC or other device. D Remote—using a PC
D Off—no programming is permitted
The user must enter a password (access code) to
enable the programming mode. Enter Yes to one mode to change the other two choices
Local Programming. Local programming is data to No.
alteration using the controller keypad and display. Note: Use the generator set controller to initially set up
Remote Programming. Remote programming is data remote programming. Remote programming is
alteration using devices connected to a communication not allowed from a PC unless the controller is first
port using KBUS or Modbusr including Monitor III set for remote programming using Menu 14.
software. Note: After completing the programming always place
Note: Log into the local programming mode to edit the controller back in the Programming Mode Off
the programming access code. The factory position to prevent inadvertent program changes.
default access code is the number 0. Modbusr is a registered trademark of Schneider
Electric.
Use Menu 14 to change the access code. Record the
new number and give the access code to authorized
individuals only. Should the controller logic not accept
the access code or if the new code number is lost,
contact your local authorized distributor/dealer for
password information.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 135


Menu 14—Programming Mode, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 14


Press the Enter key.

MENU 14 Displays the menu number and name.


PROGRAMMING MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE  Displays the user-defined programming mode. Press the Down
(USER DEFINED) Y/N arrow key if the correct programming mode is displayed. If the
desired programming mode is not displayed, press the Right arrow
key until the desired programming mode appears.
PROGRAMMING MODES
OFF Y/N Entering YES selects the programming mode shown.
LOCAL N/Y Note: Selecting one programming mode deselects any previously
REMOTE N/Y selected choice.

PROGRAMMING MODE 
Press the Enter key.
(USER DEFINED) YES

PROGRAMMING MODE Changing the programming mode requires entering the access code.
ENTER CODE * Enter the access code and press the Enter key.
Note: The factory default access code is the number 0.

PROGRAMMING MODE 
Confirms the entry.
(USER DEFINED) YES

PROGRAMMING MODE  Displays the programming mode and changes the access code.
CHANGE ACCESS CODE Press the Down arrow key if you do not wish to change the access
code. To change the access code, press the Right arrow key.

PROGRAMMING MODE
Enter the old access code and press the Enter key.
ENTER OLD CODE *

PROGRAMMING MODE
Enter the new access code and press the Enter key.
ENTER NEW CODE *

PROGRAMMING MODE 
Confirms the entry.
CHANGE ACCESS CODE

MENU 14
PROGRAMMING MODE
Returns the user to the programming mode heading.

136 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.15 Menu 15—Protective Relays (PR) Menu 15 provides the protective relays for units with
paralleling applications. The settings and time delays
Note: Entering 99.99, where applicable, designates made in this menu provide the shutdown points and
infinite delay and no shutdown. This value respective system event fault displays on the controller.
effectively disables a fault shutdown.

Menu 15—Protective Relays


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 15


Press the Enter key.

MENU 15 Displays the menu number and name.


PROTECTIVE RELAYS

PR OVERVOLTAGE  Displays the overvoltage % of rated value. When required, use the
?% #VAC numeric keys to enter the desired overvoltage % value and press the
Enter key.
PR OVERVOLTAGE 
Displays the new overvoltage % of rated value.
#% #VAC

TIME DELAY  Displays the overvoltage time delay. When required, use the numeric
?SEC keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the Enter key.

TIME DELAY 
Displays the new overvoltage time delay value.
#SEC

PR OVERVOLTAGE 
Returns the user to the overvoltage % value display.
?% #VAC

PR UNDERVOLTAGE  Displays the undervoltage % value. When required, use the numeric
?% #VAC keys to enter the desired undervoltage % value and press the Enter
key.
PR UNDERVOLTAGE 
Displays the new undervoltage % value.
#% #VAC

TIME DELAY  Displays the undervoltage time delay. When required, use the
?SEC numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY 
Displays the new undervoltage time delay value.
#SEC

PR UNDERVOLTAGE 
Returns the user to the undervoltage % value display.
?% #VAC

PR OVERFREQUENCY  Displays the overfrequency % value. When required, use the numeric
?% #HZ keys to enter the desired overfrequency % value and press the Enter
key.
PR OVERFREQUENCY 
Displays the new overfrequency % value.
#% #HZ

TIME DELAY  Displays the overfrequency time delay. When required, use the
?SEC numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY 
Displays the new overfrequency time delay value.
#SEC

PR OVERFREQUENCY 
Returns the user to the overfrequency % value display.
?% #VAC

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 137


Menu 15—Protective Relays, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

PR UNDERFREQUENCY  Displays the underfrequency % value. When required, use the


?% #HZ numeric keys to enter the desired underfrequency % value and press
the Enter key.
PR UNDERFREQUENCY 
Displays the new underfrequency % value.
#% #HZ

TIME DELAY  Displays the underfrequency time delay. When required, use the
?SEC numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY 
Displays the new underfrequency time delay value.
#SEC

PR UNDERFREQUENCY 
Returns the user to the underfrequency % value display.
?% #HZ

PR REVERSE POWER  Displays the reverse power % value. When required, use the numeric
?% #KW keys to enter the desired reverse power % value and press the Enter
key.
PR REVERSE POWER 
Displays the new reverse power % value.
#% #KW

TIME DELAY  Displays the reverse power time delay. When required, use the
?SEC numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY 
Displays the new reverse power time delay value.
#SEC

PR REVERSE POWER 
Returns the user to the reverse power % value display.
?% #KW

SD REVERSE POWER  Displays the reverse power shutdown % value. When required, use
?% #KW the numeric keys to enter the desired reverse power shutdown %
value and press the Enter key.
SD REVERSE POWER 
Displays the new reverse power shutdown % value.
#% #KW

TIME DELAY  Displays the reverse power shutdown time delay. When required, use
?SEC the numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY 
Displays the new reverse power shutdown time delay value.
#SEC

SD REVERSE POWER 
Returns the user to the reverse power shutdown % value display.
?% #KW

PR OVER POWER  Displays the over power % value. When required, use the numeric
?% #KW keys to enter the desired over power % value and press the Enter key.

PR OVER POWER 
Displays the new over power % value.
#% #KW

TIME DELAY  Displays the over power time delay. When required, use the numeric
?SEC keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the Enter key.

TIME DELAY 
Displays the new over power time delay value.
#SEC

PR OVER POWER 
Returns the user to the over power % value display.
?% #KW

138 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 15—Protective Relays, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

SD OVER POWER  Displays the over power shutdown % value. When required, use the
?% #KW numeric keys to enter the desired over power shutdown % value and
press the Enter key.
SD OVER POWER 
Displays the new over power shutdown % value.
#% #KW

TIME DELAY  Displays the over power shutdown time delay. When required, use
?SEC the numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY 
Displays the new over power shutdown time delay value.
#SEC

SD OVER POWER 
Returns the user to the over power shutdown % value display.
?% #KW

PR LOSS OF FIELD  Displays the loss of field % value. When required, use the numeric
?% #KVAR keys to enter the desired loss of field % value and press the Enter key.

PR LOSS OF FIELD 
Displays the new loss of field % value.
#% #KVAR

TIME DELAY  Displays the loss of field time delay. When required, use the numeric
?SEC keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the Enter key.

TIME DELAY 
Displays the new loss of field time delay value.
#SEC

PR LOSS OF FIELD 
Returns the user to the loss of field % value display.
?% #KVAR

SD LOSS OF FIELD  Displays the loss of field shutdown % value. When required, use the
?% #KVAR numeric keys to enter the desired loss of field % value and press the
Enter key.
SD LOSS OF FIELD 
Displays the new loss of field shutdown % value.
#% #KVAR

TIME DELAY  Displays the loss of field shutdown time delay. When required, use
?SEC the numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY 
Displays the new loss of field shutdown time delay value.
#SEC

SD LOSS OF FIELD 
Returns the user to the loss of field shutdown % value display.
?% #KVAR

PR OVER CURRENT VR  Displays the over current with voltage restraint (VR) % value. When
?% #AMPS required, use the numeric keys to enter the desired over current %
value and press the Enter key.
PR OVER CURRENT VR 
Displays the new over current % value.
#% #AMPS

TIME DELAY  Displays the over current time delay. When required, use the numeric
?SEC keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the Enter key.

TIME DELAY 
Displays the new over current time delay value.
#SEC

PR OVER CURRENT VR 
Returns the user to the over current % value display.
?% #AMPS

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 139


Menu 15—Protective Relays, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

SD OVER CURRENT VR  Displays the over current shutdown with voltage restraint (VR) %
?% #AMPS value. When required, use the numeric keys to enter the desired over
current shutdown % value and press the Enter key.
SD OVER CURRENT VR 
Displays the new over current shutdown % value.
#% #AMPS

TIME DELAY  Displays the over current shutdown time delay. When required, use
?SEC the numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value and press the
Enter key.
TIME DELAY 
#SEC Displays the new over current shutdown time delay value.

SD OVER CURRENT VR  Returns the user to the over current shutdown % value display.
?% #AMPS

TIME DELAY MIN:SEC Displays the breaker trip to shutdown time delay value. When
BRKR TRIP TO SD ?.? required, use the numeric keys to enter the desired time delay value
and press the Enter key.
TIME DELAY MIN:SEC
Displays the new time delay value.
BRKR TRIP TO SD #.#

MENU 15 Returns the user to the protective relays heading.


PROTECTIVE RELAYS

2.8.16 Menu 16—Paralleling Menu


Menu 16 provides the necessary paralleling menu for or not, by showing On or Off after the selection (DIGIN:
units with paralleling applications. ON or DIGIN: OFF).

The Reactive Droop Enable setting in Menu 16 is also For Synch Mode (Synch Mode in Auto or Synch Mode in
reflected in Menu 11, Voltage Regulator. Select Run), there are similar options with four choices: Off,
SFWR_OFF, Menu 11 shows Reactive Droop Enabled Auto, Test/Check, and Permissive. Again, these
No. For any other setting, Menu 11 shows Reactive choices can be selected as a software setting (SFWR:
Droop Enabled Yes. Select DIGIN allows the input to be OFF, SFWR: AUTO, SFWR: TEST/CHECK, or SFWR:
activated by the designated digital input. PERMISSIVE) for fixed settings or controls being
manipulated through communications; or DIGIN, (Off
DIGIN is the hardware auxiliary digital input. SFWR is a Auto, Test/Check, or Permissive) for applications using
fixed, an override, or software controlled setting. digital control Input/Output (I/O).
There are several control inputs used for customizing or KVAR Control and PF Control are mutually exclusive. If
characterizing the behavior of the Digital Paralleling either one is set up to SFWR_ON or DIGIN, the other will
System (DPS). Most of these are available for automatically change to SFWR_OFF.
configuration through Menu16 (Control Input Settings).
There are three selections available for most of these PF Control has priority over KVAR Control and will
selections (except Synch Mode in Auto, and Synch default to DIGIN. Should both control variables be set to
Mode in Run), software on (SFWR: ON), software off SFWR_OFF, PF Control will be used when KVAR/PF
(SFWR: OFF), or DIGIN. Use of the software on/off Control is required. This would occur when the
settings is used when a particular input will not change. KVAR/PF Control Enable is set to SFWR_ON, when set
Another application could include an external control to DIGIN and the designated input activated, or when
device that changes the input (on or off) over Modbusr the utility breaker is closed.
communications. The digital input selection is intended
for use with external devices and discrete control signals Modbusr is a registered trademark of Schneider
or with manual switches. When the input is set for digital Electric.
control, the display indicates whether the input is active

140 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 16


Press the Enter key.

MENU 16 Displays the menu number and name.


PARALLELING MENU

PGEN SETTINGS 
Displays the paralleling generator set (PGEN) settings menu.

GENERATOR ID ? Displays the generator set identification number choice. When


required, use the numeric keys to enter the desired identification and
press the Enter key.
GENERATOR ID # Displays the generator set identification number selection.

NUMBER OF NODES ON BUS? Displays the number of generator sets paralleled on the bus. When
required, use the numeric keys to enter the desired number and press
the Enter key.
NUMBER OF NODES ON BUS#
Displays the number of generator sets paralleled on the bus.

GENERATOR ID ?
Returns the user to the generator set identification number display.

PGEN SETTINGS  Returns the user to the paralleling generator set (PGEN) settings
display.

SYNCH PARAMS 
Displays the synchronizing parameters adjustments.
ADJUST

VOLTS MATCH WINDOW  Displays the voltage match window. Use the numeric keys as needed
^ #.# +/-- ?.? % V to change the % volts value. Press Enter.

VOLTS MATCH WINDOW 


Displays the new value for volts match window.
^ #.# +/-- #.# % V

VOLTS MATCH GAIN  Displays the voltage match gain. Use the numeric keys as needed to
^ #.# ?.?? change the volts match gain value. Press Enter.

VOLTS MATCH GAIN  Displays the new value for volts match gain.
^ #.# #.##

VOLTS MATCH RESET  Displays the voltage match reset. Use the numeric keys as needed to
^ #.# ?.? change the value. Press Enter.

VOLTS MATCH RESET  Displays the new value for volts match reset.
^ #.# #.#

SYNCH PARAMS  Returns the user to the synchronizing parameters adjustment display.
ADJUST

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 141


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

VOLTS MATCH WINDOW  Returns the user to the voltage match window.
^ #.# +/-- #.# % V

SYNC FREQ WINDOW  Displays the sync frequency window. Use the numeric keys as
^ #.# +/-- ?.? % HZ needed to change the % Hz value. Press Enter.

SYNC FREQ WINDOW 


Displays the new value for sync frequency window.
^ #.# +/-- #.# % HZ

FREQ MATCH GAIN  Displays the frequency match gain. Use the numeric keys as needed
^ #.# ?.?? to change the frequency match gain value. Press Enter.

FREQ MATCH GAIN 


Displays the new value for frequency match gain.
^ #.# #.##

SYNC FREQ WINDOW 


Returns the user to the synchronizing frequency window.
^ #.# +/-- #.# % HZ

PHASE MATCH WINDOW  Displays the phase match window. Use the numeric keys as needed
^ #.# +/-- ?.? DEG to change the degree value. Press Enter.

PHASE MATCH WINDOW 


Displays the new value for the phase match window.
^ #.# +/-- #.# DEG

PHASE MATCH GAIN  Displays the phase match gain. Use the numeric keys as needed to
^ #.# ?.?? change the phase match gain value. Press Enter.

PHASE MATCH GAIN 


Displays the new value for the phase match gain.
^ #.# #.##

PHASE MATCH RESET  Displays the phase match reset. Use the numeric keys as needed to
^ #.# ?.? change the value. Press Enter.

PHASE MATCH RESET  Displays the new value for the phase match reset.
^ #.# #.#

PHASE MATCH WINDOW 


Returns the user to the phase match window display.
^ #.# +/-- #.# DEG

DWELL TIME  Displays dwell time. Use the numeric keys as needed to change the
?.? SEC seconds value. Press Enter.

DWELL TIME 
#.# SEC
Displays the new value for the dwell time.

FIRST ON CLOSE TD  Displays the first on close time delay. Use the numeric keys as
?.? SEC needed to change the seconds value. Press Enter.

FIRST ON CLOSE TD  Displays the new value for the first on close time delay.
#.# SEC

FAIL TO SYNC TIME DELAY  Displays the fail to synchronize time delay. Use the numeric keys as
? SEC needed to change the seconds value. Press Enter.

FAIL TO SYNC TIME DELAY  Displays the new value for the fail to synchronize time delay.
# SEC

VOLT_FREQ OK TIMER  Displays the voltage frequency okay timer. Use the numeric keys as
?.? SEC needed to change the seconds value. Press Enter.

142 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

VOLT_FREQ OK TIMER 
Displays the new value for the voltage frequency okay timer.
#.# SEC

DWELL TIME 
#.# SEC
Returns the user to the dwell time display.

VOLTS MATCH WINDOW  Returns the user to the voltage match window. Press the Right Arrow
^ #.# +/-- #.# % V Key three times.

(press SYNCH PARAMS 


Returns the user to the synchronizing parameters adjustment display.
3 times) ADJUST

MANUAL SYNCH CONTROL 


Displays manual synchronizing control and present synching
parameters (volts, Hz, and phase).
PHASE ROTATION  Displays phase rotation.
BUS ABC / GEN ABC

VOLTAGE ADJ 3 PH  Displays the voltage adjustment values for the generator set and bus
BUS # / GEN ? voltages. Press the (+) button to raise or (--) button to lower as
needed to change generator volts manually.
VOLTAGE ADJ 3 PH  Displays the new generator set voltage adjustment value.
BUS # / GEN #

FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT  Displays the frequency adjustment values for the generator set and
BUS #.## / GEN ?.?? bus. Press the (+) button to raise or (--) button to lower as needed to
change generator frequency manually.
FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT 
BUS #.## / GEN #.##
Displays the new generator set frequency adjustment value.

PHASE ADJUST  Displays the phase adjustment value.


VERY FAST #

SPEED BIAS VOLT BIAS Displays the speed and voltage bias values.
#.## #.##

MANUAL SYNCH CONTROL 


Returns the user to the manual synchronizing control display.

CONTROL INPUT  Displays the control input settings. DIGIN is a hardware auxiliary
SETTINGS digital input. SFWR is a fixed, an override, or software controlled
setting.

FIRST ON ENABLE  Displays the user defined first on enable status. Note: The first
(USER DEFINED) display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down arrow key to
move to the next control variable, if the desired selection is shown;
otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
FIRST ON ENABLE 
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)

FIRST ON ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

FIRST ON ENABLE 
Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 143


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

LOAD RAMP HOLD ENABLE  Displays the user defined load ramp hold enable status. Note: The
(USER DEFINED) first display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down arrow key
to move to the next control variable, if the desired selection is shown;
otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
LOAD RAMP HOLD ENABLE 
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)

LOAD RAMP HOLD ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

LOAD RAMP HOLD ENABLE 


Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

SYNC MODE IN AUTO  Displays the user defined sync mode in auto status. Note: The first
(USER DEFINED) display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down arrow key to
move to the next control variable, if the desired selection is shown;
otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
SYNC MODE IN AUTO  Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF) appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)
SFWR AUTO
SFWR: TEST/CHECK (OFF/ON)
SFWR: SUBMISSIVE (OFF/ON)

SYNC MODE IN AUTO  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

SYNC MODE IN AUTO 


(USER DEFINED)
Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.

SYNC MODE IN RUN  Displays the user defined sync mode in run status. Note: The first
(USER DEFINED) display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down arrow key to
move to the next control variable, if the desired selection is shown;
otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
SYNC MODE IN RUN  Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF) appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)
SFWR AUTO
SFWR: TEST/CHECK (OFF/ON)
SFWR: SUBMISSIVE (OFF/ON)

SYNC MODE IN RUN  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

SYNC MODE IN RUN 


Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

KW BASELOAD CTL ENBL  Displays the user defined kW base load control enable status. Note:
(USER DEFINED) The first display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down
arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the desired selection
is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
KW BASELOAD CTL ENBL 
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
SFWR: (ON/OFF) appears.

KW BASELOAD CTL ENBL  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

KW BASELOAD CTL ENBL 


(USER DEFINED)
Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.

144 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

KW RAMP HOLD  Displays the user defined kW ramp hold status. Note: The first
(USER DEFINED) display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down arrow key to
move to the next control variable, if the desired selection is shown;
otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
KW RAMP HOLD 
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
SFWR: (ON/OFF)
appears.

KW RAMP HOLD  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

KW RAMP HOLD 
Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

FREQ TRIM ENABLE  Displays the user defined frequency trim enable status. Note: The
(USER DEFINED) first display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down arrow key
to move to the next control variable, if the desired selection is shown;
otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
FREQ TRIM ENABLE 
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
SFWR: (ON/OFF)
appears.

FREQ TRIM ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

FREQ TRIM ENABLE 


Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

VOLTS TRIM ENABLE  Displays the user defined volts trim enable status. Note: The first
(USER DEFINED) display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down arrow key to
move to the next control variable, if the desired selection is shown;
otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
VOLTS TRIM ENABLE 
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
SFWR: (ON/OFF) appears.

VOLTS TRIM ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

VOLTS TRIM ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED)
Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.

REACT DROOP ENABLE  Displays the user defined reactive droop enable status. See 2.8.16
(USER DEFINED) Menu 16—Paralleling Menus for information regarding reactive droop.
Note: The first display is the current selection/setting. Press the
Down arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the desired
selection is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change
the setting.
REACT DROOP ENABLE 
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
SFWR: (ON/OFF)
appears.

REACT DROOP ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

REACT DROOP ENABLE 


Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 145


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

KW SYSTEM CTL ENABLE  Displays the user defined kW system control enable status. Note:
(USER DEFINED) The first display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down
arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the desired selection
is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
KW SYSTEM CTL ENABLE  Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF) appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)

KW SYSTEM CTL ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

KW SYSTEM CTL ENABLE  Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

VAR/PF SYSTEM CTL EN  Displays the user defined VAR/PF system control enable status.
(USER DEFINED) Note: The first display is the current selection/setting. Press the
Down arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the desired
selection is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change
the setting.
VAR/PF SYSTEM CTL EN  Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF) appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)

VAR/PF SYSTEM CTL EN  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

VAR/PF SYSTEM CTL EN  Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

EXT KW ADJ ENABLE  Displays the user defined external kW adjustment enable status.
(USER DEFINED) Note: The first display is the current selection/setting. Press the
Down arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the desired
selection is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change
the setting.
EXT KW ADJ ENABLE 
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)

EXT KW ADJ ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

EXT KW ADJ ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED)
Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.

EXT VAR/PF ADJ ENABL  Displays the user defined external VAR/PF adjustment enable status.
(USER DEFINED) Note: The first display is the current selection/setting. Press the
Down arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the desired
selection is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change
the setting.
EXT VAR/PF ADJ ENABL  Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF) appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)

EXT VAR/PF ADJ ENABL  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

EXT VAR/PF ADJ ENABL 


Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

146 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

VAR/PF MODE CTL ENABLE  Displays the user defined VAR/PF mode control enable status. Note:
(USER DEFINED) The first display is the current selection/setting. Press the Down
arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the desired selection
is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change the setting.
VAR/PF MODE CTL ENABLE 
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
SFWR: (ON/OFF)
appears.

VAR/PF MODE CTL ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

VAR/PF MODE CTL ENABLE 


(USER DEFINED)
Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.

KVAR CONTROL ENABLE  Displays the user defined kVAR control enable status. See 2.8.16
(USER DEFINED) Menu 16—Paralleling Menus for information regarding kVAR control
enable. Note: The first display is the current selection/setting. Press
the Down arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the desired
selection is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to change
the setting.
KVAR CONTROL ENABLE 
Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
DIGIN: (ON/OFF)
appears.
SFWR: (ON/OFF)

KVAR CONTROL ENABLE  Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED) one choice deselects any previously selected choice..

KVAR CONTROL ENABLE 


Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.
(USER DEFINED)

PF CONTROL ENABLE  Displays the user defined power factor control enable status. See
(USER DEFINED) 2.8.16 Menu 16—Paralleling Menus for information regarding PF
control enable. Note: The first display is the current selection/setting.
Press the Down arrow key to move to the next control variable, if the
desired selection is shown; otherwise, press the Right arrow key to
change the setting.
PF CONTROL ENABLE 
DIGIN: (ON/OFF) Continue pressing the Right arrow key until the desired setting
SFWR: (ON/OFF) appears.

PF CONTROL ENABLE 
Press the Enter key to select the displayed setting. Note: Selecting
(USER DEFINED)
one choice deselects any previously selected choice..
PF CONTROL ENABLE 
(USER DEFINED) Displays the new selection to confirm the entry.

FIRST ON ENABLE 
Returns the user to the first on enable status.
(USER DEFINED)

The “enable” menus are a closed loop display group and do not return the user to the first level
of Menu 16—Paralleling Menu. Follow the instructions on the next page to complete this
menu.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 147


Menu 16—Paralleling Menu, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 16


Press the Enter key.

MENU 16 Displays the menu number and name.


PARALLELING MENU

PGEN SETTINGS 
Displays the paralleling generator set (PGEN) settings menu.

SYNCH PARAMS 
Displays the synchronizing parameters adjustments.
ADJUST

MANUAL SYNCH CONTROL 


Displays manual synchronizing control.

CONTROL INPUT 
SETTINGS
Displays the control input settings.

MENU 16 DEFAULTS Y/N


Displays the menu 16 defaults reset selection (yes or no).

MENU 16 DEFAULTS Y/N Entering YES activates the menu 16 reset selection which resets ALL
Menu 16 defaults.
MENU 16 DEFAULTS YES
Press the Enter key.

MENU 16 DEFAULTS Y/N


Confirms the entry.

OR
MENU 16 DEFAULTS Y/N
Entering NO deactivates the menu 16 default reset selection.
MENU 16 DEFAULTS NO
Press the Enter key.

MENU 16 DEFAULTS Y/N


Confirms the entry.

MENU 16 DEFAULTS Y/N


Returns the user to the menu 16 defaults reset selection.

148 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.17 Menu 17—Load Share Control
Menu 17 provides the necessary load share control
menu for units with paralleling applications.

Menu 17—Load Share Control


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 17


Press the Enter key.

MENU 17 Displays the menu number and name.


LOAD SHARE CONTROL

KW LOAD 
Displays the kW load control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

KW SHARING 
CONTROL PARAMETERS
Displays the kW sharing control parameters.

KW SHARING GAIN  Displays the kW sharing gain. Use the numeric keys as needed to
?.?? change the kW sharing gain value. Press Enter.

KW SHARING GAIN 
Displays the new value for kW sharing gain.
#.##

KW SHARING RESET  Displays the kW sharing reset value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? needed to change the value. Press Enter.

KW SHARING RESET 
Displays the new value for kW sharing reset.
#.##

KW SHARING DEADBAND  Displays the kW sharing deadband value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? % RATED KW needed to change the percentage value. Press Enter.

KW SHARING DEADBAND 
Displays the new value for kW sharing deadband.
#.# % RATED KW

FREQ TRIM GAIN  Displays the frequency trim gain value. Use the numeric keys as
?.?? needed to change the value. Press Enter.

FREQ TRIM GAIN  Displays the new value for the frequency trim gain value.
#.##

FREQ TRIM DEADBAND  Displays the frequency trim deadband value. Use the numeric keys
?.? % ## HZ as needed to change the percentage value. Press Enter.

FREQ TRIM DEADBAND 


Displays the new value for the frequency trim deadband value.
#.# % ## HZ

KW LOAD 
Returns the user to the kW load control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

KW SHARING 
CONTROL PARAMETERS
Returns the user to the kW sharing control parameters.

KW BASE LOAD 
Displays the kW base load control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 149


Menu 17—Load Share Control, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

KW BASE LOAD ADJ  Displays the kW base load adjustment. Use the numeric keys as
?.? % # KW needed to change the % value. Press Enter.

KW BASE LOAD ADJ 


Displays the new value for base load adjustment % value.
#.# % # KW

KW BASE LOAD GAIN  Displays the kW base load gain. Use the numeric keys as needed to
?.?? change the kW base load value. Press Enter.

KW BASE LOAD GAIN 


#.##
Displays the new value for the kW base load gain.

KW BASE LOAD RESET  Displays the kW base load reset. Use the numeric keys as needed to
?.? change the value. Press Enter.

KW BASE LOAD RESET 


Displays the new value for the kW base load reset.
#.#

KW BASE LOAD DEADBAND Displays the kW base load deadband value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? % RATED KW needed to change the percentage value. Press Enter.

KW BASE LOAD DEADBAND


Displays the new value for the kW base load deadband value.
#.# % RATED KW

KW BASE LOAD 
Returns the user to the kW base load control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

KW DROOP 
Displays the kW droop control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

% DROOP AT RATED KW  Displays the % droop at rated kW. Use the numeric keys as needed
?.? % # RPM to change the percentage value. Press Enter.

% DROOP AT RATED KW  Displays the new value for the % droop at rating kW.
#.# % # RPM

KW DROOP 
Returns the user to the kW droop control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

KW RAMP RATES 
Displays the kW ramp rates.

% KW RAMP RATE  Displays the % kW ramp rate. Use the numeric keys as needed to
?.? %/SEC # KW/S change the %/second value. Press Enter.

% KW RAMP RATE 
Displays the new value for the % kW ramp rate.
#.# %/SEC # KW/S]

% KW UP/DOWN RATE  Displays the % kW up/down rate. Use the numeric keys as needed to
?.? %/SEC # KW/S change the %/second value. Press Enter.

% KW UP/DOWN RATE 
Displays the new value for the % kW up/down rate.
#.# %/SEC # KW/S

KW RAMP RATES 
Returns the user to the kW ramp rates.

150 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 17—Load Share Control, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

DISCONNECT 
Displays the disconnect load level.
LOAD LEVEL

DISCONNECT  Displays the % disconnect value. Use the numeric keys as needed to
?.? % # KW change the % value. Press Enter.

DISCONNECT 
#.# % # KW
Displays the new value for the % disconnect value.

DISCONNECT 
Returns the user to the disconnect load level.
LOAD LEVEL

KW SHARING  Returns the user to the kW sharing control parameters. Press the
CONTROL PARAMETERS Right Arrow Key six times.

(press KW LOAD 
Returns the user to the kW load control parameters.
6 times) CONTROL PARAMETERS

KVAR LOAD 
Displays the kVAR load control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

KVAR SHARE  Displays the kVAR sharing control parameters.


CONTROL PARAMETERS

KVAR SHARING GAIN  Displays the kVAR sharing gain value. Use the numeric keys as
?.?? needed to change the value. Press Enter.

KVAR SHARING GAIN 


Displays the new value for the kVAR sharing gain.
#.##

KVAR SHARING RESET  Displays the kVAR sharing reset value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? needed to change the value. Press Enter.

KVAR SHARING RESET 


Displays the new kVAR sharing reset value.
#.#

KVAR SHARE DEADBAND  Displays the kVAR share deadband value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? % RATED KVAR needed to change the % rated kVAR value. Press Enter.

KVAR SHARE DEADBAND  Displays the new value for the kVAR share deadband.
#.# % RATED KVAR

VOLTAGE TRIM GAIN  Displays the voltage trim gain value. Use the numeric keys as needed
?.?? to change the voltage trim gain value. Press Enter.

VOLTAGE TRIM GAIN 


Displays the new value for the voltage trim gain.
#.##

VOLTAGE TRIM DEADBAND  Displays the voltage trim deadband value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? % [# V] needed to change the % value. Press Enter.

VOLTAGE TRIM DEADBAND 


Displays the new value for the voltage trim deadband.
#.# % [# V]

KVAR LOAD 
Returns the user to the kVAR load control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

KVAR SHARE  Returns the user to the kVAR sharing control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 151


Menu 17—Load Share Control, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

KVAR BASE LOAD 


Displays kVAR base load control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

KVAR BASE LOAD  Displays the kVAR base load value. Use the numeric keys as needed
?.? % # KVAR to change the % value. Press Enter.

KVAR BASE LOAD  Displays the new value for the kVAR base load.
#.# % # KVAR

GENERATE KVAR?  Displays the generate/absorb kVAR selection


YES/NO (if NO, ABSORB) (yes=generate/no=absorb).
GENERATE KVAR? 
NO (if NO, ABSORB) Entering YES selects generate kVAR.

GENERATE KVAR? 
Press the Enter key.
YES (if NO, ABSORB)

GENERATE KVAR? 
YES (if NO ABSORB)
Confirms the entry.

OR
GENERATE KVAR? 
YES (if NO, ABSORB) Entering NO selects absorb kVAR.

GENERATE KVAR?  Press the Enter key.


NO (if NO, ABSORB)

GENERATE KVAR?  Confirms the entry.


NO (if NO, ABSORB)

KVAR BASE LOAD GAIN  Displays the kVAR base load gain value. Use the numeric keys as
?.?? needed to change the kVAR base load gain value. Press Enter.

KVAR BASE LOAD GAIN  Displays the new value for the kVAR base load gain.
#.##

KVAR BASE LOAD RESET  Displays the kVAR base load reset value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? needed to change the value. Press Enter.

KVAR BASE LOAD RESET  Displays the new value for the kVAR base load reset.
#.#

KVAR BASE DEADBAND  Displays the kVAR base deadband value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? % RATED KVAR needed to change the % value. Press Enter.

KVAR BASE DEADBAND 


#.# % RATED KVAR
Displays the new value for the kVAR base deadband.

KVAR UP/DOWN RATE  Displays the kVAR up/down rate value. Use the numeric keys as
?.? % RATED KVARS/S needed to change the % value. Press Enter.

KVAR UP/DOWN RATE 


#.# % RATED KVARS/S Displays the new value for the kVAR up/down rate.

KVAR BASE LOAD 


Returns the user to kVAR base load control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

152 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 17—Load Share Control, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

POWER FACTOR 
Displays power factor control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

PF SETTING  Displays the power factor setting value. Use the numeric keys as
?.?? PF needed to change the power factor value. Press Enter.

PF SETTING 
#.## PF Displays the new value for the power factor setting.

LAGGING PF?  Displays the lagging/leading power factor selection


Y/N (if NO, LEADING) (yes=lagging/no=leading).
LAGGING PF? 
NO (if NO, LEADING)
Entering YES selects lagging power factor.

LAGGING PF? 
Press the Enter key.
YES (if NO, LEADING)

LAGGING PF? 
YES (if NO, LEADING)
Confirms the entry.

OR
LAGGING PF? 
YES (if NO, LEADING) Entering NO selects leading power factor.

LAGGING PF?  Press the Enter key.


NO (if NO, LEADING)

LAGGING PF?  Confirms the entry.


NO (if NO, LEADING)

PF CONTROL GAIN  Displays the power factor gain value. Use the numeric keys as
?.??
needed to change the power factor gain value. Press Enter.

PF CONTROL GAIN 
Displays the new value for the power factor gain.
#.##

PF CONTROL RESET  Displays the power factor control reset. Use the numeric keys as
?.? needed to change the value. Press Enter.

PF CONTROL RESET 
Displays the new value for the power factor reset.
#.#

PF CONTROL DEADBAND  Displays the power factor control deadband. Use the numeric keys as
?.?? PF needed to change the power factor control deadband value. Press
Enter.
PF CONTROL DEADBAND 
Displays the new value for the power factor control deadband.
#.## PF

PF UP/DOWN RATE  Displays the power factor up/down rate. Use the numeric keys as
?.??? PF/S needed to change the power factor up/down rate value. Press Enter.

PF UP/DOWN RATE 
Displays the new value for the power factor up/down rate
#.### PF/S

POWER FACTOR 
Returns the user to the power factor control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 153


Menu 17—Load Share Control, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

REACTIVE DROOP 
Displays the reactive droop control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

% VOLTAGE DROOP  Displays the percent of voltage droop at rated load. Use the numeric
AT RATED LOAD ?.? % keys as needed to change the percent value. Press Enter.
% VOLTAGE DROOP 
AT RATED LOAD #.# %
Displays the new value for the percent of voltage droop at rated load.

REACTIVE DROOP 
Returns the user to the reactive droop control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

KVAR SHARE  Returns the user to the kVAR sharing control parameters. Press the
CONTROL PARAMETERS Right Arrow Key six times.

(press KVAR LOAD 


Returns the user to the kVAR load control parameters.
6 times) CONTROL PARAMETERS

CIRCUIT BREAKERS & MISC


Displays the circuit breakers and miscellaneous control parameters.
CONTROL PARAMETERS

BREAKER ENERGIZE TD  Displays the circuit breaker time delay to energize value. Use the
?.? SEC numeric keys as needed to change the seconds value. Press Enter.

BREAKER ENERGIZE TD 
#.# SEC
Displays the new value for the circuit breaker time delay to energize.

BREAKER RECLOSE TD  Displays the circuit breaker time delay to reclose value. Use the
?.? SEC numeric keys as needed to change the seconds value. Press Enter.

BREAKER RECLOSE TD 
#.# SEC
Displays the new value for the circuit breaker time delay to reclose.

BREAKER CLOSE  Displays the circuit breaker number of attempts to close value. Use
ATTEMPTS ? the numeric keys as needed to change the value. Press Enter.

BREAKER CLOSE  Displays the new value for the circuit breaker number of attempts to
ATTEMPTS # close.

CB CURRENT FAULT LIMIT  Displays the circuit breaker current fault limit. Use the numeric keys
?.? % A # AMPS as needed to change the percent value and circuit breaker amp rating.
Press Enter.
CB CURRENT FAULT LIMIT 
Displays the new value for the circuit breaker current fault limit.
#.# % A # AMPS

CB CURRENT FAULT TD  Displays the circuit breaker current fault time delay. Use the numeric
?.? SEC keys as needed to change the seconds value. Press Enter.

CB CURRENT FAULT TD 
Displays the new value for the circuit breaker current fault time delay.
#.# SEC

XFMR PHASE SHIFT  Displays the transformer phase shift value. Use the numeric keys as
?.?? DEG needed to change the degrees value. Press Enter.

XFMR PHASE SHIFT  Displays the new value for the transformer phase shift value.
#.## DEG

BREAKER ENERGIZE TD 
#.# SEC
Returns the user to the circuit breaker time delay to energize.

154 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 17—Load Share Control, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

CIRCUIT BREAKERS & MISC Returns the user to the circuit breakers and miscellaneous control
CONTROL PARAMETERS parameters.

MENU 17 DEFAULTS Displays the menu 17 defaults reset selection. When required, press
NO Yes to reset ALL the menu 17 defaults.

MENU 17 DEFAULTS
Press the Enter key.
YES

MENU 17 DEFAULTS Displays the accepted entry.


NO

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 155


2.8.18 Menu 18—Battery Chargers Menu 18 provides battery charger information and
parameter settings for GM87448, 10 amp battery
WARNING charger. Use this menu to view battery charger metering
information, charge state and identify the battery
charger software version as well as to configure the
battery charger parameters.

Note: This menu is only available for controller firmware


Explosion. version 2.9.0 and above.
Can cause severe injury or death.
Relays in the battery charger Refer to the Battery Charger Operation Manual for
cause arcs or sparks. charger settings, operation instructions, and safety
information.
Locate the battery in a well-ventilated
area. Isolate the battery charger from
explosive fumes. Note: Incorrect charger output system voltage may
cause irreversible damage to the battery and
Battery gases. Explosion can cause severe injury or
abnormal out gassing. Ensure that the battery
death. Incorrect use of the equalize charge state may lead to charger parameters match the battery
hazardous situations. Equalization is ONLY applicable for manufacturer’s specifications before using. In the
flooded lead acid (FLA) type batteries and will damage gel, controller user interface settings, verify that the
absorbed glass mat (AGM), or nickel-cadmium (NiCad) type battery topology and system voltage is set
batteries. In the controller menu or SiteTecht settings, verify correctly for the battery type that is used.
that the battery topology is set correctly for the battery type
used. Do not smoke or permit flames, sparks, or other sources Note: The battery charger menus are designed to work
of ignition to occur near a battery at any time. with charger GM87448. Unless connected to
charger GM87448 through CAN communication,
the battery charger menus, although visible, have
no effect on the battery charger.
Menu 18—Battery Chargers
Menu 18 Displays with Key Entries
Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--15 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 18


Press the Enter key.

MENU 18 Displays the menu number and name.


BATTERY CHARGERS

BATTERY CHARGER 1  BATTERY CHARGER 2  Allows the selection of the battery


charger.

BATTERY CHARGER BATTERY CHARGER BASIC BATTERY CHARGER


METERING CONFIG ADVANCED CONFIG

OUTPUT VOLTAGE # Displays the battery charger output voltage and output current.
OUTPUT CURRENT #

CHARGER STATE # Displays the charging state that the battery charger has entered such
as recovery, bulk, absorption, float, equalize.

SFWR VER #
Displays the battery charger firmware version.

REDUCED OUTPUT Y/N Displays whether reduced output and temperature compensation are
TEMP COMP ACTIVE Y/N enabled.

BATTERY CHARGER 1 Returns the user to the Battery Charger 1 or 2 heading.

156 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 18—Battery Chargers
Menu 18 Displays with Key Entries
Key
Entry Display Description

BATTERY CHARGER 1
Returns the user to the battery charger selection menu.

BATTERY CHARGER
METERING
Returns the user to the Battery Charger Metering menu.

BATTERY CHARGER BASIC


Displays the Battery Charger Basic Configuration menu.
CONFIG

1-BATTERY TOPOLOGY  Displays the user-defined battery topology. Press the Down arrow key
(User Defined) Y/N if the correct battery topology is displayed. If the desired battery
topology is not displayed, press the Right arrow key until the desired
BATTERY TOPOLOGIES battery topology appears.
Default Y/N
FLA/VRLA N/Y Entering YES selects the battery topology shown. Note: Selecting one
AGM N/Y battery topology deselects any previously selected choice.
Gel N/Y
NiCad N/Y
BATTERY TOPOLOGY 
Press the Enter key.
(User Defined) YES

BATTERY TOPOLOGY 
Confirms the entry.
(User Defined) YES

CHARGER SYSTEM Displays the user-defined system voltage. Press the Down arrow key
VOLTAGE  (user Defined) Y/N if the correct system voltage is displayed. If the desired system
voltage is not displayed, press the Right arrow key until the desired
system voltage appears.
SYSTEM VOLTAGES
Entering YES selects the stem voltage shown. Note: Selecting one
12V Y/N
system voltage deselects any previously selected choice.
24V N/Y
BATTERY TOPOLOGY 
Press the Enter key.
(User Defined) YES

BATTERY TOPOLOGY  Confirms the entry.


(User Defined) YES

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 157


Menu 18—Battery Chargers, Continued
Menu 18 Displays with Key Entries
Key
Entry Display Description

AUTOMATIC EQUALIZE Enable equalization charge state. Note: Equalization is ONLY


ENABLED Y/N applicable for flooded lead acid (FLA or VRLA in the menu) type
batteries and will damage gel, absorbed glass mat (AGM), or
nickel-cadmium (NiCad) type batteries.
AUTOMATIC EQUALIZE NO
Entering YES activates the Equalize selection.

AUTOMATIC EQUALIZE YES


Press the Enter key.

AUTOMATIC EQUALIZE YES


Confirms the entry.

OR
AUTOMATIC EQUALIZE YES Entering NO deactivates the Equalize selection.

AUTOMATIC EQUALIZE NO
Press the Enter key.

AUTOMATIC EQUALIZE NO
Confirms the entry.

TEMP COMPENSATION
ENABLED Y/N

TEMP COMPENSATION NO Entering YES activates the Temperature Compensation selection.

TEMP COMPENSATION YES


Press the Enter key.

TEMP COMPENSATION YES


Confirms the entry.

OR
TEMP COMPENSATION YES Entering NO deactivates the Temperature Compensation selection.

TEMP COMPENSATION NO
Press the Enter key.

TEMP COMPENSATION NO
Confirms the entry.

ABSORPTION TERMINATION Use the key pad to enter the limit to determine when the absorption
????A charge state completes.
ABSORPTION TERMINATION
Confirms the entry.
#.###A

BATTERY CHARGER 1
Returns the user to the Battery Charger 1 heading.

158 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Menu 18—Battery Chargers, Continued
Menu 18 Displays with Key Entries
Key
Entry Display Description

BATTERY CHARGER 1
Returns the user to the battery charger selection menu.

BATTERY CHARGER
METERING
Returns the user to the Battery Charger Metering menu.

BATTERY CHARGER BASIC


CONFIGURATION
Displays the Battery Charger Basic Configuration menu.

BATTERY CHARGER Displays the Battery Charger Advanced Configuration menu.


ADVANCED CONFIG
Enables a customized battery charger profile. Note: ONLY adjust
CUSTOMER CHARGING parameters outside default to manufacturer recommended values.
PROFILE ENABLE Y/N Maladjustment will result in reduced battery performance and potential
harm to the battery.

CUSTOMER CHARGING NO
Entering YES activates the Customer Charging selection.

CUSTOMER CHARGING YES


Press the Enter key.

CUSTOMER CHARGING YES


Confirms the entry.

OR
CUSTOMER CHARGING YES Entering NO deactivates the Customer Charging selection.

CUSTOMER CHARGING NO
Press the Enter key.

CUSTOMER CHARGING NO
Confirms the entry.

BULK VOLTAGE ?.???VDC Use the keypad to enter the target bulk voltage setpoint.

BULK VOLTAGE
Confirms the entry.
#.###VDC

ABSORPTION VOLTAGE
Use the keypad to enter the target absorption voltage setpoint.
?.???VDC

ABSORPTION VOLTAGE
Confirms the entry.
#.###VDC

FLOAT VOLTAGE
Use the keypad to enter the target float voltage setpoint.
?.???VDC

FLOAT VOLTAGE
Confirms the entry.
#.###VDC

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 159


Menu 18—Battery Chargers, Continued
Menu 18 Displays with Key Entries
Key
Entry Display Description

MANUAL EQUALIZE ACTIVE Manual Equalize triggers a single equalize cycle on the next charge
Y/N cycle. The equalize cycle occurs between the absorption and float
cycle.
MANUAL EQUALIZE ACTIVE Entering YES activates the Manual Equalize selection.
NO

MANUAL EQUALIZE ACTIVE


Press the Enter key.
YES

MANUAL EQUALIZE ACTIVE


Confirms the entry.
YES

OR
MANUAL EQUALIZE ACTIVE Entering NO deactivates the Manual Equalize selection.
YES

MANUAL EQUALIZE ACTIVE


Press the Enter key.
NO

MANUAL EQUALIZE ACTIVE


Confirms the entry.
NO

TEMPERATURE COMP SLOPE Allows fine adjustment of the amount of temperature compensation to
--??mV/C follow an optimal manufacturer’s recommendation.

TEMPERATURE COMP SLOPE


Confirms the entry.
--##mV/C

EQUALIZE VOLTAGE Use the keypad to enter the target equalize voltage setpoint. Note:
?.???VDC Automatic Equalize must be set to enabled.

EQUALIZE VOLTAGE
Confirms the entry.
#.###VDC

MAX ABSORPTION TIME


???MIN
Use the keypad to set the maximum amount of time the battery
attempts to complete the absorption cycle.
MAX ABSORPTION TIME
Confirms the entry.
###MIN

MAX BULK TIME Use the keypad to set the maximum amount of time the battery
???MIN attempts to complete the bulk cycle.

MAX BULK TIME


Confirms the entry.
###MIN

BULK STATE RETURN Use the keypad to enter the measured battery terminal voltage at
VOLTAGE ?.???V which the charger will initiate a charge cycle at bulk.

BULK STATE RETURN


Confirms the entry.
VOLTAGE #.###V

BATTERY CHARGER1
Returns the user to the Battery Charger 1 heading.

160 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


2.8.19 Menu 20—Factory Setup Note: For Version 2.5.22 and lower, enter the numeric
serial number from the generator set nameplate.
Menu 20 provides generator set, alternator, controller, For Version 2.5.23 and higher, confirm that the
and engine identification information. The user can use alphanumeric number shown on the display
this menu to determine the generator set operating days matches the serial number shown on the
and identify the controller firmware (code) version. The generator set nameplate. If the serial numbers
factory setup menu information is locked by the match, press the YES key and then press
manufacturer. The temperature sensor setup applies to ENTER. If the serial numbers do not match, the
non-ECM engines only. wrong personality parameter file is installed.
Refer to the Program Loader documentation for
Note: This menu is for monitoring only; no adjustments instructions on reloading the personality
or user settings can be entered. parameter file.

Menu 20—Factory Setup


Key
Entry Display Description

ENTER MENU NO. 1--17 Input a menu number.

MAIN MENU NUMBER 20


Press the Enter key.

MENU 20 Displays the menu number and name.


FACTORY SETUP

FINAL ASSEMBLY DATE


Displays the final assembly date at the factory.
DD/MM/YY

FINAL ASSEMBLY
Displays the final assembly clock number at the factory.
CLOCK NO #

OPERATING DAYS #
Displays the generator set operating days.

MODEL NO # Displays the generator set model number.

SPEC NO #
Displays the generator set specification number.

GENSET SERIAL NO #
Displays the generator set serial number.

TP-6750 7/18d Local Programming Mode On Section 2 Operation 161


Menu 20—Factory Setup, continued
Key
Entry Display Description

ALTERNATOR PART NO #
Displays the alternator part number.

ENGINE PART NO #
Displays the engine part number.

TEMP SENSOR YES Displays the temperature sensor part number. Right arrow scroll thru
GM##### Y/N the available sensors (non-ECM models only).

DISABLE LOW COOLANT Displays the disable low coolant temperature warning (applies to
TEMP WARNING Y/N DD/MTU models with MDEC only).

TEST OVERSPEED Displays the test overspeed shutdown (applies to DD/MTU models
SHUTDOWN Y/N with MDEC only).

SERIAL NO CONFIRM 
Displays the generator set serial number confirmation display.

CONFIRM SERIAL? Y/N Press YES, if the display matches the generator set nameplate serial
###### number. Refer to the Menu 20 NOTE on the previous page if the
serial numbers do not match.
CONFIRM SERIAL? YES
Press the Enter key.
######

SERIAL NO CONFIRM 
Returns user to the Serial No. Confirm display.

CONTROLLER SERIAL NO # Displays the controller serial number.

CODE VERSION #.# Displays the controller firmware (code) version.


COPYRIGHT XXXX

REGULATOR  Displays the regulator parameters. Right arrow scroll thru the
PARAMETERS available screens.

SETUP LOCKED YES Displays the setup locked by the manufacturer.

162 Section 2 Operation Local Programming Mode On TP-6750 7/18d


Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance

Under normal operating conditions, the generator set’s Disabling the generator set. Accidental starting can
alternator requires no routine service. Consult Section cause severe injury or death. Before working on the
2.1, Prestart Checklist, for a list of routine checks. generator set or equipment connected to the set, disable the
generator set as follows: (1) Press the generator set off/reset
button to shut down the generator set. (2) Disconnect the
power to the battery charger, if equipped. (3) Remove the
3.1 Alternator Service battery cables, negative (--) lead first. Reconnect the negative
(--) lead last when reconnecting the battery. Follow these
When operating the generator set under dusty or dirty
precautions to prevent the starting of the generator set by the
conditions, use dry compressed air to blow dust out of remote start/stop switch.
the alternator while the generator set is running. Direct
the stream of air through openings in the generator set
end bracket.
WARNING

3.2 Engine Service


Perform engine service at the intervals specified in the Hot engine and exhaust system.
engine manufacturer’s service literature. Contact an Can cause severe injury or death.
authorized service distributor/dealer to obtain service
Do not work on the generator set until
literature. it cools.
Note: Have maintenance work, including battery
Servicing the exhaust system. Hot parts can cause
service, performed by appropriately skilled and
severe injury or death. Do not touch hot engine parts. The
suitably trained maintenance personnel familiar engine and exhaust system components become extremely
with generator set operation and service. hot during operation.

WARNING DANGER

Accidental starting. Hazardous voltage. Moving parts.


Can cause severe injury or death. Will cause severe injury or death.

Disconnect the battery cables before Operate the generator set only when
working on the generator set. all guards and electrical enclosures
Remove the negative (--) lead first are in place.
when disconnecting the battery.
Reconnect the negative (--) lead last Servicing the generator set when it is operating. Exposed
when reconnecting the battery. moving parts will cause severe injury or death. Keep
hands, feet, hair, clothing, and test leads away from the belts
and pulleys when the generator set is running. Replace
guards, screens, and covers before operating the generator
set.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance 163


3.3 Service Schedule
Action
System—Component Visually Inspect Check Change Clean Test Interval
Fuel System
Day tank level X X Weekly
Flexible lines and connections X R Weekly
Fuel level switch X X Weekly
Main tank supply level X Weekly
Solenoid valve operation X X Weekly
Transfer pump operation X X Weekly
Water in system, remove D D Weekly
Filter(s) D Quarterly
Gasoline supply R Six Months
Fuel piping X Yearly
Tank vents and return lines for obstructions X Yearly
Lubrication System
Oil level D D Weekly
Crankcase breather D D Quarterly
Change oil D First 50 Hrs., Then
Replace filter(s)* D Every 250 Hrs.
Cooling System
Air cleaner to room/enclosure X Weekly
Block heater operation X Weekly
Coolant level D D Weekly
Flexible hoses and connectors X X Weekly
Water pump(s) D Weekly
Fan and alternator belts D D R Monthly
Coolant temperature protection level D Six Months
Air ducts, louvers X X Yearly
Coolant D Yearly
Heat exchanger X Yearly
Louver motors and controls X X X Yearly
Radiator exterior X Yearly
Water supply to heat exchanger X Yearly
Exhaust System
Drain condensate trap X Weekly
Leakage X X Weekly
Insulation, fire hazards X Quarterly
Flexible connector(s) X Six Months
Excessive back pressure X Yearly
Hangers and supports X Yearly
DC Electrical System
Battery charger operation, charge rate X Monthly
Battery electrolyte level X Monthly
Battery specific gravity, charge state X Monthly
Recharge after engine start X Monthly
Remove corrosion, clean and dry battery and rack X X Monthly
Clean and tighten battery terminals X X Quarterly
Tighten DC electrical connections X Six Months
D Follow procedures and frequencies indicated in the engine manufacturer’s maintenance manual.
If not indicated, follow this service schedule. Some items may not apply to all generator sets.
R Replace as necessary.
X Action
* Service more frequently if operated in dusty areas.

164 Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance TP-6750 7/18d


Service Schedule, continued
Action
System—Component Visually Inspect Check Change Clean Test Interval
AC Electrical System
Controller lamp test X R Weekly
General Inspection X Weekly
Circuit breakers, fuses[ X X R X X Monthly
Wire abrasions where subject to motion X X Quarterly
Safety and alarm operation X X Six Months
Tighten control and power wiring connections X Yearly
Transfer switch main contacts[ X X Yearly
Voltage-sensing device/relay adjustment[ D D Yearly
3 Years or
Wire-cable insulation breakdown X X
500 Hrs.
Engine and Mounting
General inspection D Weekly
Governor operation, lubricate moving parts D D Monthly
Air cleaner service D D Six Months
Choke, carburetor adjustment D Six Months
Governor oil (mechanical governor only) D Yearly
Ignition components D D Yearly
Injector pump and injector flow rate, pressure, spray pattern D D Yearly
3 Years or
Valve clearance D 500 Hrs.
3 Years or
Bolt torque D D 500 Hrs.
Remote Control System, etc.
Compartment condition X X Weekly
Remote control X Monthly
Run generator set X Monthly
Alternator
General inspection X Weekly
Rotor and stator X X Yearly
Bearing condition X X R Yearly
Exciter X X X Yearly
Voltage regulator X X X Yearly
Measure and record resistance readings of windings with
insulation tester (Meggerr, with SCR assembly or rectifier X Yearly
disconnected)
2 Years or
Blow dust out of alternator* X D 300 Hrs.
General Condition of Equipment
Any condition of vibration, leakage, noise, temperature, or
X X X Weekly
deterioration
Ensure that system is set for automatic operation X Weekly
Interior of equipment room or outdoor weather housing X X Weekly
D Follow procedures and frequencies indicated in the engine manufacturer’s maintenance manual.
If not indicated, follow this service schedule. Some items may not apply to all generator sets.
R Replace as necessary.
X Action.
* Service more frequently if operated in dusty areas.
[ Do not break manufacturer’s seals or internally inspect these devices.

Meggerr is a registered trademark of Biddle Instruments.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance 165


3.4 Alternator Bearing Service 1. Place the fuel valves in the fuel system prime
position. Close the fuel valve located between the
Have an authorized service distributor/dealer perform pipe tee and the engine. Open the fuel valves on
service. each side of the fuel prime pump. See Figure 3-1.

3.4.1 20--300 kW Models Note: The illustration shows a generator set


without a fuel/water separator. The valve
Replace the end bracket bearing every 10,000 hours of location and position for a generator set
operation in standby and prime power applications. equipped with a fuel/water separator is
Service the bearing more frequently if the annual similar.
inspection indicates excessive rotor end play or bearing
damage. Replace the tolerance ring, if equipped, 2. Loosen the bleed screw at the engine. Refer to the
following end bracket removal. The sealed end bracket engine operation manual for location of the bleed
bearing requires no additional lubrication. screw(s). The bleed screw allows air to be expelled
from the fuel system when the hand prime pump is
operated.
3.4.2 300--2250 kW Models with
4M/5M/7M Single-Bearing 3. Rotate the hand prime pump handle
Alternator counterclockwise until fuel flows from the bleed
screw. Stop pumping.
The alternator bearing requires lubrication at intervals
specified in the generator set technical manual. Use 4. Tighten the bleed screw. Wipe up any fuel leakage.
Chevron SRI or equivalent antifriction, high-quality
grease with a lubrication temperature range of --30C to 5. Place the fuel valves in the normal operation
175C (--22F to 350F). position. Open the fuel valve located between the
pipe tee and the engine. Close the fuel valves on
each side of the fuel prime pump.
3.4.3 1250 kW and Larger Models with
10M Two-Bearing Alternator
Refer to the generator set service manual for bearing
maintenance information.

3.5 Diesel Fuel Systems


3.5.1 Bleeding Air from Fuel System
Bleed air from the fuel system after fuel system
maintenance, such as replacing the fuel filter(s). Use
the hand prime pump kit, when equipped. The hand
prime fuel pump eliminates the need for cranking the
engine to bleed air from the fuel system.
Close this Valve Open this Valve
Note: Bleed air from the fuel system according to the Open this Valve
engine manufacturer’s instructions. Trapped air
in the fuel system causes difficult starting and/or
erratic engine operation.
Valve Open Valve Closed
Note: Correct any fuel leaks encountered during the PK-272000-H

priming procedure. Figure 3-1 Hand Prime Pump with Valve Positions
for Fuel Priming (generator set without a
fuel/water separator shown), Typical

166 Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance TP-6750 7/18d


3.6 Gas Fuel Systems (REZG_ and 3.6.3 Natural Gas and LPG Conversion
REZX_/RZX_ models) Most models operate on either natural gas or LPG fuel
by performing the fuel conversion procedure. A hang
This section describes natural gas and liquified tag on the fuel regulator may provide additional
petroleum gas (LPG) fuel systems that are not covered conversion setup information. Fuel conversion may
in the engine operation manual or engine service decrease generator set output. Refer to the respective
manual. generator set spec sheet for ratings based on fuel
selection. Changing fuel does not alter the emissions
3.6.1 Gas Fuel System Concept compliance of the generator set engine. Consult your
local generator set distributor/dealer for additional
(Single Fuel) information.
The gas fuel system uses a fuel solenoid valve to control Note: If a gas-fueled model has the fuel type changed
the fuel flow to the electronic-controlled pressure (LPG to natural gas or natural gas to LPG), order
regulator (EPR). The generator set-mounted EPR a new nameplate from an authorized distributor/
reduces the fuel pressure as fuel passes to the fuel dealer with the updated ratings and attach to the
mixer. See Figure 3-2. generator set.
The fuel mixer controls the ratio of fuel to air under To change the fuel type, change the electrical
varying load and speed conditions. Because the fuel connections between the fuel system and the engine
mixer receives fuel in a gaseous state, it does not have ECM. The engine ECM has fuel tables and spark
to vaporize the fuel. advance curves programmed for both natural gas and
LPG. The information shown below, in Figure 3-3, and
3.6.2 LPG Liquid Withdrawal Fuel in Figure 3-4 generally apply to all models and all fuels.
Be sure to review the respective wiring diagram for your
System Concept specific model for possible special applications.
With the LPG liquid withdrawal fuel system, pressurized
liquid LPG fuel passes from the tank to a vaporizer. The Natural Gas Operation
vaporizer converts the liquid fuel to gas before sending it D Disconnect lead 65 from lead N5.
to the fuel EPR. The system also includes a fuel D Disconnect lead 73B from the fuel solenoid valve.
solenoid valve that shuts off the fuel flow when the
D Connect lead 73A to the fuel solenoid valve.
engine stops. Contact an authorized service
distributor/dealer for availability.
LPG Vapor Operation
D Disconnect lead 73A from the fuel solenoid valve.
2
1 D Connect lead 73B to the fuel solenoid valve (LPG
vapor).
D Connect lead 65 to lead N5 (ground).

LPG Liquid Withdrawal Operation


D Disconnect lead 73A from the fuel solenoid valve.
D Connect lead 73B to the fuel solenoid valve (LPG
3 liquid withdrawal).
D Connect lead 65 to lead N5 (ground).

Auto Changeover Natural Gas/LPG Vapor


Operation
D Disconnect lead 65 from N5.
SB-700
1. Electronic-controlled pressure regulator (EPR) D Connect lead N5 to LFP2 relay common terminal.
2. Fuel mixer D Connect lead 73A to the fuel solenoid valve (natural
3. Fuel solenoid valve
(UL--listed models require 2 fuel solenoid valves) gas).
D Connect lead 73B to the fuel solenoid valve (LPG
Figure 3-2 Fuel Regulator and Valve, Typical vapor).

TP-6750 7/18d Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance 167


ADV-7600B-B

Figure 3-3 Gas Fuel Connections Wiring Diagram


168 Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance TP-6750 7/18d
Eng. Natural LPG LPG Auto Emissions certified models use a single electronic-
ECM Gas Vapor Liquid Changeover controlled pressure regulator (EPR) for both fuels. A tee
QCON--7 fitting connects both fuels together upstream of the
QCON--7
73A
(NG fuel
not used (NG fuel solen-
EPR. During operation when using the secondary fuel, it
solenoid is normal for a small amount of secondary fuel to seep
oid valve)
valve)
back through the primary fuel solenoid valve. To counter
N5 not used 65 65 LFP2--COM
this situation, one of two methods is used depending
73B not used QCON--10 (LPG fuel solenoid valve) upon the generator set model: (1) a second solenoid
65 not used N5 N5 not used valve (identical to the primary fuel solenoid valve) is
63 LFP1--NC low fuel pressure sensor (if used) installed in a reverse configuration on the primary fuel
70E2 P6--B (15 amp fuse) side or (2) a small vent line is installed between the
primary fuel inlet and the air intake through a fuel
Figure 3-4 Gas Fuel Electrical Connections solenoid valve.

3.6.4 Fuel System Changeover Kits 3.6.5 Crankcase Ventilation (CCV)


(Dual Fuel) Heater Kit GM78171-KP1
(125/150REZG_/RZG_ models)
Automatic Changeover
The crankcase ventilation (CCV) heater kit provides a
A changeover fuel system kit provides automatic controlled heating source to the crankcase ventilation
changeover from natural gas to LPG vapor. The system preventing freezing water buildup during cold
primary and backup fuels each have a fuel solenoid
weather. The thermostat turns on at 4_C (40_F) and
valve. The primary fuel is natural gas; the backup fuel
turns off at 16_C (60_F) reducing energy consumption.
is LPG vapor. Before starting, both fuel solenoid valves
See Figure 3-5.
are closed. When the generator set starts, the primary
fuel solenoid valve opens. The primary fuel line has a
pressure switch in series with a relay connected to the 1 2
start/run circuit.

When the primary fuel pressure drops below 0.6 kPa


(1.4 oz./in.2) or 6.4 cm (2.5 in.) water column , a relay
opens the backup fuel solenoid valve and closes the
primary fuel solenoid valve. When the primary fuel
pressure rises above 0.6 kPa (1.4 oz./in.2) or 6.4 cm
(2.5 in.) water column, the generator set uses the
primary fuel. Contact an authorized service
distributor/dealer for kit availability. TT-1560

4 3
1. Heater element
2. Inline connector
3. Thermostat
4. AC power cord

Figure 3-5 Crankcase Ventilation Heater Kit

TP-6750 7/18d Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance 169


3.7 Cooling System 3.7.2 Cooling System Component
Inspection
The cooling system maintenance information applies to
radiator-cooled models which have a radiator with a To prevent generator set shutdown or damage caused
pressure cap and coolant recovery tank. by overheating:

D Keep the cooling air inlets clean and unobstructed.


WARNING
D Inspect the radiator’s exterior for obstructions.
Remove dirt and foreign material using a soft brush or
cloth to avoid damaging the radiator fins.

Hot coolant and steam. D Check the hoses and connections for leaks. Replace
Can cause severe injury or death. any cracked, frayed, or spongy hoses.
Before removing the pressure cap,
D Check the condition and tension of the radiator fan
stop the generator set and allow it to
cool. Then loosen the pressure cap and water pump belt(s). Follow the belt tension
to relieve pressure. procedure in this manual and/or the engine operation
manual.
Allow the engine to cool. Release pressure from the D Check the pressure cap seal and replace a cracked or
cooling system before removing the pressure cap. To deteriorated cap. Remove dirt and other debris from
release pressure, cover the pressure cap with a thick the pressure cap and filler neck. The pressure cap
cloth and then slowly turn the cap counterclockwise to raises the boiling point of the coolant, enabling higher
the first stop. Remove the cap after pressure has been
operating temperatures. Replace a leaking pressure
completely released and the engine has cooled. Check
cap with one rated for the same pressure. The
the coolant level at the tank if the generator set has a
pressure cap rating usually appears on the pressure
coolant recovery tank.
cap.
Note: Engine damage. Bleed the air from the cooling
system to prevent overheating and subsequent 3.7.3 Procedure to Drain Cooling
engine damage.
System
Note: Block heater damage. The block heater will fail For optimum protection, drain, flush, and refill the
if the energized heater element is not immersed cooling system at the intervals listed in the service
in coolant. Fill the cooling system before turning schedule.
on the block heater. Run the engine until it is
warm, and refill the radiator to purge the air from Note: Dispose of all waste materials (oil, fuel, coolant,
the system before energizing the block heater. filters, and gaskets) in an environmentally safe
manner.
3.7.1 Coolant Level Check 1. Deenergize the block heater, if equipped.
Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank.
2. Remove the pressure cap to allow the entire
Maintain the coolant level between the high and low
system to drain and prevent air pockets from
marks.
restricting coolant flow through the engine block.
Note: Periodically check the coolant level by removing
3. Open the radiator and/or engine block coolant
the pressure cap. Do not rely solely on the level in
drain valve(s) and allow the system to drain.
the coolant recovery tank. Add fresh coolant until
the level is just below the overflow tube opening 4. If the inside of the radiator has mineral deposits or
of the filler neck. the used coolant contains dirt or grease, refer to
Section 3.7.4, Procedure to Flush and Clean the
Cooling System. If the cooling system does not
have mineral deposits, go to Section 3.7.5,
Procedure to Refill the Cooling System.

170 Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance TP-6750 7/18d


3.7.4 Procedure to Flush and Clean 13. Replace the pressure cap.
Cooling System
14. Maintain the coolant level in the coolant recovery
Use the instructions in the engine operation manual tank between the high and low marks.
when available to flush and clean the cooling system.
Otherwise, use the following procedure and the cooling Air pockets often form in the engine water jacket
system cleaner manufacturer’s instructions. when the coolant system is refilled. Check the
coolant level in the coolant recovery tank after each
1. Flush the cooling system with clean water. generator set operation and add coolant as
necessary until the coolant level stabilizes. Then
2. If the inside of the radiator still has mineral check the coolant at the interval specified in the
deposits, use a radiator cleaner to remove the service schedule.
remaining deposits following the manufacturer’s
instructions. 15. Reenergize the block heater, if equipped.

3. Drain, clean, and flush the coolant recovery tank.


3.8 Radiator Fan Bolt Retorque
3.7.5 Procedure to Refill Cooling Check the radiator fan bolts after approximately 8 hours
System of operation and then recheck after each 100 hours of
operation. This scheduled service is required on
See the generator set spec sheet for coolant capacity. 1500 kW and larger unit-mounted radiator models using
a 2743 mm (108 in.) diameter fan.
Note: Do not add coolant to a hot engine. Adding
coolant to a hot engine can cause the cylinder Perform the scheduled service steps in the order shown.
block or cylinder head to crack. Wait until the
engine has cooled.
Required Tools
1. Remove the pressure cap. D Socket wrench sets American Standard and Metric
sizes
2. Close the radiator and/or engine block coolant
D Torque wrench, up to 203 Nm (150 ft. lb.)
drain valve(s) and tighten the cooling system hose
clamps.
Procedure
3. Open the air-bleed petcocks, if equipped. Close
the air-bleed petcocks when coolant begins to flow 1. Press the generator set master switch OFF button.
from them.
2. Disconnect the power to the battery charger, if
4. Add coolant additives or water pump lubricants equipped.
according to the engine manufacturer’s
3. Disconnect the generator set engine starting
recommendations in the engine operation manual.
battery(ies), negative (--) lead first.
5. Fill the cooling system with the recommended
4. Remove the fan guards, screens, and covers as
coolant/antifreeze mixture based on the engine
necessary to access the radiator fan hardware.
manufacturer’s recommendation.
5. Inspect the blades for cracks or other damage.
6. Replace the pressure cap.
Verify that all hardware is present. Replace as
7. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the low mark. needed.

8. Operate generator set until the thermostat opens 6. Retorque the (32 qty.) blade retention bolts/nuts to
when the upper cooling system hose warms. 136 Nm (100 ft. lb.). See Figure 3-6.

9. Stop the engine and allow it to cool. 7. Retorque the (12 qty.) hub boss cap screws to
102 Nm (75 ft. lb.). There are six screws on each
10. Check and repair any coolant leaks. side of the fan.

11. Remove the pressure cap. 8. Retorque the (3 qty.) bushing cap screws to 43 Nm
(32 ft. lb.).
12. Add coolant to bring the coolant level to just below
the overflow tube opening of the filler neck.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance 171


9. Replace the fan guards, screens, and covers that 3.9 Radiator Expansion Joint
were removed to access the radiator fan hardware.
Loosening—Initial Setup Only
10. Check that the generator set master switch is in the
Loosen the radiator expansion joint nuts on
OFF position.
1200--2000 kW generator sets that have radiators
11. Reconnect the generator set engine starting manufactured by Young Radiator Company. Expansion
battery, negative (--) lead last. joints located on each side of the radiator permit
differential thermal expansion of the radiator tank. The
12. Reconnect power to the battery charger, if factory tightens the 12 expansion joint nuts before
equipped. generator set shipment. Loosen the expansion joint
nuts one full turn before running the generator set. See
13. Press the generator set master switch RUN button Figure 3-7.
to start the generator set.

14. Listen and observe the fan operation. 4

1
2
1 2
3

3
TP-5353-3
1. Air flow
2. Expansion joint nuts for rear tank, left side
3. Expansion joint nuts for front tank, left side
4. Top front of radiator

Figure 3-7 Expansion Joint Nuts, Top Left Side of


Radiator, Typical

3.10 Radiator Fan Bearing


Lubrication
The following procedure applies only to 1200 kW and
larger generator sets. Lubricate the radiator fan shaft
SECTION A--A
GM18401-J
and idler shaft bearings at every engine oil change to
avoid bearing damage. Lubricate the bearings every
1. Blade retention bolts/nuts, 136 Nm (100 ft. lb.), qty. 32
200 hours of operation when the generator set runs in
2. Hub boss cap screws, 102 Nm (75 ft. lb.), qty. 12 ambient temperatures below 29C (85F) or when the
3. Bushing cap screws, 43 Nm (32 ft. lb.), qty. 3 generator set runs in a dusty and/or humid environment.
Figure 3-6 Fan Hardware Location and Torque
Lubrication and Drive Belt Adjustment Procedure
15. Immediately shut down the generator set if
Lubricate the fan shaft and idler shaft bearings with a
abnormal noise or fan assembly vibration is
lithium-complex base, multi-purpose grease with
observed. Correct the problem and go back to
antirust, antifoam, and extreme-pressure additives
step 13.
having a minimum dropping point of 204C (400F).
16. After several minutes of generator set operation Use Mobil Mobilith AW2 NLGI Grade 2 or equivalent.
without abnormal noise or vibration, shut down the
1. Press the generator set master switch OFF button.
generator set by pressing the generator set master
switch OFF button. 2. Disconnect the generator set engine starting
battery(ies), negative (--) lead first, and disconnect
power to the battery charger.

172 Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance TP-6750 7/18d


3. Remove the belt guards to expose the fan shaft and New Belt, Used Belt*,
idler shaft bearings. Generator Set Model N (lbf.) N (lbf.)
2450--2890 1650--1910
4. Inject grease into the two bearings on the fan shaft 1200-2250 kW
(550--650) (370--430)
block and the two bearings on the idler shaft block * A belt is considered used after 50 hours of service.
using a grease gun until a 3--6 mm (0.13--0.25 in.)
grease column shows at the bearing pressure relief Figure 3-9 Poly V-Belt Tension Specifications
port. See Figure 3-8.
7. Reinstall the belt guards using the original
Note: The fan shaft and idler shaft bearings have hardware.
pressure relief ports to prevent bearing
damage caused by overlubrication. 8. Reconnect the generator set engine starting
battery(ies), negative (--) lead last.
5. Remove excess grease from the bearing pressure
relief ports. 9. Test run the generator set for a few minutes and
listen for belt noise (squeal) indicating a slipping
belt. Stop the generator set.
1
If the belt slips after the belt tension procedure, clean the
pulley surfaces and repeat the belt tension procedure. If
slippage continues, replace the fan belt.

3.11 Air Cleaner Restrictor Indicator


5
The air cleaner restriction gauge mounted on the air
2 cleaner(s) helps determine the air cleaner change
interval.

The air cleaner restriction gauge monitors air flow and


continuously displays restriction readings indicated as
vacuum (see Figure 3-10). Increased restriction
indicates a clogged air cleaner element.

4
As maximum allowable restriction is reached, the gauge
window turns red indicating the air cleaner element
2
needs replacement. To reset the gauge, push the gauge
top down and release.
3
TP-5353-3 1
1
1. Grease fittings
2. Pressure relief port 3 10
15 2
3. Radiator assembly 19
22
4. Idler shaft grease fittings 25
5. Fan shaft grease fittings
273113
Figure 3-8 Radiator Fan Bearings and Pressure
Relief Ports, Typical 1. Push down to reset 2. Display 3. Gauge window

Figure 3-10 Restriction Indicators (styles vary)


6. Inspect the fan drive belt and replace if it is damaged
or worn. Check the fan belt tension using a poly
V-belt tension gauge and adjust the tension, if
necessary. See Figure 3-9.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance 173


3.12 Battery battery connections. Ventilate the compartments containing
batteries to prevent accumulation of explosive gases.

WARNING Battery short circuits. Explosion can cause severe injury


or death. Short circuits can cause bodily injury and/or
equipment damage. Disconnect the battery before generator
set installation or maintenance. Remove all jewelry before
servicing the equipment. Use tools with insulated handles.
Remove the negative (--) lead first when disconnecting the
battery. Reconnect the negative (--) lead last when
Sulfuric acid in batteries. reconnecting the battery. Never connect the negative (--)
Can cause severe injury or death. battery cable to the positive (+) connection terminal of the
starter solenoid. Do not test the battery condition by shorting
Wear protective goggles and the terminals together.
clothing. Battery acid may cause
blindness and burn skin. Refer to this section for general battery information and
maintenance. All generator set models use a negative
ground with a 12-volt or 24-volt engine electrical system.
Battery electrolyte is a diluted sulfuric acid. Battery acid Consult the generator set nameplate for the engine
can cause severe injury or death. Battery acid can cause electrical system voltage. Consult the generator set
blindness and burn skin. Always wear splashproof safety
spec sheet for battery capacity recommendations for
goggles, rubber gloves, and boots when servicing the battery.
Do not open a sealed battery or mutilate the battery case. If
replacement purposes. The wiring diagrams provide
battery acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, immediately battery connection information. See Figure 3-11,
flush the affected area for 15 minutes with large quantities of Figure 3-12, and Figure 3-13 for typical battery
clean water. Seek immediate medical aid in the case of eye connections, including multiple battery configurations.
contact. Never add acid to a battery after placing the battery in
service, as this may result in hazardous spattering of battery 1 2
acid.
1 2
Battery acid cleanup. Battery acid can cause severe
injury or death. Battery acid is electrically conductive and
corrosive. Add 500 g (1 lb.) of bicarbonate of soda (baking
soda) to a container with 4 L (1 gal.) of water and mix the
neutralizing solution. Pour the neutralizing solution on the
spilled battery acid and continue to add the neutralizing 1 2
solution to the spilled battery acid until all evidence of a
chemical reaction (foaming) has ceased. Flush the resulting
liquid with water and dry the area.
Battery gases. Explosion can cause severe injury or
death. Battery gases can cause an explosion. Do not smoke
or permit flames or sparks to occur near a battery at any time,
particularly when it is charging. Do not dispose of a battery in a
fire. To prevent burns and sparks that could cause an
explosion, avoid touching the battery terminals with tools or EZ-273000-J
other metal objects. Remove all jewelry before servicing the
1. To positive (+) terminal on starter solenoid.
equipment. Discharge static electricity from your body before 2. To ground (--) terminal on or near starter motor.
touching batteries by first touching a grounded metal surface
away from the battery. To avoid sparks, do not disturb the Figure 3-11 12-Volt Engine Electrical System Single
battery charger connections while the battery is charging. Starter Motor Typical Battery Connection
Always turn the battery charger off before disconnecting the

174 Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance TP-6750 7/18d


1 2 3.12.1 Clean Battery
Clean the battery and cables and tighten the battery
terminals according to the service schedule
recommendations. Clean the battery by wiping it with a
damp cloth. Keep the electrical connections dry and
2 1 tight.
1 2
If corrosion exists, disconnect the cables from the
battery and remove the corrosion with a wire brush.
Clean the battery and cables with a solution of baking
soda and water. Do not allow the cleaning solution to
enter battery cells. Flush the battery and cables with
clean water and wipe the battery with a dry cloth.
2 1 1 2 After reconnecting the battery cables, coat the terminals
with petroleum jelly, silicon grease, or other
nonconductive grease.

3.12.2 Electrolyte Level Inspection


Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity of
1. To positive (+) terminal on starter solenoid. batteries that have filler caps. Maintenance-free
2. To ground (--) terminal on or near starter motor. batteries do not require electrolyte level checking or
specific gravity testing.
Figure 3-12 24-Volt Engine Electrical System Single
Starter Motor Typical Battery Connection Check the electrolyte level at the specified interval.
Remove the filler caps and verify that the electrolyte
level reaches the bottom of each filler hole. See
1 2 3 4 Figure 3-14. Refill as necessary with distilled water or
clean tap water. Do not add fresh electrolyte. Tighten
the filler caps. After adding water during freezing
temperatures, run the generator set 20--30 minutes to
mix the electrolyte and the water to prevent battery
damage from freezing.

1 2 3 4

KW-272000-B
1. To positive (+) terminal on starter solenoid. 2
2. To ground (--) terminal on or near starter motor.
3. To positive (+) terminal on second starter solenoid. 1-046
4. To ground (--) terminal on or near second starter motor.
1. Filler caps
2. Electrolyte level
Figure 3-13 24-Volt Engine Electrical System Dual
Starter Motors Typical Battery Figure 3-14 Battery Electrolyte Level Inspection
Connections

TP-6750 7/18d Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance 175


3.12.3 Specific Gravity Check Correction
C F
Use a battery hydrometer to check the specific gravity of 71.1 160 + .032

the electrolyte in each battery cell of batteries with filler + .030

caps. Holding the hydrometer vertically, read the 65.6 150 + .028
Example No. 1
number on the glass bulb at the top of the electrolyte + .026
Temperature below 26.7C (80F)
level or the number adjacent to the pointer. If the 60.0 140 + .024

hydrometer used does not have a correction table, + .022 Hydrometer Reading 1.250
consult Figure 3-16. Determine the specific gravity and 54.4 130 + .020
Acid Temperature --6.7C (20F)
electrolyte temperature of the battery cells. Locate the + .018

temperature in Figure 3-16 and correct the specific 48.9 120 + .016 Subtract .024 Specific Gravity
Corrected Specific Gravity is 1.226
gravity by the amount shown. The battery is fully + .014

charged if the specific gravity is 1.260 at an electrolyte 43.3 110 + .012 1.250 -- .024 = 1.226
temperature of 26.7_C (80_F). Maintain the specific + .010

gravities between cells within 0.01 of each other. 37.8 100 + .008

Charge the battery if the specific gravity is below 1.215 + .006 Example No. 2
at an electrolyte temperature of 26.7_C (80_F). 32.2 90 + .004
Temperature above 26.7C (80F)
+ .002
Note: Some battery testers have four or five beads in a 26.7 80 0 Hydrometer Reading 1.235
test tube. Draw electrolyte into the tube as with -- .002
Acid Temperature 37.8C (100F)
the battery hydrometer described in this section 21.1 70 -- .004
or use the manufacturer’s instructions. Use --. 006 Add .008 Specific Gravity
Corrected Specific Gravity is
Figure 3-15 to interpret typical test results. 15.6 60 -- .008
1.243
-- .010

Number of Floating Beads Battery Condition 10 50 -- .012 1.235 + .008 = 1.243


-- .014
5 Overcharged
4.4 40 -- .016
4 Fully charged
-- .018
3 A good charge
-- 1.1 30 -- .020
1 or 2 A low charge -- .022

0 A dead battery -- 6.7 20 -- .024

-- .026
Figure 3-15 Bead-Type Test Interpretation
-- 12.2 10 -- .028

3.12.4 Charge Battery


Use a battery charger to maintain a fully charged battery
when the generator set is used in a standby application.
The engine battery-charging alternator charges the The temperature correction amounts to about .004 (4 points) of
battery while the generator set is running. specific gravity for each 5.5C (10F) change in temperature.
1-787

Note: If the generator set is in a temporary prime power Figure 3-16 Specific Gravity Temperature Correction
application in which the generator set has periods
of inactivity, the controller circuitry may drain the
battery. If there is no power source for a battery 3.13.1 Lubricating System
charger, place the controller in the prime power
Prepare the engine lubricating system for storage as
mode, if equipped, or disconnect the battery from
follows:
the generator set.
1. Run the generator set for a minimum of 30 minutes
3.13 Storage Procedure to bring it to normal operating temperature.

Perform the following storage procedure before taking a 2. Stop the generator set.
generator set out of service for three months or longer.
Follow the engine manufacturer’s recommendations, if 3. With the engine still warm, drain the oil from the
available, for fuel system and internal engine crankcase.
component storage.
4. Remove and replace the oil filter.

5. Refill the crankcase with oil suited to the climate.

176 Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance TP-6750 7/18d


6. Run the generator set for two minutes to distribute If a fogging agent is not available perform the following:
the clean oil.
1. Remove the spark plugs.
7. Stop the generator set.
2. Pour 15 cc (0.5 oz.) of engine oil into each spark
8. Check the oil level and adjust, if needed. plug hole.

Ignition System Damage. Refer to the engine


3.13.2 Cooling System operation manual for ignition system precautions
Prepare the cooling system for storage as follows: before cranking the engine while the spark plug
wires are disconnected.
1. Check the coolant freeze protection using a
coolant tester. 3. Crank the engine two or three revolutions to
lubricate the cylinders.
2. Add or replace coolant as necessary to ensure
adequate freezing protection. Use the guidelines 4. Reinstall the spark plugs and torque them to
included in the engine operation manual. specifications.

3. Run the generator set for 30 minutes to redistribute 3.13.5 Exterior


added coolant.
1. Clean the exterior surface of the generator set.
3.13.3 Fuel System 2. Seal all engine openings except for the air intake
Prepare the fuel system for storage as follows: with nonabsorbent adhesive tape.

Diesel-Fueled Engines 3. To prevent impurities from entering the air intake


and to allow moisture to escape from the engine,
1. Fill the fuel tank with #2 diesel fuel. secure a cloth over the air intake.

2. Condition the fuel system with compatible 4. Mask electrical connections.


additives to control microbial growth.
5. Spread a light film of oil over unpainted metallic
3. Change the fuel filter/separator and bleed the fuel surfaces to inhibit rust and corrosion.
system. See the engine owner’s manual.
3.13.6 Battery
Gas-Fueled Engines
Perform battery storage after all other storage
1. Start the generator set. procedures.
2. With the generator set running, shut off the gas 1. Confirm that the generator set is stopped.
supply.
2. Disconnect the battery(ies), negative (--) lead first.
3. Run the generator set until the engine stops.
3. Clean the battery. Refer to Section 3.12.1 for the
4. Stop the generator set. battery cleaning procedure.

3.13.4 Internal Engine Components 4. Place the battery in a cool, dry location.
(Gas-Fueled Engines) 5. Connect the battery to a battery charger or charge it
monthly with a trickle battery charger. Refer to the
If you have access to a fogging agent or SAE 10 oil
battery charger manufacturer’s recommendations.
prepare the pistons and cylinders for storage as follows:
Maintain a full charge to extend battery life.
1. Start the generator set.

2. While the engine is running, spray a fogging agent


or SAE 10 engine oil into the air intake for about two
minutes until the engine stops.

3. Stop the generator set.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance 177


Notes

178 Section 3 Scheduled Maintenance TP-6750 7/18d


Section 4 General Troubleshooting

This section contains generator set troubleshooting, Battle Switch/Fault Shutdown Override Switch. The
diagnostic, and repair information. battle switch function forces the system to ignore normal
fault shutdowns such as low oil pressure and high
Note: The controller clock must be set each time the engine temperature. The battle switch does not
engine battery(ies) are disconnected. The override the emergency stop and overspeed shutdown.
controller clock determines exercise run time and When the battle switch function is enabled, the
event records. See Menu 6—Time and Date, for generator set continues to run regardless of shutdown
setup. signals where potential engine/alternator damage can
occur.
Use the following charts to diagnose and correct
common problems. First check for simple causes such When this input is enabled, the yellow warning lamp
as a dead engine starting battery or an open circuit illuminates and stored warning/shutdown events that
breaker. The charts include a list of common problems, are ignored continue to log in Menu 5—Event History.
possible causes of the problem, recommended
corrective actions, and references to detailed See Section 2.8.9, Menu 9—Input Setup, for information
information or repair procedures. on how to enable the battle switch feature.

Maintain a record of repairs and adjustments performed Cooldown Temperature Override Function. This
on the equipment. If the procedures in this manual do function provides the ability to bypass the generator set
not explain how to correct the problem, contact an cooldown temperature shutdown and force the unit to
authorized distributor/dealer. Use the record to help wait for the engine cooldown time delay.
describe the problem and repairs or adjustments made
to the equipment. See Section 2.8.8, Menu 8—Time Delays, for
information on how to enable the cooldown temperature
override feature.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 4 General Troubleshooting 179


4.1 General Troubleshooting Chart
Trouble Symptoms

Section or
Publication

Does not crank


No or low output
voltage
Exercise run time
and/or event
records inoperative

Cranks but
does not start
Starts hard
Stops suddenly
Lacks power
Overheats
Low oil pressure
High fuel
consumption
Excessive or
abnormal noise
Displays error
message/locks up
Probable Causes Recommended Actions Reference*

180 Section 4 Troubleshooting


Alternator
x AC output circuit breaker open Reset the breaker and check for AC voltage at the generator —
set side of the circuit breaker.
x Transfer switch test switch in the OFF Move the transfer switch test switch to the AUTO position. ATS O/M
position
x Transfer switch fails to transfer load Move the ATS test switch to the AUTO position. ATS O/M, S/M
Troubleshoot the transfer circuit and time delays.
x Wiring, terminals, or pin in the exciter Check for continuity. Gen. S/M, W/D
field open
x Main field (rotor) inoperative Test and/or replace the rotor.[ Gen. S/M
(open or grounded)
x Stator inoperative (open or grounded) Test and/or replace the stator.[ Gen. S/M
x Vibration excessive Tighten loose components.[ —
x Voltage regulator digital settings Adjust the voltage regulator. Sec. 2.8.11,
incorrect (digital controller only) Menu 11
x Light flicker caused by armature leads Check that AC1, AC2, and AC3 from exciter armature are Gen. S/M, W/D
incorrectly connected to FRX activator correctly connected to the FRX activator board terminals.
board (FRX alternator only)
Electrical System (DC Circuits)
x x Battery connections loose, corroded, Verify that the battery connections are correct, clean, and Section 3
or incorrect tight.
x x Battery weak or dead Recharge or replace the battery. The spec sheet provides Section 3, S/S
recommended battery CCA rating.
x x Starter/starter solenoid inoperative Replace the starter or starter solenoid. Eng. S/M
x x Engine harness connector(s) not Disconnect the engine harness connector(s) then reconnect W/D
locked tight it to the controller.
x High water temperature switch Replace the inoperative switch. Gen. S/M or W/D
inoperative
x Fault shutdown Reset the fault switches and troubleshoot the controller. Section 2
x High exhaust temperature switch Replace the inoperative switch. Gen. S/M or W/D
inoperative

* Sec./Section—numbered section of this manual; ATS—Automatic Transfer Switch; Eng.—Engine; Gen.—Generator Set; I/M—Installation Manual; O/M—Operation Manual;
S/M—Service Manual; S/S—Spec Sheet; W/D—Wiring Diagram Manual
[ Have an authorized service distributor/dealer perform this service.

TP-6750 7/18d
Trouble Symptoms

TP-6750 7/18d
Section or
Publication

Does not crank


No or low output
voltage
Exercise run time
and/or event
records inoperative

Cranks but
does not start
Starts hard
Stops suddenly
Lacks power
Overheats
Low oil pressure
High fuel
consumption
Excessive or
abnormal noise
Displays error
message/locks up
Probable Causes Recommended Actions Reference*
Controller
x x Controller circuit board(s) inoperative Replace the controller circuit board. Gen. S/M
x Controller fault Troubleshoot the controller.[ Gen. S/M
x x x Controller fuse blown Replace the blown controller fuse. If the fuse blows again, Section 2, W/D
troubleshoot the controller.[
x TP-6750 Controller
7/18d master control buttons Replace the controller master control button circuit board. —
inoperative
x Controller master control button switch Press the controller master control RUN or AUTO button Section 2
in the OFF/RESET mode
x Engine start circuit open Move the controller master switch to the RUN position to Section 2, W/D,
test the generator set. Troubleshoot the auto start circuit Gen. I/M, S/M
and time delays. ATS O/M, S/M
x x Voltage regulation inoperative Replace the controller fuse, If the fuse blows again, Section Fuses,
troubleshoot the controller. Gen. S/M
x Controller firmware error Review the controller display troubleshooting chart. Section 4.2
x Controller clock not set Reset time and date. Section 2.8.6,
Menu 6
Engine
x x x x Air cleaner clogged Clean or replace the filter element. Eng. O/M
x x x x x Compression weak Check the compression.[ Eng. S/M
x x x x x Engine overload Reduce the electrical load. See the generator set spec S/S
sheet for wattage specifications.
x Exhaust system leak Inspect the exhaust system. Replace the inoperative I/M
exhaust system components.[
x Exhaust system not securely installed Inspect the exhaust system. Tighten the loose exhaust I/M
system components.[
x x x x Governor inoperative Adjust the governor.[ Gen. S/M
x x Valve clearance incorrect Adjust the valves.[ Eng. S/M
x Vibration excessive Tighten all loose hardware. —
x x x Ignition system inoperative (gas only) Check the ignition system Eng. O/M, S/M
(spark plugs, spark plug wires, etc.).

* Sec./Section—numbered section of this manual; ATS—Automatic Transfer Switch; Eng.—Engine; Gen.—Generator Set; I/M—Installation Manual; O/M—Operation Manual;
S/M—Service Manual; S/S—Spec Sheet; W/D—Wiring Diagram Manual
[ Have an authorized service distributor/dealer perform this service.

Section 4 Troubleshooting 181


Trouble Symptoms

Section or
Publication

Does not crank


No or low output
voltage
Exercise run time
and/or event
records inoperative

Cranks but
does not start
Starts hard
Stops suddenly
Lacks power
Overheats
Low oil pressure
High fuel
consumption
Excessive or
abnormal noise
Displays error
message/locks up
Probable Causes Recommended Actions Reference*
Cooling System
x x Air openings clogged Clean the air openings. —

182 Section 4 Troubleshooting


x Coolant level low Restore the coolant to normal operating level. Section 3
x Cooling water pump inoperative Tighten or replace the belt. Replace the water pump. Eng. O/M or S/M
x High temperature shutdown Allow the engine to cool down. Then troubleshoot the Sec. 3, Eng. O/M
cooling system.
x Low coolant level shutdown, if Restore the coolant to normal operating level. Section 3
equipped
x Thermostat inoperative Replace the thermostat. Eng. S/M
Fuel System
x x x Air in fuel system (diesel only) Bleed the diesel fuel system. Eng. O/M
x x Ether canister empty or system Replace or repair the ether starting system. Eng. O/M
inoperative, if equipped (diesel only)
x x Fuel tank empty or fuel valve shut off Add fuel and move the fuel valve to the ON position. —
x x x Fuel feed or injection pump inoperative Rebuild or replace the injection pump.[ Eng. S/M
(diesel only)
x x x Fuel or fuel injectors dirty or faulty Clean, test, and/or replace the inoperative fuel injector.[ Eng. S/M
(diesel only)
x x x x Fuel filter restriction Clean or replace the fuel filter. Eng. O/M
x Fuel solenoid inoperative Troubleshoot the fuel solenoid.[ Eng. S/M
x x Fuel pressure insufficient (gas only) Check the fuel supply and valves.[ S/S, Gen. O/M
x x x x Fuel injection timing out of adjustment Adjust the fuel injection timing.[ Eng. S/M
(diesel only)
Lube System
x x x x Crankcase oil type incorrect for Change the oil. Use oil with a viscosity suitable for the Eng. O/M
ambient temperature operating climate.
x x x Oil level low Restore the oil level. Inspect the generator set for oil leaks. Eng. O/M
x Low oil pressure shutdown Check the oil level. Eng. O/M

* Sec./Section—numbered section of this manual; ATS—Automatic Transfer Switch; Eng.—Engine; Gen.—Generator Set; I/M—Installation Manual; O/M—Operation Manual;
S/M—Service Manual; S/S—Spec Sheet; W/D—Wiring Diagram Manual
[ Have an authorized service distributor/dealer perform this service.

TP-6750 7/18d
4.2 Controller Display, Paralleling, and Voltage Regulation Troubleshooting Chart
Section or
Publication
Trouble Symptoms Probable Causes Recommended Actions Reference*

TP-6750 7/18d
Controller Display and Voltage Regulator
Display is black No/low battery charge Recharge/replace battery Section 3, Battery
Display shows single segment Low battery voltage Recharge battery Section 3, Battery
Display shows an error message Controller firmware or keypad entry Review the Request and Error Message Section Section 2.5.3 and
error 4.3 Controller
Error Message
Display shows an EEPROM WRITE ERROR message EEPROM fault caused by a Reinitialize the problem data block [ Contact an
component failure, lightening strike, or Authorized
voltage spike Distributor/Dealer
TP-6750 7/18d
Display locks up No/low battery charge Recharge/replace battery Section 3, Battery
Output voltage ramps Defective exciter winding Troubleshoot alternator components [ Generator Service
Manual
Output voltage unstable Voltage regulation calibration incorrect Readjust voltage regulation [ Menu 11, Voltage
Regulator
Voltage adjust does not function for paralleling applications Analog input A07 description does not Change description to Analog Volt Adjust using Monitor II or Monitor II
match Analog Volt Adjust Monitor III software or enable analog voltage adjust in Menu 11 Software manual,
Menu 9, Input
Setup
Unit does not shutdown with protective relay(s) settings Time delay value(s) are set to 99.99 Change time delay value(s) Section 2,
Operation

* Sec./Section—numbered section of this manual; ATS—Automatic Transfer Switch; Eng.—Engine; Gen.—Generator Set; I/M—Installation Manual; O/M—Operation Manual;
S/M—Service Manual; S/S—Spec Sheet; W/D—Wiring Diagram Manual
[ Have an authorized service distributor/dealer perform this service.

Section 4 Troubleshooting 183


4.3 Controller Error Message Troubleshooting Chart
The information in this chart refers to messages that may be related to parallelling control. Paralleling control may include, but is not limited to, such items as first-on,
synchronizing, load sharing and control, and circuit breaker control.
Most problems with paralleling are due to configuration or setup errors and/or hardware issues. Hardware issues could include incorrect wiring, wiring failure, and/or
device failures such as circuit breakers, relays, etc. Most of these problems will produce some form of diagnostic message that should help determine root cause.
The following chart is intended to give direction toward root cause determination.

Error Message Description Potential Causes Recommended Actions

184 Section 4 Troubleshooting


PGEN COMM NOT This controller is not communicating PGEN node ID is not set correctly Set PGEN node ID in Menu 16 to unique value (1--8)
ONLINE via PGEN to other nodes in the
system
DUPLICATE PGEN ID PGEN communicating has detected PGEN node ID is not set correctly Set PGEN node ID in Menu 16 to unique value (1--8)
another node in the system with the
same ID as this controller Communications hardware failure Check the RS-485 communications integrity
MISSING PGEN PGEN is receiving communications Number of nodes not set correctly Set the number of nodes to the proper value in Menu 16
NODE from fewer nodes on the bus than was One or more generator set is out of commission Temporarily set the number of nodes to the appropriate value in Menu 16
configured. The result will be or down for service maintenance
deteriorated paralleling operation. Temporarily ignore this message and continue to operate the remaining
generator set(s) until such time that all of the generator sets are functional again
One or more nodes are not online Check all other nodes for the following message: PGEN COMM NOT ONLINE
Verify that all other controllers are powered ON. Check for loose connections,
broken wires, fuses, batteries, etc.
Communication hardware failure Check the RS-485 communications integrity
EXTRA PGEN MODE PGEN is receiving communications Number of nodes is not set correctly Set the number of nodes to the proper value in Menu 16.
from more nodes on the bus than
configured, thus disabling functional Communications hardware failure Check the RS-485 communications integrity
detection of real communication If the number is correct, it may indicate some Check for missing resistor, loose connections, or incompatible wiring
failures problem with the communication bus
CB CLOSE ATTS The circuit breaker has failed to close A circuit breaker that has frequent closing issues Check and verify circuit breaker control parameters and function, Breaker
FAULT within the number of attempts may need more attempts to consistently close Energize TD and Breaker Reclose TD in Menu 17
designated in Menu 17 successfully (circuit breaker failure) Check and adjust Breaker Close Attempts in Menu 17
Check and repair or replace the circuit breaker and/or circuit breaker control
module as needed. Refer to documentation provided with the circuit breaker
Failed (closed) position sensing Check wiring from position contacts back to the digital input for Gen CB Aux. in
Menu 9
Verify position contacts at generator set circuit breaker
CB COMMON FAULT The fault message appears when any CB Close Atts Fault See CB CLOSE ATTS FAULT
one of the other 3 CB faults occur. CB Open Fault See CB OPEN FAULT
Refer to the respective fault
CB Current Fault See CB CURRENT FAULT

TP-6750 7/18d
Error Message Description Potential Causes Recommended Actions
CB CURRENT FAULT The position contacts indicate that the Circuit breaker failure Test circuit breaker and replace if needed.
circuit breaker is open or current fault Incorrect current transformer (CT) wiring Verify CT function including the wiring and number of turns. Reference voltage
above the limit set in Menu 17 (current reconnection drawings.
is measured exceeding the thresholds)
Failed (open) position sensing Check wiring from position contacts back to digital input for Gen CB Aux. in

TP-6750 7/18d
Menu 9
Verify position contacts at the generator set circuit breaker
Circuit breaker stuck closed Check and verify the circuit breaker control via procedures defined in
documentation provided with the circuit breaker and repair or replace as needed
Incorrect ammeter calibration Verify ammeter calibration in Menu 12
Incorrect threshold settings with CB Crnt Fault Check and adjust thresholds in Menu 17 as needed
Limit and/or CB Crnt Fault TD in Menu 17
CB OPEN FAULT The circuit breaker has failed to open Circuit breaker failure Test circuit breaker and replace if needed.
or the circuit breaker was not sensed TP-6750
Open time 7/18d
delay too short for the circuit breaker Open time is 3 times (3x) the energize time. Adjust Breaker Energize TD in
as open within the time delay. The Menu 17
open time delay is 3 times the
energize time Failed (open) position sensing Check wiring from position contacts back to the digital input for Gen CB Aux in
Menu 9
Verify position contacts at the generator set circuit breaker
Circuit breaker is stuck closed Check and verify the circuit breaker control via procedures in documentation
provided with the circuit breaker and repair or replace as needed
CB TRIP TO SD TD Indicates that a shutdown occurred No reset signal was provided before expiration Check method of reset—automatic or manual
because the time delay expired, and
no reset was indicated, since the Time delay too short for reset mechanism Check time delay period in Menu 15
generator set circuit breaker tripped Circuit breaker tripped unexpectedly Check potential causes for breaker trip, check for other messages, and check
unexpectedly the circuit breaker control module
DEAD BUS SENSING The controller has measured a dead Sensing failure (open connection on bus sensing Check and repair wiring from the bus sensing point back to the controller
FAULT bus, but other devices indicate that the lines) due to wiring failure, fuse blown, or
bus is live—another node senses the transformer failure
bus as live, another node has its
Another generator set circuit breaker is stuck Check the other generator set circuit breakers and position indicators
circuit breaker closed, or the utility
closed
circuit breaker is sensed as closed
Another generator set is communicating (PGEN Check the other generator set circuit breakers and position indicators
comms) live voltage at the bus
Utility circuit breaker stuck closed while the utility Check the utility feed circuit breakers and position indicators
feed is dead
EXTERNL BREAKER The circuit breaker has tripped The circuit breaker OPEN button is pressed Determine validity of the button being pressed. Lock the keypad if area is not
TRIP unexpectedly while in the AUTO mode while in the AUTO mode secured
Provide a Reset signal, digital input, or Modbus command
A digital input signaled the circuit breaker to trip Determine the source and validity of the open signal, check wiring to the digital
input, and check the assignment of the digital input
Provide a Reset signal, digital input, or Modbus command

Section 4 Troubleshooting 185


Error Message Description Potential Causes Recommended Actions
FIRST ON FAULT The generator set that was first up to Energize time delay too short Check the energize time delay in Menu 17
running speed and voltage, failed to Bad connection to energize inputs Check the wiring, relays, and power supply to energize the circuit from the
close its circuit breaker on the first circuit breaker back to the designated digital output
attempt thus passing its first on rights
to another generator set Circuit breaker held in trip mode Check the wiring, relays, and power supply to trip the circuit from the circuit
breaker back to the designated digital output
Circuit breaker over current trip active Check for over current trip at circuit breaker, see CB OVER CRNT TRIP
Failed position sensing Check position contacts and wiring back to digital input for GEN CB AUX in
Menu 9

186 Section 4 Troubleshooting


SYNC TIMEOUT The controller failed to bring the Time delay is too short for the generator set Adjust the Fail to Synch Time Delay in Menu 16
generator set into synchronization system
before the time delay expired Circuit breaker failed to close within the synch Check and compare circuit breaker time delays with respect to Fail to Synch
time delay Time Delay
Synch control parameters incorrect for generator Adjust the synch control parameters according to guidelines and procedures to
set system improve synchronizing performance
Engine speed control failed Verify engine speed control via manual synch procedure and repair or replace
as needed
Voltage control failed Verify voltage control via manual synch procedure and repair or replace as
needed

TP-6750 7/18d
Section 5 Generator Set Reconnection

5.1 Introduction Disabling the generator set. Accidental starting can


cause severe injury or death. Before working on the
Use the following voltage reconnection procedure to generator set or equipment connected to the set, disable the
generator set as follows: (1) Turn the generator set master
change the voltage of 10- and 12-lead generator sets.
switch and switchgear engine control switch to the OFF
Frequency changes require voltage regulator and position. (2) Disconnect the power to the battery charger.
governor adjustments. Refer to the respective spec (3) Remove the battery cables, negative (--) lead first.
sheet to determine if frequency is fixed or field- Reconnect the negative (--) lead last when reconnecting the
convertible. If frequency is adjustable, refer to the battery. Follow these precautions to prevent the starting of the
engine service manual and/or governor literature for generator set by an automatic transfer switch or a remote
conversion information. start/stop switch.
Disabling the generator set. Accidental starting can
Refer to the following procedure and the connection cause severe injury or death. Before working on the
schematics. Follow the safety precautions at the front of generator set or equipment connected to the set, disable the
this manual and in the procedure text and observe generator set as follows: (1) Press the generator set off/reset
National Electrical Code (NEC) guidelines. button to shut down the generator set. (2) Disconnect the
power to the battery charger, if equipped. (3) Remove the
NOTICE battery cables, negative (--) lead first. Reconnect the negative
(--) lead last when reconnecting the battery. Follow these
Voltage reconnection. Affix a notice to the generator set
precautions to prevent the starting of the generator set by the
after reconnecting the set to a voltage different from the remote start/stop switch.
voltage on the nameplate. Order voltage reconnection
decal 246242 from an authorized service distributor/
dealer. DANGER

Note: Equipment damage. Verify that the voltage


ratings of the transfer switch, line circuit breakers,
and other accessories match the selected line
voltage.
Hazardous voltage. Moving parts.
Will cause severe injury or death.
WARNING Operate the generator set only when
all guards and electrical enclosures
are in place.

Grounding electrical equipment. Hazardous voltage will


cause severe injury or death. Electrocution is possible
Accidental starting. whenever electricity is present. Ensure you comply with all
Can cause severe injury or death. applicable codes and standards. Electrically ground the
generator set, transfer switch, and related equipment and
Disconnect the battery cables before electrical circuits. Turn off the main circuit breakers of all
working on the generator set. power sources before servicing the equipment. Never contact
Remove the negative (--) lead first electrical leads or appliances when standing in water or on wet
when disconnecting the battery. ground because these conditions increase the risk of
Reconnect the negative (--) lead last electrocution.
when reconnecting the battery.
Short circuits. Hazardous voltage/current will cause
severe injury or death. Short circuits can cause bodily injury
and/or equipment damage. Do not contact electrical
connections with tools or jewelry while making adjustments or
repairs. Remove all jewelry before servicing the equipment.

TP-6750 7/18d Section 5 Generator Set Reconnection 187


5.2 Voltage Reconnection 6. Go to Menu 7—Generator System and update the
voltage information. See Section 2.8.7, Menu 7—
Procedure Generator System, for the complete procedure.
1. Press the generator set master switch OFF button.
7. Go to Menu 12—Calibration and perform the
2. Disconnect the generator set engine starting calibration procedure. See Section 2.8.12,
battery, negative (--) lead first. Disconnect power to Menu 12—Calibration, for the complete
the battery charger (if equipped). procedure.

3. Use Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2, or Figure 5-3 to 8. Go to Menu 11—Voltage Regulator and perform
determine the generator set voltage configuration. the voltage regulator setup procedure. See
Note the original voltage and reconnect as needed. Section 2.8.11, Menu 11—Voltage Regulator, for
Route leads through current transformers (CTs) the complete procedure.
and connect them according to the diagram for the
9. Press the generator set master switch RUN button
desired phase and voltage.
to start the generator set. Check the digital display
Note: Position current transformers CT1, CT2, for correct voltages using Menu 1—Generator
and CT3 with the dot or HI side CT marking Monitoring.
toward the generator set.
10. Press the generator set master switch OFF button
4. Reconnect the battery, negative lead last. to stop the generator set after comple